Service Manual (V1.22)

DRY LASER IMAGER
DRYPRO model 722

SERVICE MANUAL
Blank Page
DRYPRO model 722 SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
0.1 Caution Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-1
0.1.1. Explanation of caution labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-1
0.1.2. Description on labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
0.1.3. Location of caution labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
0.2 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1 DRYPRO 722 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.2 LiS-722 (Sorter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2 Overview of DRYPRO 722 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.1 Function of each section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.2 Overview of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3 Electrical Parts Layout Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.3.1 Layout and names of loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.3.2 Layout and names of sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.3.3 Layout and names of boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.4 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.5 Equipment Required for Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.6 How to use the Interlock Release Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Chapter 2 Disassembling and Assembling the Main Units

2.1 Before Disassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 Cautions on disassembling/assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2 Name and placement of the outer covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.3 Name and placement of units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.4 Flowchart of disassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2 Removing Outer Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.1 Removing the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.2 Removing the right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.3 Opening the left cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.4 Removing the lower cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.5 Removing the sorter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3 Removing the Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.1 Removing the front transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.2 Drawing out the tray unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.3.3 Removing the supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.3.4 Removing the lower transport unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.3.5 Removing the elevator transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.3.6 Removing the subscan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.3.7 Removing the optical unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.3.8 Removing the control panel unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.3.9 Removing the power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.4 Replacing Components in Control Panel Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.4.1 Replacing the control panel board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.4.2 Replacing the LCD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.4.3 Replacing the touch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6 i

Contents
2.5 Replacing Components in Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

2.5.1 Removing the sucker unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.5.2 Replacing the separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.5.3 Replacing the tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.4 Replacing the supply drive board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2.5.5 Replacing the film empty sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.5.6 Replacing the bar code reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.5.7 Replacing the sucker release sensor (PS20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
2.5.8 Replacing the sucker home position sensor (PS21) / sucker separation sensor (PS22) . . 2-55
2.5.9 Replacing the tray set sensor (PS23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
2.5.10 Replacing the shutter home position/open/close sensors (PS19/PS24/PS25) . . . . . . . . . 2-58
2.5.11 Replacing the suction stop valve (MV1) and suction pump (P1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
2.5.12 Replacing the film transport motor (M8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
2.5.13 Replacing the barrier taking-up motor (M9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
2.5.14 Replacing the sucker motor (M10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
2.5.15 Replacing the shutter motor (M7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
2.6 Replacing Components in Front Transport Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
2.6.1 Replacing the 2-sheet sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
2.6.2 Replacing and adjusting the front cover solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
2.6.3 Replacing the front transport section film pass sensor (PS7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
2.7 Replacing Components in Lower Transport Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
2.7.1 Opening the support plate assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
2.7.2 Removing the tilt tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
2.7.3 Replacing the lower transport section entrance sensor (PS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.7.4 Replacing the tilt tray home position sensor (PS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
2.7.5 Replacing the tilt tray film sensor (SB1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
2.7.6 Replacing the pusher home position sensor (PS3) and pusher limit sensor (PS4) . . . . . . 2-81
2.7.7 Replacing the front transport motor (M2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
2.7.8 Replacing the pusher motor (PM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
2.7.9 Replacing the tilt tray motor (M1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
2.8 Replacing Components in Exposure Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
2.8.1 Replacing the V-sync upper sensor (SB4) and V-sync lower sensor (SB3) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
2.8.2 Replacing the DD driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
2.9 Replacing Components in Elevator Transport Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.9.1 Replacing the nip roller home position sensor (PS5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.9.2 Replacing the nip roller film pass sensor (SB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
2.9.3 Replacing the HPRO section entrance sensor (PS6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
2.9.4 Replacing the nip roller motor (M4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
2.9.5 Replacing the elevator transport drive motor (PM2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
2.10 Replacing Components in Heat Processing (HPRO) Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.10.1 Replacing the heat roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.10.2 Removing the lower rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
2.10.3 Replacing the felt of the separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
2.10.4 Replacing the felt of the discharge section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
2.10.5 Replacing the densitometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
2.10.6 Removing the HPRO cover assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
2.10.7 Replacing the densitometer entrance sensor (PS8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
2.10.8 Replacing the FILTER set sensor (PS18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
2.10.9 Replacing the heat roller motor (M19). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
2.10.10 Replacing the film discharge motor (PM3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
2.11 Replacing Components in Outer Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.11.1 Opening the control box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.11.2 Replacing the mechanical control curcuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.11.3 Replacing the hard disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
2.11.4 Replacing the CPU circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
2.11.5 Replacing the print control board (Adding print memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
2.11.6 Replacing the density I/F board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
ii DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6

Contents
2.12 Disassembling Sorter and Replacing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128

2.12.1 Removing the outer covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
2.12.2 Removing the bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
2.12.3 Exchanging the right cover detection micro switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
2.12.4 Replacing the release lever detection micro switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
2.12.5 Removing the jam detection sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
2.12.6 Replacing the sorter drive motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
2.12.7 Replacing the gate switching solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
2.12.8 Replacing the sorter drive board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144
Chapter 3 Checking and Adjusting

3.1 Adjusting Supply Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 Adjusting the voltage of the film empty sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.2 Adjusting the voltage of the 2-sheet sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.3 Adjusting the phase of the sucker operation encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.4 Adjusting the timing of separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.5 Adjusting the position of separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.1.6 Adjusting the tension of the barrier taking-up belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1.7 Checking and adjusting the shutter slide resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.8 Adjusting the open/close position of the shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.1.9 Adjusting the position of the shutter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.2 Adjusting Front Transport Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.2.1 Adjusting the magnet catch of the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.2.2 Checking and adjusting the moving guide pusher pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.2.3 Adjusting the tension of the belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.2.4 Adjusting the left cover interlock (S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.2.5 Adjusting lower cover interlock (S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.3 Adjusting Lower Transport Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.3.1 Adjusting the inclination of the pusher roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.3.2 Adjusting the magnet catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.3.3 Adjusting the position of the pusher claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.3.4 Adjusting the tension of the front transport motor (M2) belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.3.5 Adjusting the tension of the film pusher motor (PM1) belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.4 Checking and adjusting Exposure Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.4.1 Adjusting the nip pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.4.2 Cleaning the subscan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.4.3 Cleaning the laser mirror of the optical unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.4.4 Checking the LD transmitter (PD signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.4.5 Confirming LD radiation (IR card) and measuring the amount of radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.4.6 Checking and adjusting the angle of the H-sync mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.4.7 Checking the H-sync circuit board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.5 Elevator Transport Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.5.1 Adjusting the open position of the nip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.5.2 Adjusting the belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.6 Heat Processing (HPRO) Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.6.1 Adjusting the belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.7 Checking and Adjusting Power Supply Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.7.1 Checking the DC power voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.7.2 Checking the AC power voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.7.3 VR adjustment of DC power voltage (3.3V/5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.7.4 VR adjustment of DC power (±12V/+24V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.7.5 Descriptions on the control box cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6 iii

Contents
3.8 Checking and Adjusting Sorter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

3.8.1 Checking AC power voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.8.2 Adjusting DC power voltage (5V / 12V). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.8.3 Adjusting the voltage of the jam detection sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.8.4 Adjusting belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
3.9 Correcting Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
3.9.1 Correcting irregularities in pitch and density of left and right sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
3.9.2 Stopping the time-changing density correction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.9.3 Correction of the densitometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3.9.4 Correcting the densitometer correction file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3.9.5 Correcting the start position for writing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Chapter 4 Error Codes and Remedies

4.1 Types of Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Remedies for F6000 and F6001 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3 Main Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3.1 Error Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3.2 Errors that can be remedied on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.4 Mechanical Control Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.4.1 Errors related to the main communication (007 - 013 / E4Fx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.4.2 Errors related to the outer cover (203 - 209 / E4A4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.4.3 Errors related to ROM/RAM (052 - 067 / F4A30 - F4234) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.4.4 Errors related to DownLoad (069 - 072 / F4A36 - F4A39) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.4.5 Errors related to the supply section (101 - 128 / E4110 - E4227) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.4.6 Errors related to the lower transport section - subscan section
(135 - 149 / E4310 - E4531) . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.4.7 Errors related to the elevator transport section (152 - 156 / E4610 - E4621) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4.8 Errors related to the heat adjustment of the HPRO section (169 - 176 / E3000 - E3007) . 4-31
4.4.9 Errors related to the heat processing (HPRO) section - discharge section
(177 - 182 / E4710 - E4810) . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.4.10 Errors related to the mechanical control maintenance PC
(220 - 323 / E4A3A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.4.11 Errors related to MS-DOS (501 - 597) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.5 Troubles with Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.5.1 Troubles with print image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.5.2 Scratched or stained films. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.6 Troubles with Film Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.7 Troubles Related to Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.8 Other Troubles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Chapter 5 Maintenance
5.1 Items for Periodical Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Cleaning the HPRO Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 Procedures for cleaning the HPRO section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.2 Cleaning the FILTER case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.3 Cleaning the periphery of the rear side of the control panel unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.4 Cleaning the roller cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.5 Cleaning the duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.6 Replacing the duct packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.2.7 Cleaning the inner side of the inner cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.2.8 Replacing the packing of the inner cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.9 Cleaning the brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.10 Cleaning the guide plate (entrance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
iv DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6

Contents
5.2.11 Cleaning the separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

5.2.12 Checking the operation of the separation claw roller
bearings moving arm and the separation claw roller bearings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.2.13 Replacing the separation claw felt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.2.14 Cleaning the opposite rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.15 Cleaning the slip ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.2.16 Cleaning the heat roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.2.17 Checking and adjusting the separation claw clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.2.18 Cleaning the guide plate (cooling discharge section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.2.19 Confirming after cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.3 Cleaning Other Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.3.1 Cleaning the filter (for the control box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.4 Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.4.1 Heat roller drive gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.4.2 Heat roller motor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Chapter 6 Service Screens on Control Panel Section

6.1 Service Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1 How to display service screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.2 SERVICE1/4 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.3 SERVICE2/4 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.1.4 SERVICE3/4 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.1.5 SERVICE 4/4 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2 CORRECT Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3 Test Pattern Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.4 Version Scereen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.5 Flow Chart of Service Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Chapter 7 Maintenance PC
7.1 Connecting and Starting Mechanical Control Maintenance PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1 Connecting maintenance PC and DRYPRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.2 Starting mechanical control maintenance PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2 Description on Screens of Mechanical Control Maintenance PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.1 Title screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.2 Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.3 Unit test menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.4 Unit test; Overall transport test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.2.5 Unit test; Supply test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.2.6 Unit test; Lower transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.2.7 Unit test; Elevator transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.2.8 Unit test; Heat processing - Discharge section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.2.9 Unit test; Sorter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.2.10 Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.2.11 Setup; Nip pressure SOL value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.2.12 Setup; Pusher motor value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.2.13 Setup; Optical DD motor value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.2.14 Setup; Elevator transport motor value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7.2.15 Setup; Heat roller motor value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.2.16 Setup; Discharge motor value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.2.17 Setup; Supply processing value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7.2.18 Setup; Lower transport tray processing value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.2.19 Setup; Sorter processing value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.2.20 Setup; Saving setup data in file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.2.21 Counter display; Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6 v

Contents
7.2.22 Counter display; Operation time display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

7.2.23 Counter display; Film data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.2.24 Load test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.2.25 Input port display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7.2.26 RAM clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7.2.27 Error count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.2.28 Error log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7.2.29 Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.2.30 Dummy communication (HPRO dummy communication). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7.3 Connecting Mechanical Control Maintenance PC to Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7.3.1 Network connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7.3.2 Scripts and commands of Telnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7.3.3 Initializing the set file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7.3.4 Backing up the set file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7.3.5 Restoring the set files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7.3.6 Collecting log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
7.3.7 Clearing the log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7.3.8 Check control of film type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7.3.9 Displaying the sum of films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
7.3.10 Displaying the filter exchange time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
7.4 Install Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.4.1 Before starting install software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.4.2 Main screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
7.4.3 File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7.4.4 Software menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
7.4.5 Reset menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
7.4.6 Maintenance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
7.4.7 Help menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
7.4.8 System screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
7.4.9 System dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
7.4.10 Channel setting screen 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
7.4.11 Channel setting screen 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
7.4.12 SCU-DICOM dialogue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
7.4.13 SCU-Film dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
7.4.14 SCU-Format dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
7.4.15 SCU-LUT dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
7.4.16 Stamp setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
7.4.17 SCU-Stamp-Strings dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
7.4.18 SCU-Stamp-Information dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
7.4.19 SCU-Stamp-Format dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
7.4.20 Correction screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
7.4.21 Correction-Smooth dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
Chapter 8 Upgrading
8.1 Upgrading the DRYPRO 722 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 Controlling the version of the DRYRO 722 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Upgrading the Main Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2.1 Backing up the setting file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2.2 Upgrading the main software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.3 Restoring the set files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.3 Upgrading the mechanical control software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.3.1 How to upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.3.2 When failing a download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.3.3 When the Flash ROM does not activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.4 Upgrading the HPRO CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.4.1 Installing the HPRO software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.4.2 Initializing and setting the offset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
vi DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6

Contents
8.5 Upgrading the Control Panel Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

8.5.1 Replacing the ROM in the control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Chapter 9 Appendix
9.1 Explanation of Sucker Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.3 File Names and the Timing to Create Log Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.3.1 Automatic creation of log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.3.2 Operations upon starting log command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.4 Using telnet and ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4.1 Using telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4.2 Using ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.5 Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.5.1 Supply volume board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.5.2 Supply drive board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.5.3 H-sync circuit board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.4 Heat roller motor driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.5.5 HPRO CPU circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.5.6 HPRO power circuit board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.5.7 HPRO I/F board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.5.8 Control panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.5.9 Power I/F board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9.5.10 Print control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.5.11 DENS I/F circuit board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.5.12 Mechanical control circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.5.13 Relay board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.6 Timing Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.6.1 Pick up operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.6.2 Supply operation–Front transport–Feed 1 operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.6.3 Exposure operation–Elevator transportation operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.6.4 HPRO section transport–Discharge section transport operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9.6.5 Sorter transport operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
9.6.6 Bar code reading & Barrier taking-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9.7 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9.10 Sorter Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6 vii

Blank Page
0.1 Caution Labels
0.1.1. Explanation of caution labels
• Caution labels imply the degree of the risk that may arise from incorrect use of this product.
• There are 3 degrees of caution labels, and each is used depending on the level of risk and damage caused by
incorrect use and mishandling.
DANGER: If failed to avoid the risk, this implies the imminent danger level that may lead to serious
injury including a loss of life.
WARNING: If failed to avoid the risk, this implies the danger level that may lead to serious injury in-
cluding a loss of life.
CAUTION: If failed to avoid the risk, this implies the danger level that may lead to moderate damage
or light injury. Also it is used when a physical damage alone is expected.
Risk of the Damage
High Low
Bodily injury Loss of life or serious

(and damage to property) injury DANGER WARNING
(Damage is serious)
Moderate damage or light WARNING

injury or CAUTION
(Damage is light) CAUTION
Damage to property only CAUTION
DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.1 2001.3 0-1

0.1 Caution Labels
0.1.2. Description on labels

• Electric shock caution label • Heat caution 80
/ WARNING / WARNUNG CAUTION ACHTUNG
DANGERROUS VOLTAGE The temperature of the transport unit may

Be careful to avoid electric shock. 80 reach 80°C(176°F)
When removing the power section cover, Do not touch hot surface.
be sure to turn off the main power switch. To remove jammed film, open top-cover,
wait a minimum of 20 minutes, remove film.
Gefährllche Spannung! HIGH
Seien Sie vorsichtig, um elektrische TEMPERATURE Die Temperatur beträgt ca. 80°C
Stromschläge zu vermeiden. Sollten Sie einen Film aus diesem Bereich entfernen
Stellen Sie vor Entfernung der Abdeckung müssen, vermelden Sie Verbrennungen,indem Sie
des Elektroteils sicher, daß der Haupt- HOHE vor dem Öffnen der Abdeckung eine
Netzschalter ausgeschaltet ist. TEMPERATUR Abkühlzeit von mindestens 1 Stunde einhalten.
• Heat caution 125 • Heat caution 125-2 -2
CAUTION ACHTUNG
CAUTION ACHTUNG
125 The Temperature of the developing unit

may reach 125°C(257°F) 125
Do not touch hot surface.
HIGH To remove jammed film, open top-cover,
HIGH
TEMPERATURE wait a minimum of 60 minutes, remove film. TEMPERATURE
Die Temperatur beträgt ca. 125°C. HOHE
HOHE
Sollten Sie einen Film aus diesem Bereich TEMPERATUR
TEMPERATUR entfernen müssen, vermelden Sie Verbrennungen,
indem Sie vor dem Öffnen der Abdeckung eine
Abkühlzeit von mindestens 1 Stunde einhalten.
• Laser caution label 1 • Laser caution label 2
CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. CLASS 3B LASER
VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUN NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
GEOFFNET. NICHT DE,M STRAHL AUSSETZEN LASER KLASSE 3B
WARNING
Laser light may be irradiated to your eyes
directly in a situation in which this label is
displayed.
0-2 DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.1 2001.3

0.1 Caution Labels
• Laser class 1 label • Laser power label
Maximum Output
Maximale Ausgangswert 160mW
Wavelength
810nm
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Wellenlänge
Continuous Wave
LASER KLASSE 1 Dauerstrichlaser

IEC 825-1 ( 1993-11)
• Caution for heat roller
Do not touch Heat-Roller

Surface
Achtung bei der Bedienung.
CAUTION
The heat-roller surface is easily damaged.
To prevent damage, do not touch or use any type of tool to remove
jammed film.
ACHTUNG
Im Falle einer Beschadigungen der Heizungsrollen-Oberflache kann die
Bildqualitat unbrauchbar werden und die Funktion des Gerates stoppen.
Die Beseitigung von Filmen aus diesem Bereich muß deshalb auBerst
vorsichlig, ohne Verwendung von Werkzeugen, erfotgen.
• Handling heat roller jams

E4611• E4710
CAUTION LIFT UP LIFT UP

Anheben Anheben
ACHTUNG
LOCK
Festsetzen
SLOWLY DOWN
Langsam
absenken
• Handling cooling section jams

E4810
CAUTION ACHTUNG CAUTION

Pulling lever without filter in Das Ziehen eines VerschluBhebels,
ACHTUNG
place will cause filter housing ohne eingesetzten Geruchsfilter,
to spring upward. kann zum Herausspringen der
DO NOT move lever if filter is Filtereinheit führen.
missing from the filter unit. Die VerschluBhebel nicht betatigen,
wenn kein Geruchsfilter eingesetztist.
80

0.1 Caution Labels
0.1.3. Location of caution labels

[Caution] To avoid electric shocks and burns, do not remove or stain the labels.
[Caution] When the labels cannot be read because they have been stained or unstuck, replace them
with a new label.
• Front Side
CAUTION ACHTUNG
125
HIGH
TEMPERATURE
HOHE
TEMPERATUR
• Left Side
CAUTION ACHTUNG
125
HIGH
TEMPERATURE
HOHE
TEMPERATUR
/ WARNING / WARNUNG
DANGERROUS VOLTAGE
Be careful to avoid electric shock.
When removing the power section cover,
be sure to turn off the main power switch.
Gefährllche Spannung!
Seien Sie vorsichtig, um elektrische
Stromschläge zu vermeiden.
Stellen Sie vor Entfernung der Abdeckung
des Elektroteils sicher, daß der Haupt-
Netzschalter ausgeschaltet ist.

0.1 Caution Labels
• Rear Side
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1
CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
VORSICHT
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUN
GEOFFNET. NICHT DE,M STRAHL AUSSETZEN
/ WARNING / WARNUNG
DANGERROUS VOLTAGE
Be careful to avoid electric shock.
When removing the power section cover,
be sure to turn off the main power switch.
Gefährllche Spannung!
Seien Sie vorsichtig, um elektrische
Stromschläge zu vermeiden.
Stellen Sie vor Entfernung der Abdeckung
des Elektroteils sicher, daß der Haupt-
Netzschalter ausgeschaltet ist.

0.1 Caution Labels
• Top Side
E4810
CAUTION ACHTUNG CAUTION

Pulling lever without filter in Das Ziehen eines VerschluBhebels,
ACHTUNG
place will cause filter housing ohne eingesetzten Geruchsfilter,
to spring upward. kann zum Herausspringen der
DO NOT move lever if filter is Filtereinheit führen.
missing from the filter unit. Die VerschluBhebel nicht betatigen,
wenn kein Geruchsfilter eingesetztist.
80
CAUTION ACHTUNG
125 The Temperature of the developing unit

may reach 125°C(257°F)
Do not touch hot surface.
HIGH To remove jammed film, open top-cover,
TEMPERATURE wait a minimum of 60 minutes, remove film.
HOHE Die Temperatur beträgt ca. 125°C.
Sollten Sie einen Film aus diesem Bereich
TEMPERATUR entfernen müssen, vermelden Sie Verbrennungen,
indem Sie vor dem Öffnen der Abdeckung eine
Abkühlzeit von mindestens 1 Stunde einhalten.
Do not touch Heat-Roller

Surface
Achtung bei der Bedienung.
CAUTION
The heat-roller surface is easily damaged.
To prevent damage, do not touch or use any type of tool to remove
jammed film.
ACHTUNG
Im Falle einer Beschadigungen der Heizungsrollen-Oberflache kann die
Bildqualitat unbrauchbar werden und die Funktion des Gerates stoppen.
Die Beseitigung von Filmen aus diesem Bereich muß deshalb auBerst
vorsichlig, ohne Verwendung von Werkzeugen, erfotgen.
CAUTION ACHTUNG
CAUTION ACHTUNG
125
HIGH
The temperature of the transport unit may
TEMPERATURE 80 reach 80°C(176°F)
HOHE Do not touch hot surface.
TEMPERATUR To remove jammed film, open top-cover,
wait a minimum of 20 minutes, remove film.
HIGH
TEMPERATURE Die Temperatur beträgt ca. 80°C
Sollten Sie einen Film aus diesem Bereich entfernen
müssen, vermelden Sie Verbrennungen,indem Sie
HOHE vor dem Öffnen der Abdeckung eine
TEMPERATUR Abkühlzeit von mindestens 1 Stunde einhalten.
E4611• E4710
CAUTION LIFT UP LIFT UP

Anheben Anheben
ACHTUNG
LOCK
Festsetzen
SLOWLY DOWN
Langsam
absenken

0.1 Caution Labels
• Subscan unit
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
LASER KLASSE 3B
• Optical unit
Maximum Output
Maximale Ausgangswert 160mW
Wavelength
Wellenlänge 810nm
Continuous Wave
Dauerstrichlaser
IEC 825-1 ( 1993-11)

0.2 Precautions
Please read and acknowledge the following items thoroughly before conducting service.
• Precautions on the safety of workers

• A laser beam device (Class3b) is installed in this device. Direct exposure of the laser on the skin or in the eyes
may lead to serious injuries. Be sure to wear exclusive safety goggles when adjusting or repairing the device.
• This device can be handled as a Class1laser product only when several interlocks in the device are not
released. When releasing the interlocks, be sure to follow the procedures indicated in the manual.
• Some sections in the device are applied with high voltage. Be careful of electric shock upon handling the
device.
• To prevent danger, be sure that only servicepersons who have received proper training remove the covers or
handle inside of the device.
• When working near drive sections such as the heat roller, be extremely careful not to get your body or clothes
caught in the moving parts.
• Be sure to turn OFF the power of the device when removing the board from the electrical control section or
disconnecting connectors and cables. Performing these procedures with the power ON may lead to a serious
accident, so please be extremely careful.
• Be sure to conduct work accurately and safely according to the descriptions on the Caution labels.
• Precautions to avoid damage to property

• The electronic circuits of this device may be impaired due to electrostatic charge. Be careful when handling
the electronic parts in the main unit or those remove from the main unit during repair work.
• Be sure to wear a grounding strap when handling the circuit board.
• Lithium batteries are used in this device. Improper replacement of these batteries may lead to damages. Be
sure that the replacement is performed by a technical service engineer.

Chapter 1
Overview
1.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1.1 DRYPRO 722 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.2 LiS-722 (Sorter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2 Overview of DRYPRO 722. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.1 Function of each section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.2 Overview of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3 Electrical Parts Layout Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.3.1 Layout and names of loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.3.2 Layout and names of sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.3.3 Layout and names of boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.4 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.5 Equipment Required for Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.6 How to use the Interlock Release Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Blank Page
1.1 Specifications
1.1.1 DRYPRO 722
Model Name: DRYPRO model 722
Device Type: Dry Laser Imager
Laser Source: Semiconductor Laser
System Film: Konica Medical Imaging Film SD-P, SD-PC, DR-P
Film Size: 14x17 inch , 14x14 inch, 14x11 inch
Set the specified size at the time of installation.
Interface (IN): Ethernet 10base-T/100base-TX
Protocol: Konica DICOM Print Management
Ports (IN): Max. 16 ports
Main Memory: 128MB (Max. 256MB)
Image Memory: Hard disk 4GB Standard

Print Memory 64MB standard (Max. 192MB)
Performance: 150 sheets/H (Continuous process of 14x17 inch film)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 33x28x53 inch (840x715x1350 mm)
Weight: Approx. 925lb (420kg)
Power Source: 200/220/230/240±10%, 12/11/11/10A (50/60Hz)
Heat Generation: Approx. 2100kJ/H (500kcal/H)
Operating Condition: 15 to 30 ˚C(59 to 86˚F )/ 30 to 70%RH (No condensation)
Storage and Transport Condition: -20 to 60˚C(-4 to 140˚F)/ 20 to 90%RH (No condensation)
Noise Level: 55dB or less
Control Panel: LCD display with a touch panel
Film Supply: Tray System
Film Trays: 2 trays (125 sheets/tray) Accepts different film types and sizes.
Density Steps: 8bits (256 steps) or 12bits (4096 steps)
The number of steps is dependent on the modality image signal.
Pixel Size: Optical Scan: 40 to 80µ m variable, Subscan: 40µ m fixed
(The recorded pixel size is dependent on the number of pixels of the diagnostic device and-
format.)

1.1 Specifications
Image Matrix:
(pixels)
When connected to Regius When connected to other than Regius
14"x17" 8,850 x 10,650 8,550 x 10,225
14"x14" 8,850 x 8,750 8,550 x 8,325
14"x11" 6,875 x 8,850 6,675 x 8,325
Image Format: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 20, 24, 25, 28, 30, 32 ,35, 36, 40, 42, 48, 54, 56, 60, 63, 64
Negative / Positive: Available
Trim: Available
Border: Black or clear
Stamp: Prints in a row at the bottom part of the film.
Accessories: Cutter (for film setting), operation manual
Optional Equipment: Konica Printlink, FILTER
Authorized Standard: Conforms to UL, FDA, C-UL, C-TICK, DEMKO, FCC
Applied Standard: Compliance with IEC60601-1-2, IEC60601-1, IEC60825
Remarks: Konica DRYPRO model 722 is produced in factories that have been certified to be in com-
pliance with the ISO9001:1996, ISO13488:1996, EN40601:1996 quality control standards,
as well as with the medical device directive FDA Premarket Notification 510(k) and GMP.

1.1 Specifications
1.1.2 LiS-722 (Sorter)
Model: LiS-722
Film Size: 14 x 17 inch, 14 x 14 inch, 14 x 11 inch
Number of bins: 5 bins
Number of films to be stored: 50 sheets max. per bin (mixed sizes allowed)
Number of films to be accumulated in each trayn: 5 sheets max. (mixed sizes allowed)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 15 x 26 x 67 inch (376 x 668 x 1695 (incl. bins) mm)
Weight (at installation): Approx. 158lb (71 kg) (incl. bins)
Weight (at packed): Approx. 178lb (80 kg)
Power Source: Supplied from DRYPRO 722
Power Consumption: 0.12kW
Operating Condition: 15 to 30 °C / 30 to 70 %RH (No condensation)
Installation Condition: 5 to 35 °C / 20 to 85 %RH (No condensation)
Storage and Transport Condition: -20 to 60 °C / 10 to 95 %RH (No condensation)
Noise Level: 58 dB or less
Authorized Standard: UL
Remarks: Konica LiS-722 is produced in factories that have been certified to be in

compliance with the ISO9001:1996, ISO13488:1996, EN40601:1996 qual-
ity control standards, as well as with the medical device directive FDA Pre-
market Notification 510(k) and GMP.

1.2 Overview of DRYPRO 722
1.2.1 Function of each section
The DRYPRO 722 consists of the function blocks as shown below.
Laser light
(1) Supply section

The supply section picks up the film in the tray unit one by one, and transports into the front transport section. This section consists of the
tray unit and the supply unit into which the film supply mechanisms are integrated. The supply units of the same mechanism are attached
to the upper and lower portions. Each supply unit consists of the sucker that picks up the film in the try one by one, the barrier taking-up
mechanism, the tray shutter open/close mechanism, and the bar code reader that reads the bar code on the barrier.
(2) Front transport section

The front transport section transports the films from the supply section into the lower transport section with the rollers. This section is
located at the front of the main unit, and consists of the front cover and the front transport unit. The rollers in the front transport section are
driven by the front transport motor in the lower transport section. This section has the 2-sheet sensor that checks to see if the film is trans-
ported one by one from each supply unit.
(3) Lower transport section

The lower transport section makes the film that is transported from the front of the main unit by the front transport section, stay in the tilt
tray temporarily, and transports into the exposure section in the left portion of the main unit using the pusher. This section is composed of
the lower transport unit into which some functions are integrated. This section has some mechanism: the tray tilt mechanism that tilts the
tray, the pusher drive mechanism that transports the film into the exposure section, the film floating fan that allows the films on the tray to
float, and the front transport drive motor that drives the front transport section.
(4) Exposure section

The exposure section irradiates the laser scanning light from the optical unit to write images on the film. This section consists of the opti-
cal unit (a) that emits the laser light and writes the images in the optical direction (in a lateral direction of the film) on the film and the sub-
scan unit (b) that transports the film in the subscan direction (in a vertical direction of the film). The optical unit has some functions: LD
(laser diode), the polygon mirror that scans the laser light in the optical direction, and the drive/control mechanism for these functions.
The subscan unit has the DD motor that drives the nip roller to transport the films and the mechanism to adjust the nip pressure of the nip
roller.

(5) Elevator transport section

The elevator transport section transports the film that is written in the exposure section into the heat processing (HPRO) section. This sec-
tion consists of the elevator transport unit into which the elevator transport functions are integrated. The nip roller located at the entrance
side of the elevator transport unit crimps or releases the roller by the nip roller motor, according to the film transporting timing.
(6) Heat processing (HPRO) section

The heat processing (HPRO) section processes the exposed film by heat. This section consists of the heat roller (c), the heat roller drive
mechanism, the opposite roller that crimps the film on the heat roller, the separation claw that separates the film from the heat roller, and
the cooling fan that cools off the heat processing (HPRO) section. The heat roller has the special CPU that controls the temperature in the
heat roller. This CPU communicates with the main CPU through the HPRO-I/F board with the infrared rays.
(7) Discharge section

The exit section cools off the heat-processed film, and makes it to exit into the sorter or the film basket. This section consists of the film
transport/exit mechanism, the cooling fan, and the densitometer that measures the image density on the processed film. On the upper por-
tion of the discharge section, the FILTER (d) that eliminates the gas generated in the heat processing section is attached.
(8) Sorter (Option)

The sorter makes the film from the DRYPRO 722 main body exit into the bin (e) of the specified number. It consists of the film transport
mechanism, and the gate switching mechanism that switches the exit bin. The loads in the sorter are driven by the sorter drive board with
the control of the mechanical control circuit board (f) in the DRYPRO main body.
(9) Power supply section

The power supply section generates 120V AC, 5V DC, 12V DC, -12V DC, and 24V DC that drives the circuit boards and loads in the
DRYPRO 722 using the AC power supplied from the facility, and supplies into each section. This section consists of the AC step-down
transformer, the switching regulator, and the noise filter.
(10) Control box

The control box consists of the main CPU circuit board, the print control board, the DENFS-I/F circuit board, the LAN board, and the
hard disk. The main CPU controls the entire DRYPRO 722, the network communications, and the image data. The print control board
processes the images, and generates the LD control signals with the special CPU on the board. The DENFS-I/F circuit board processes
the signals of the densitometer in the discharge section. The hard disk stores the system program of the main CPU.

1.2.2 Overview of operation

The following shows the overview of the control of the DRYPRO 722.
Control panel unit

- CPU
- System program HDD - ROM
- Image data - Touch panel
- LCD
HPRO
Network Control box HPRO I/F - CPU
(Ethernet) - CPU Mechanical control - Heater
- Print control board
DICOM - CPU To each load
- DENS-I/F
- LAN board - Flash ROM From sensor
LD drive signal Dry film
Exposure section Laser light

- Optical unit LD
- Subscan unit
Power supply section
200V AC 5V DC 24V DC
12V DC 120V AC
-12V DC
: Control signal
: Image signal
• Flow of image signals

(1) The image signals from the modalities, such as the Printlink, Regius, etc. are input into the DRYPRO 722 via
Ethernet with the protocol based on DICOM.
(2) The main CPU in the control box passes the image signals received from the modality to the print control board
in the control box. At the same time, the main CPU sends the film supply starting signal to the mechanical con-
trol circuit board.
(3) The print control board has the special CPU that processes the images included in the received image signals
for printing on the film, according to the attributes of the images (density, LUT), the print conditions (the film
size, the film type, the number of frames on the film, the layout, etc.), and sends the laser diode (LD) drive sig-
nals to the optical unit in the exposure section.
(4) The LD in the exposure section emits the laser light according to the input drive signals, and writes the images
on the dry film.
• Overview of control of each section

As shown in the figure above, the DRYPRO 722 has multiple CPUs, each of which operates as follows.
(1) The main CPU in the control box controls the entire DRYPRO 722, the network communications, and the im-
age data according to the program stored in the HDD. The histories of prints and operations are stored in the
log in the HDD.
(2) The CPU in the mechanical control circuit board controls the mechanism in the DRYPRO 722 (drives the loads,
inputs the data from the sensor) based on the commands from the main CPU, according to the program written
in the flash ROM on the mechanical control circuit board. The communications between the CPU on the me-
chanical control circuit board and the main CPU are made through the serial circuit.
(3) The CPU in the HPRO CPU circuit board (in the heat roller) controls the temperature in the heat roller based
on the commands from the main CPU according to the program written in the CPU. As the heat roller always
rotates, the HPRO CPU and the main CPU make wireless communications via the HPRO I/F board with infra-
red rays.
(4) The CPU in the control panel unit displays in the LCD on the control panel, inputs into the touch panel, and
turns the power ON/OFF according to the program in the ROM on the control panel board. The communica-
tions between the CPU in the operation panel unit and the main CPU are made through the serial circuit.

1.3 Electrical Parts Layout Drawing
1.3.1 Layout and names of loads
1 • Supply section (common in upper/

4 lower sections)
2 1 Film transport motor (M8)

2 Suction stop valve (MV1)
5
3 Sucker motor (M10)
4 Package collect motor (M9)
3 6
5 Shutter motor (M7)
6 Suction pump (P1)
• Front transport section

7 Front cover solenoid (SOL2)
• Lower transport section

8 Front transport motor (M2)
9 Tilt tray motor (M1)
10 Film floating fan (FM1)
11 Pusher motor (PM1)
9
8
10
11

• Exposure section
12 Nip pressure solenoid (SOL4)
12
• Elevator transport section
13 13 Nip roller motor (M4)

14 Left cover solenoid (SOL3)
15 Elevator transport drive motor (PM2)
14
15
• HPRO section
16
19 16 HPRO section cooling fan 1 (FM10)
20 17 HPRO section cooling fan 2 (FM11)

18 Densitometer cooling fan (FM3)
21 19 Heat roller motor (M19)
17
20 FILTER section cooling fan (FM2)
18 21 Discharge motor (PM3)

• Electrical control section

22 Cooling fan (FM8)
23 Cooling fan (FM9)
22 24 Cooling fan (FM12)
25 25 Power supply section cooling fan1 (FM6)
26 Power supply section cooling fan2 (FM7)
23
26
24
• Sorter
2 1 Sorter drive motor
2 Gate switching solenoid
3 3 Gate switching solenoid
1 4 Gate switching solenoid

4
5 Gate switching solenoid
5

1.3.2 Layout and names of sensors
1
• Supply Section (common in both upper
5 and lower sections)
2
6
1 Shutter close sensor (PS25)
2 Bar code reader
3 7 3 Film empty sensor (SBU2U)
4 Sucker separation sensor (PS22)
4
8 5 Shutter open sensor (PS24)
6 Shutter home position sensor (PS19)
9 7 Tray set sensor (PS23)

8 Sucker home position sensor (PS21)
9 Sucker release sensor (PS20)
• Front Transport Section

10 15
10 2-sheet sensor receiver (DETBU)
11 2-sheet sensor emitter (LEDBU)
11
12 2-sheet sensor receiver (DETBD)
12
13 2-sheet sensor emitter (LEDBD)
14 Front transport section film pass sensor (PS7)
13
15 Front cover interlock (S5)
14
16 16 Lower cover interlock (S3)
• Lower Transport Section

17 Pusher limit sensor (PS4)
17
18 Tilt tray film sensor (SB1)
19 Lower transport section entrance sensor (PS1)
20 20 Pusher home position sensor (PS3)
18 21 Tilt tray home position sensor (PS2)
21
19

• Exposure Section
22 22 V-sync upper sensor (SB4)
23 V-sync lower sensor (SB3)
23
24
• Elevator Transport Section
27
24 HPRO section entrance sensor (PS6)
25
25 Left cover interlock (S2)
26 Nip roller film pass sensor (SB2)
27 Nip roller home sensor (PS5)
26
• HPRO Section / Discharge Section

28 30
28 Densitometer entrance sensor (PS8)
29 Densitometer
29
30 FILTER set sensor (PS18)
31
31 Top cover interlock (S4)

• Sorter
1
1 Right cover detection micro switch (MS1)
2 Sorter jam detection sensor (LED/DET)
3 Release lever detection micro switch (MS3)
2 3

1.3.3 Layout and names of boards
• Supply Section
1 Drive board (See p.9-14)
2 Volume board (See p.9-12)
1 2
• Electrical Control Section

3 Power I/F board (See p.9-23)
4 Print control board (See p.9-25)
7 5 Main CPU circuit board
3
6 Back plane board
4 7 Mechanical control circuit board (See p.9-28)
5 8 DENS I/F circuit board (See p.9-27)

8 9 LAN board
9
6
• Exposure Section
10 H-sync circuit board
11 DD driver board
11
12 Polygon driver board
10
12

• HPRO Section
13
13 HPRO power circuit board (See p.9-20)
14
14 HPRO CPU circuit board (See p.9-18)
17 15 HPRO I/F board (See p.9-21)
15
16 Control panel board (See p.9-22)
17 Heat roller motor driver board (See p.9-17)
16
• Sorter
1 Sorter drive board

1.4 Block Diagram
Control Panel Unit
Exposure Section
Power supply Front cover interlock sensor
Interlock X1 Upper Supply Unit
switch
DD driver Lower cover interlock sensor
2-sheet sensor receiver
board
Inverter power source DD motor Interlock release sensor
Control board 2-sheet sensor emitter
Left cover interlock sensor
Display module Sucker release sensor
Scanner Unit Polygon Top cover interlock sensor
driver board Sucker home position sensor
Touch panel
Polygon motor
FILTER set sensor
Film empty sensor
AOM Lower transport entrance film sensor
AOM driver Shutter home position sensor
HPRO Section
Tilt tray home position sensor
Supply Drive Supply tray set sensor
Drive motor LD MOD board Board
Drive motor HPRO Pusher home position sensor
Shutter open sensor
driver board I/F board H-Sync board
Pusher limit sensor
Shutter close sensor
LD I/F board
Tilt tray film sensor
Heat Roller Unit Film transport motor
Nip roller film sensor
Main sensor Sucker motor
Nip roller film pass sensor
Right sensor HPRO CPU Suction pump
board Mechanical
HPRO section entrance film sensor
Left sensor Network Connector Control Board Shutter motor
Control box V-Sync lower sensor
Barrier taking-up motor assembly
Main heater 1 V-Sync upper sensor
Print control Suction stop valve
Main heater 2 board
HPRO power LAN board
board Flash
Left heater
memory
Lower Supply Unit
Right heater
Main CPU board Front transport film pass sensor
2-sheet sensor receiver
DENS I/F
Back plate board Densitometer entrance sensor
board
2-sheet sensor emitter
Densitometer Densitometer Interlock release magnet
LOG board LED board Hard disk Sucker release sensor
Tilt tray motor
Film floating fan Sucker home position sensor

Power I/F board
Exposure section interlock Interlock X2, X3, X4 Pusher motor Film empty sensor
Front cover interlock Interlock X2 Front transport motor Shutter home position sensor
5V DC Elevator transport drive motor
Lower cover interlock Interlock X3, X4 Supply Drive Supply tray set sensor
Nip roller motor Board
Left cover interlock Interlock X3, X4 12V DC Shutter open sensor
Film discharge motor
Interlock X3, X4 120V AC Shutter close sensor
Top cover interlock
Power Supply Unit Film transport motor
+/-12V DC Sucker motor

Interlock 3.3V DC
X3 24V AC 5V DC +12V DC -12V DC 24V DC Suction pump
Electric leakage
Power Breaker Power Power Power
Supply Supply Supply Supply Shutter motor
Noise Filter Unit SUP10 SUP5 SUP6 SUP4
Interlock Barrier taking-up motor assembly
Circuit Voltage toggle X1 120V AC
AC IN Noise filter Transformer 120V AC Suction stop valve
breaker terminal base
(100V AC - 240V AC)
Interlock Interlock
X4 X2
To Sorter

1.4 Block Diagram
• LiS-722 Sorter
Sorter
Sorter jam detection sensor (light-receiving side)
Release lever detection switch
Sorter right cover detection switch
From Mechanical Control Board of the Sorter jam detection sensor (light-emitting side)
DRYPRO 722 main body
Sorter Drive Sorter drive motor
Board
Gate switching solenoid1
12V DC 5V DC Gate switching solenoid2
Power Supply Power Supply

SUP6 SUP4 Gate switching solenoid3
Gate switching solenoid4

From Power Supply Section of the
DRYPRO 722 main body
DryPro 722 Service Manual Ver.1.1 2000.12 1-17

1.5 Equipment Required for Servicing
Equipment Remarks Contents
Ratchet screw driver Hex wrench 2.3.6 Removing the subscan unit
Right-angle gauge Approx. 50 mm in height 2.5.3 Replacing the tray
Heat roller stand* 2.10.1 Replacing the heat roller
Tooth brush 2.10.3 Replacing the felt of the separation claw

2.10.4 Replacing the felt of the discharge section
5.2.13 Replacing the separation claw felt
Adhesive tape 2.10.6 Removing the HPRO cover assembly
Extension cable for the Supplier: KONICA 3.1.3 Adjusting the phase of the sucker operation encoder
supply unit* 3.1.4 Adjusting the timing of separator
3.1.5 Adjusting the position of separator
3.1.8 Adjusting the open/close position of the shutter
Lens cleaner SLC-300 (Sigma Koki product) 3.4.3 Cleaning the laser mirror of the optical unit
Ratchet screw driver Phillips screw driver 3.4.3 Cleaning the laser mirror of the optical unit
Lens paper SLP-(2) (Sigma Koki product) 3.4.3 Cleaning the laser mirror of the optical unit
LD transmitter jig* Supplier: KONICA 3.4.4 Checking the LD transmitter (PD signal)
3.4.5 Confirming LD radiation (IR card) and measuring the
amount of radiation
3.4.6 Checking and adjusting the angle of the H-sync mirror
3.4.7 Checking the H-sync circuit board
Laser protection goggles LS-5-LD2 (Sigma Koki product) 3.4.4 Checking the LD transmitter (PD signal)
3.4.5 Confirming LD radiation (IR card) and measuring the
amount of radiation
Light power meter 3.4.5 Confirming LD radiation (IR card) and measuring the
amount of radiation
IR card 06DLA001 (Merres Glios product) 3.4.5 Confirming LD radiation (IR card) and measuring the
amount of radiation
Oscilloscope Bandwidth of 100MHz or above 3.4.7 Checking the H-sync circuit board
T-branch connector 3.4.7 Checking the H-sync circuit board
Down load cable for HPRO Supplier: KONICA 8.4.1 Installing the HPRO software
software*
Step tablet For correcting the densitometer 3.9.3 Correction of the densitometer
Densitometer 3.9.4 Correcting the densitometer correction file
Isopropyl alcohol 5.2 Cleaning the HPRO Section
TRI-FLOW 5.4.2 Heat roller motor assembly
Special nozzle for TRI-FLOW* Supplier: KONICA 5.4.2 Heat roller motor assembly
JK wiper 150S Sinclaire, Ltd. product 5.2 Cleaning the HPRO Section
Resin spatula 5.2.9 Cleaning the brush
Grease Multemp AC-D 5.4.1 Heat roller drive gear

1.5 Equipment Required for Servicing
Equipment Remarks Contents
Sand paper No.1000-1500 5.2.9 Cleaning the brush
Sand paper No.600-1000 5.2.9 Cleaning the brush
Vacuum cleaner 5.2 Cleaning the HPRO Section

5.3 Cleaning Other Sections
Dryer 5.2 Cleaning the HPRO Section
Maintenance cable for the Supplier: KONICA 7.1.1 Connecting maintenance PC and DRYPRO
mechanical control circuit
board*
Working gloves 2.10 Replacing Components in Heat Processing (HPRO) Sec-

tion
5.2 Cleaning the HPRO Section
Hex wrench Chapter 2 Disassembling and Assembling the Main Units
Precision Screwdriver Flat blade screwdriver 5.2.12 Checking the operation of the separation claw roller
bearings moving arm and the separation claw roller
bearings
Marker needle Lead pencil, etc. can be used. Chapter 2 Disassembling and Assembling the Main Units
Thickness gauge 0.01-0. 5mm Chapter 2 Disassembling and Assembling the Main Units
1.5mm, 2.0mm Chapter 3 Checking and Adjusting
Chapter 5 Maintenance
Push-pull gauge Regulated value: 500gf to 5kgf Chapter 3 Checking and Adjusting
Interlock release key Accessory supplied with DRYPRO Chapter 3 Checking and Adjusting
722
Table tap Chapter 7 Maintenance PC
Maintenance PC •Windows95/98 Chapter 7 Maintenance PC

•Operation environment that uti-
lizes ftp/telnet (10/100Base)
•Memory: 32MB or above is rec-
ommended
•Hard disk capacity: 200MB or
above is recommended
Ethernet cable Chapter 7 Maintenance PC

* Equipment specially ordered by KONICA

1.6 How to use the Interlock Release Key
The interlock release key interrupts the power that is supplied to the loads when the opening of the outer covers are
detected.
In order to check the operation of the loads with the mechanical control maintenance PC while the outer covers are
open during the service, it is necessary to release the interlock with the interlock release key.
CAUTION: Before releasing the interlock

with the interlock release key,
turn the power of the DRYPRO
722 OFF.
1 When the power of the DRYPRO 722 is

turned ON, touch the "OPERATION OFF" key
on the touch panel of the control panel sec-
tion to turn the power OFF.
2 Detach the foot cover (front).

· The foot cover (front) is secured to the main body
with the two magnet catches.
Foot cover (front)
Magnet catch (2)
3 Remove the set screw, and detach the foot

cover (left).
Foot cover (left)
1
2
Set screw

1.6 How to use the Interlock Release Key
4 Remove the four set screws, and detach the

wiring window lid. Wiring window lid
Set screws (4)
5 Turn the lock release knob on the left cover to

open the left cover. Left cover
Lock release knob
6 Insert the interlock release key and turn it

clockwise.
7 Press the start switch on the control panel

section to turn the power of the DRYPRO 722
ON.
· The DRYPRO 722 will start up with the interlock
released.
Interlock release key

Blank Page
Chapter 2
Disassembling and Assembling the Main Units
2.1 Before Disassembling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1.1 Cautions on disassembling/assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2 Name and placement of the outer covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.3 Name and placement of units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.4 Flowchart of disassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2 Removing Outer Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.1 Removing the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.2 Removing the right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.3 Opening the left cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.4 Removing the lower cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.5 Removing the sorter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3 Removing the Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.1 Removing the front transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.2 Drawing out the tray unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.3.3 Removing the supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.3.4 Removing the lower transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.3.5 Removing the elevator transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.3.6 Removing the subscan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.3.7 Removing the optical unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.3.8 Removing the control panel unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.3.9 Removing the power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.4 Replacing Components in Control Panel Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.4.1 Replacing the control panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.4.2 Replacing the LCD module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.4.3 Replacing the touch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.5 Replacing Components in Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.5.1 Removing the sucker unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.5.2 Replacing the separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.5.3 Replacing the tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.4 Replacing the supply drive board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2.5.5 Replacing the film empty sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.5.6 Replacing the bar code reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.5.7 Replacing the sucker release sensor (PS20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
2.5.8 Replacing the sucker home position sensor (PS21) / sucker separation sensor (PS22) . 2-55
2.5.9 Replacing the tray set sensor (PS23). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
2.5.10 Replacing the shutter home position/open/close sensors (PS19/PS24/PS25) . . . 2-58
2.5.11 Replacing the suction stop valve (MV1) and suction pump (P1) . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
2.5.12 Replacing the film transport motor (M8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
2.5.13 Replacing the barrier taking-up motor (M9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
2.5.14 Replacing the sucker motor (M10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
2.5.15 Replacing the shutter motor (M7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
2.6 Replacing Components in Front Transport Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
2.6.1 Replacing the 2-sheet sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
2.6.2 Replacing and adjusting the front cover solenoid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
2.6.3 Replacing the front transport section film pass sensor (PS7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
2.7 Replacing Components in Lower Transport Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
2.7.1 Opening the support plate assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
2.7.2 Removing the tilt tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
2.7.3 Replacing the lower transport section entrance sensor (PS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.7.4 Replacing the tilt tray home position sensor (PS2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
2.7.5 Replacing the tilt tray film sensor (SB1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
2.7.6 Replacing the pusher home position sensor (PS3) and pusher limit sensor (PS4) . . . . 2-81
2.7.7 Replacing the front transport motor (M2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
2.7.8 Replacing the pusher motor (PM1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
2.7.9 Replacing the tilt tray motor (M1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
2.8 Replacing Components in Exposure Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
2.8.1 Replacing the V-sync upper sensor (SB4) and V-sync lower sensor (SB3). . . 2-86
2.8.2 Replacing the DD driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
2.9 Replacing Components in Elevator Transport Unit . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.9.1 Replacing the nip roller home position sensor (PS5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.9.2 Replacing the nip roller film pass sensor (SB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
2.9.3 Replacing the HPRO section entrance sensor (PS6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
2.9.4 Replacing the nip roller motor (M4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
2.9.5 Replacing the elevator transport drive motor (PM2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
2.10 Replacing Components in Heat Processing (HPRO) Section . . 2-94
2.10.1 Replacing the heat roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.10.2 Removing the lower rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
2.10.3 Replacing the felt of the separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
2.10.4 Replacing the felt of the discharge section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
2.10.5 Replacing the densitometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
2.10.6 Removing the HPRO cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
2.10.7 Replacing the densitometer entrance sensor (PS8). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
2.10.8 Replacing the FILTER set sensor (PS18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
2.10.9 Replacing the heat roller motor (M19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
2.10.10 Replacing the film discharge motor (PM3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
2.11 Replacing Components in Outer Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.11.1 Opening the control box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.11.2 Replacing the mechanical control curcuit board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.11.3 Replacing the hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
2.11.4 Replacing the CPU circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
2.11.5 Replacing the print control board (Adding print memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
2.11.6 Replacing the density I/F board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.12 Disassembling Sorter and Replacing Components . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
2.12.1 Removing the outer covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
2.12.2 Removing the bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
2.12.3 Exchanging the right cover detection micro switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
2.12.4 Replacing the release lever detection micro switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
2.12.5 Removing the jam detection sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
2.12.6 Replacing the sorter drive motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
2.12.7 Replacing the gate switching solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
2.1 Before Disassembling
2.1.1 Cautions on disassembling/assembling
• To prevent electrical shock, after confirming the power of the main unit turns OFF, be sure to turn OFF the breaker of the
main unit or facility before performing the following procedure.
• The heat roller and its surroundings are extremely hot immediately after the power of the main unit turns OFF. Before start-
ing operations, check to see if the main unit cools off; otherwise, you may suffer burns.
• When handling the circuit boards, wrap one end of the

grounding strap around your wrist, and clip the other
end to a metal portion of the main unit that can establish
a ground.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to wrap the
grounding strap around
your wrist in order to pro-
tect the circuit boards.
Grounding strap
• When assembling, re-route the cables in the original way, and check to see if the cables are not inserted into or hooked on
the parts.

2.1.2 Name and placement of the outer covers

• When using the sorter
HPRO cover
Control panel unit

Film basket
Front cover
Right cover
Left cover
Lower cover
Foot cover (right)

Foot cover (left) Foot cover (front)
• When not using the sorter
Top cover
Guide rail (upper)
Right cover
Rear cover
Guide rail (lower)

Foot cover (rear)
Foot cover (right)
(for the sorter)

• Sorter
Sorter rear cover
Sorter right cover (upper) Front door
Sorter front cover
Sorter right cover (lower)

2.1.3 Name and placement of units
Heat roller
Control panel unit

Elevator transport unit
Supply unit (upper)
Supply unit (lower)
Front transport unit
Subscan unit
Optical unit
Lower transport unit

Power supply unit
Control box

DRYPRO 722 Main body
Right cover Left cover
Sorter
Mechanical control drive board Front cover
Sorter right cover (upper) Elevator transport unit Front transport unit
Foot cover (rear)
2-sheet sensor
Sorter right cover (lower) Elevator transport drive motor
Power supply unit Front cover cover solenoid
Nip roller motor
Jam detection sensor Front transport film pass sensor
Nip roller film pass sensor
Sorter drive board Heat roller
Nip roller home position sensor
Right cover detection micro switch Supply unit
Lower rack HPRO section entrance sensor
Supply drive board
Sorter front cover Felt for separation claw
Subscan unit Film transport motor
Sorter drive motor Felt for discharge section Suction stop valve
V-sync upper sensor
FILTER sensor Suction pump
Sorter rear cover V-sync lower sensor
Barrier taking-up motor
2.1.4 Flowchart of disassembling
Gate switching solenoid Control panel unit Shutter motor
Release lever detection micro switch HPRO cover assembly Rear cover Shutter home position sensor
Shutter open sensor
Bin Heat roller motor Optical unit
Shutter close sensor
Film discharge motor
DD driver board Tray set sensor
Densitometer entrance film sensor
Sucker unit
Control panel board
Separation plate
LCD module Lower cover
Suction operation motor
Touch panel Bar code reader
DRYPRO 722
Sucker release sensor
Densitometer Pusher transport section Sucker home position sensor
Support plate assembly Sucker separation sensor

Foot cover (front) Film empty sensor
Pusher motor
Control box Pusher home position sensor Tray unit
CPU circuit board Pusher limit sensor
Print control board Entrance transport section
DENS I/F board
Front transport motor
Lower transport section entrance sensor
Tilt tray
Tilt tray film sensor
Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6

Tilt motor
Tilt tray home sensor
2-5
2.2 Removing Outer Covers
2.2.1 Removing the rear cover

rear cover while lifting it in a slanting direction.
• Key Point for Re-installing the Rear Cover Set screws (4)
· Insert the two metal fittings located at the lower part
of the back of the rear cover into the projections on
the main unit.
Metal fittings
(2 locations)
Rear cover

2.2.2 Removing the right cover
1 Remove the four set screws, and detach the Guide rail (upper)
guide rails and the protective plates.
· When using the DRYPRO 722 without the sorter, the Protective plate
guide rails and the protective plates are not attached.
2 Detach the right cover while lifting it in a slant-

ing direction.
• Key Point for Re-installing the Right Cover
· Insert the metal fittings located at the lower part of
the back of the right cover into the projections (1
location) on the main unit.
Note: Attach the guide rail (upper) to the
upper part of the right cover, and the Right cover
guide rail (lower) to the lower part of
the right cover so that their vertical
orientations become symmetry as
shown in the figure on the right.
Remove the four set screws, and
detach the right cover while lifting it
Protective plate
in a slanting direction. Guide rail securing
screws (4) Guide rail (lower)
Without the sorter
Set screws (4)
Right cover
Metal fitting

2.2.3 Opening the left cover
1 Remove the front foot cover.

· The front foot cover is fixed to the main unit with
two magnet catches. Foot cover (front)
Magnet catches (2)
2 Remove the set screw, then remove the left

foot cover.
Foot cover (left)
1
2
Set screw
3 Remove the four set screws, then remove the

wiring window cap. Wiring window lid
Set screws (4)

4 Turn the lock release knob for the left cover

and open the left cover. Left cover
Lock release knob

2.2.4 Removing the lower cover
1 Open the left cover. (See p.2-8)

2 Pull the lock release knob for the lower cover.
3 Pull out the lower cover.
2
Lower cover
Lock release knob
4 Loosen the four set screws and remove the

lower cover. Loosen 4 set screws.
• Key Points for Re-installing the Lower Cover
· When closing the lower cover, confirm that the idler
gear of the front transport section and the drive gear
of the entrance transport section are accurately
meshed.
IMPORTANT: If the idler gear of the front
transport section and the
drive gear of the entrance
transport section are not in
complete mesh, the front
transport motor will not
rotate and an EC880 error Lower cover
will be indicated.

2.2.5 Removing the sorter
1 Remove the sorter right cover (upper) while

lifting it. Handle
Sorter right cover (upper)
2 Loosen the two set screws, and remove the

sorter right cover (lower).
Loosen the two set screws.
3 Disconnect the two connectors for the sorter

from the DRYPRO 722.
Connector
Connector

4 Remove the two sorter positioning screws.
Sorter positioning screws (2)
5 Pull the sorter in the direction of the front of

the main unit, and detach it from the main
unit.

2.3 Removing the Units
2.3.1 Removing the front transport unit
1 Remove the lower cover. (See p.2-10)

2 Remove the right cover. (See p.2-7)
3 Pull out the following four relay connectors.
· JP19, JP58, JP201, JP170
JP19
JP58
JP170 JP201
4 Pull out each of the relay connectors located

between the front transport section and the
upper and lower supply section.
· JP146 JP146 (1 each)
5 Remove the two set screws securing the

lower part of the front transport unit.
Set screws (2)

6 Push the lock release shaft and open the front

cover.
Lock release shaft Front cover
7 Remove the three set screws, then remove

the light shield.
Light shield
Set screws (3)
8 Remove the remaining four set screws secur-

ing the upper part of the front transport unit.
9 Close the front cover temporarily.
Set screws (4)

10 Secure the front transport unit with your

body, and release the unit stopper arm from Unit stopper arm
the groove in the front transport unit.
IMPORTANT: The front transport unit will
fall forward when the unit
stopper arm is released.
11 Remove the front transport unit from the main

unit, while holding the handles of the panel.
12 Place the front transport unit on a cardboard,

etc. and open the front cover.
· The front transport unit will be self-sustained by
opening the front cover. If the front cover is not to be Panel
opened, set it against a wall being careful not to handles
scratch the surface.
IMPORTANT: If the front transport unit is
set directly on the floor, the
gear on the lower section
of the front transport unit Front transport unit
may be damaged. There-
fore, be sure to set it on an
item such as a cardboard.
• Key Point for Installing the Front
Transport Unit
· Re-install the front transport unit in the opposite
sequence to removal.

2.3.2 Drawing out the tray unit
1 Open the front cover.

2 Pull the tray unit more than half way out while
pushing the lock on the front of the tray.
3 Draw out the tray unit while pushing the lock

plate on the slide rail.
3
IMPORTANT: Try not to switch the upper
and lower trays as much as Tray Unit
possible. When they are
switched, an adjustment 2
that matches the installed
supply unit must be made.
• Key Point for Installing the Tray Unit

· Be sure to check that the slide rail is accurately
meshed when the tray unit is half way in. If the mesh
is not accurate and the tray unit is pushed all the way GOOD NG
in, it would be difficult to pull the unit out again.
Tray Unit

2.3.3 Removing the supply unit

CAUTION: Be sure that the supply unit is carried by two or more people in order to secure safety.
1 Remove the front transport unit. (See p.2-13)

2 Disconnect each of the three connectors from
the supply board on the side of the supply unit
that is being removed.
· Upper side: SCNU13, SCNU14, SCNU1
· Lower side: SCND13, SCND14, SCND1
3 Loosen the two screws on the side of the sup-

ply unit that is being removed, and pull out
each of the D-sub connector.
· Upper side: JP23, Lower side: JP24
SCNU1 JP23
SCND1 JP24
SCNU14
SCNU13
SCND14
SCND13
4 Remove the three set screws on the front side

of the supply unit that is being removed.
· There are three set screws on both the upper and
lower supply units.
Set screws (3)
Set screws (3)

5 Hold the handle and pull the supply unit for-

ward until the sucker unit appears.
Sucker unit
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to entangle
the sucker unit to the wir-
ings in the main unit when
pulling the upper supply
unit out.
Handle
Wire in the main unit
6 Remove the supply unit from the main unit

with two people while holding each side of the
supply unit.
Supply unit
• Key Points for Re-installing the Supply Unit

· Re-install the supply unit in the opposite sequence to
removal.
· Align the positioning holes on the back side of the
supply unit to the two positioning pins of the main
unit.
B
A
Positioning holes (2)
B
A
Positioning pins (2)
Positioning pins (2)

2.3.4 Removing the lower transport unit

CAUTION: Be sure that the lower transport unit is carried by two or more people.
1 Remove the lower cover. (See p.2-10)

2 Remove the rear cover. (See p.2-6)
3 Disconnect the following three relay connec-
tors on the back side of the connector panel.
· JP55, JP73, JP74
Relay connectors (3)
4 Remove the three set screws securing the

clamp plate.
5 Pull out the clamp plate without applying

unnecessary force to the wirings.
Set screws (3)
Clamp plate

6 Loosen the two set screws securing the back

side of the lower transport unit.
Loosen 2 set screws
7 Pull the lock release knob, then pull out the

entrance transport section.
8 Remove the two set screws securing the front 3

side of the lower transport unit.
2
Entrance
1 transport section
Lock release knob Set screws (2)
9 Turn the lock release knob counterclockwise

and remove the knob.
10 Hold the metal plate of the lower transport

unit itself and pull the lower transport unit half
way out. 2
IMPORTANT: Lift the lower transport unit
without holding the en-
trance transport section.
Otherwise, it may cause the
lower transport unit to
warp.
1
Lock release knob

11 Return the entrance transport section back

into the lower transport unit until the entrance
transport section locks.
12 With two people, hold each side of the lower

transport unit and remove it from the main
unit.
• Key Point for Re-installing the Lower Transport
Unit
· Secure the four set screws after confirming that the
two set screws on the back side are fixed into the
groove of the lower transport unit.

2.3.5 Removing the elevator transport unit

2 Loosen the two set screws and remove the
connector cover. Loosen 2 set screws.
Connector cover
3 Disconnect the following two connectors.

· JP56, JP75
JP75 JP56
4 Remove the four set screws.

Set screws (4)

5 Liftthe elevator transport unit slightly and

remove it from the main unit.
Elevator transport unit
• Key Point for installing the elevator Transport

Unit
· Re-install the elevator transport unit in the opposite

2.3.6 Removing the subscan unit

3 Remove the elevator transport unit.
(See p.2-22)
4 Remove the six set screws, then remove the

rear laser shade lid.
Set screws (6)
Rear laser shade lid

cover of the subscan unit.
Cover
Set screws (4)

6 Remove the two wires from the wiring sup-

ports in the two locations, then remove the Wiring support
two connectors. (2 locations)
· JP48, JP105
JP48 JP105
7 Remove the two set screws.
Set screws (2)
8 Remove the two allen hex socket screws.

· Using a ratchet-type hexagonal wrench is recom-
mended as the work space for this process is very
limited.
· If the front transport unit is removed, the hexagonal
wrench can be put through the round hole in the
metal plate of the main unit.
Allen hex socket screws (2)

9 Go around to the back of the main unit and

disconnect the following relay connector.
· JP92
JP92
10 Remove the subscan unit from the main unit.
Subscan unit
11 Place the subscan unit on a desk, etc. so that

the top and bottom surfaces face to the side.
IMPORTANT: The guide plate on the bot-
tom of the subscan unit will
become deformed if the
bottom surface of the sub-
scan unit is placed on the
desk surface.
CAUTION: When replacing the subscan
unit, be sure that the two red
seals are attached to the right Guide plate
side of the new subscan unit
(the front side of the main
unit).

2.3.7 Removing the optical unit

CAUTION: Be sure that the optical unit is removed, reinstalled, and carried by two people.

(See p.2-22)
3 Remove the subscan unit. (See p.2-24)

4 Remove the three set screws (a), loosen the
three set screws (b), and remove the front
laser shade lid.
Loosen set screws (b)

Set screws (a) (3) (3).
Front laser shade lid
5 Disconnect the following relay connectors at

four locations and the polygon driver board
connector (CN3).
· JP26, JP27, JP82, JP167
Connector (CN3)
Relay connectors
(4 locations)

6 Loosen the two screws and disconnect the

following laser I/F connector.
· JP83
Laser I/F connector

Screws
7 Disconnect the VIDEO signal connector from

AOM.
8 Remove the set screw, then remove the

wiring support and grounding cable.
· The grounding cable is secured with the VIDEO sig-
nal connector.
VIDEO signal connector

Set screw
Wiring support
AOM
Grounding cable
9 Remove the HCN connector from the H-Sync

circuit board.
HCN connector

10 Pull the lock release knob and pull out the

entrance transport section of the lower trans-
port unit.
2
1
Entrance
transport section
Lock release knob
11 Remove the four set screws securing the opti-

cal unit.
IMPORTANT: Be sure that the screws
loosened on the back side
of the device are M5 set
screws. If the M4 set
screws securing the posi-
tioning pin are loosened,
the optical unit may not be
able to be returned to the
proper position.
Flat washers (4)

Positioning screws Set screws M5 (4)

12 Hold the handles located on the front and

back sides of the unit base, one person hold-
ing the front handle and another person hold-
ing the rear handle. 1
IMPORTANT: In the process of removing and

re-installing the unit base, be Rear handle
sure to hold the handles or the
bottom of the unit. The preci-
sion of the optical unit may
degrade if excessive force is
applied to the platform base.
13 Lift the entire optical unit and move it towards

the front side until it stops.
14 Move the optical unit gradually to the left while 2
paying attention to the wiring in the hinge sec- 3
tion of the left cover.
1
Platform base
Unit base Front handle
15 Hold the bottom of the unit base and the han-

dle and remove the optical unit from the main
unit.
· Place the removed optical unit in the carrier case in
which the new optical unit came in, and set it hori-
zontally.
Optical unit

• Key Point for Re-installing the Optical Unit

· After installing the optical unit as far as the position-
ing screws located on the right side of the main unit,
set it as far as the positioning pins toward the back of
the main unit.
• Precautions Upon Replacing
· When installing the new optical unit, be sure to
remove the red part and the tape securing AOM.
· Be sure to set the optical unit placed in the carrier
case horizontally. If it is leaned against vertically,
load will be applied to the polygon and will affect
the image quality.
Positioning pins Positioning screws

2.3.8 Removing the control panel unit

CAUTION: To prevent electrical shock, be sure to confirm that the power of the main unit is OFF be-
fore performing the following procedures, and turn the breaker of the main unit or facility
OFF.
1 Open the top cover.
Top cover
2 Pull the release lever toward the front and

open the FILTER case.
FILTER case

Set screws (2)

4 Pull the control panel unit forward by lifting its

bottom part and tilt it forward until the wirings
can be seen.
2
1
5 Secure the control panel unit in the tilted state

with your body.
6 Remove the set screw and toothed lock

washer, then remove the grounding cable.
Set screw
Grounding cable
Toothed lock
washer
7 Disconnect the following four relay connec-

tors, then remove the control panel unit.
· JP28, JP29, JP200, JP299
• Key Point for Re-installing the Control Panel
Unit
· Secure the set screws after confirming that the wiring
is not caught by the control panel unit.
JP200 JP28
JP299 JP29

2.3.9 Removing the power supply unit

OFF.
1 Remove the two set screws, then remove the

rear foot cover.
Rear foot cover
Set screws (2)
2 Remove the four set screws and pull out the

power supply unit.
· When the power supply unit is pulled out, the two
auxiliary wheels will open with their own weight and
support the weight of the power supply unit.
Set screws (4)
Auxiliary wheel
Auxiliary wheel Power supply unit
• Key Points for Re-installing the Power Supply

Unit
· Fold the two auxiliary wheels inside and re-install
the power supply unit in the main unit.

2.4 Replacing Components in Control Panel Unit
2.4.1 Replacing the control panel board
1 Remove the control panel unit. (See p.2-32)

board control cover.
Board control cover
Set screws (4)
3 Release the two locks for the control panel

board connectors and disconnect the follow- Release lock
ing two flexible cables.
· CN212, CN213 Connectors (2)
IMPORTANT: When handling the flexible
cables, be sure not to scratch
or bend the cables.
Flexible cable
4 Release the lock of the eight locking supports

from the holes on the control panel board.
Locking support
Control panel board

5 Disconnect the following two connectors from

the control panel board (parts side) and
remove the control panel board.
· CN10, CN210
Connectors (2)
• Key Points for Re-installing the Control Panel

Board
· When attaching the flexible cable to the connector,
press the lock section of the connector and confirm
that the flexible cable is securely locked.
· After assembling, turn ON the power of the main
unit and confirm that the touch panel is operating
properly or that there is no screechy noise.
· When the normal screen is not displayed, the flexible
cable of the LCD module may not be inserted into
the connector properly.

2.4.2 Replacing the LCD module

2 Push in the lock located on the rear side of Push the lock release
the control panel, then remove the ROM on the rear side.
cover.
1
ROM cover

board control cover. Board control cover
Set screws (4)
4 Release the two locks for the control panel

board connector and disconnect the following Release lock
two flexible cables.
· CN212, CN213 Connectors (2)
IMPORTANT: When handling the flexible

cables, be sure not to scratch
or bend the cables.
Flexible cable

5 Disconnect the following connector from the

inverter power source and remove the wiring Inverter power source 2
from the M-shaped clamp.
· CN77 Connector
1 M-shaped clamp
6 Remove the six set screws securing the con-

trol panel board assembly.(A) Set screw A
· One of the set screws is secured with a grounding Set screws (6)
cable. Grounding
B cable
7 Remove the set screw, then remove the Toothed
lock washer
grounding cable and toothed lock washer.(B)
8 Remove the control panel board assembly. Grounding

cable
A
Toothed
lock
washer
Control panel
board assembly
9 Remove the two set screws (a), loosen the two

set screws (b), and then remove the LCD module. Set screws (a) (2) LCD module
· One of the set screws (a) is secured with a grounding Grounding cable
cable.
Flat washer
(used as a spacer)
Set screws (b) (2)

IMPORTANT: A spacer or a few flat wash-

When a cable clamp is installed here,
ers are attached between replace the cable clamp to a wirng band.
the LCD module and the
control panel section
cover. Be sure to set the
same number of flat wash-
ers when re-installing, or
the touch panel will not
function properly.
If a cable clamp is installed
on the control panel board
at the position shown in the
figure, remove the cable
clamp and install a wiring
LCD module
band.
• Key Point for Installing the LCD Module
· Be sure to set the grounding cable that had been
removed to its original position.
· When attaching the flexible cable to the connector,
press the lock section of the connector and confirm
that the flexible cable is securely locked.
· After assembling turn ON the power of the main unit
and confirm that the touch panel is operating prop-
erly or that there is no screechy noise.
· When the normal screen is not displayed, the flexible
cable of the LCD module may not be inserted into
the connector properly.

2.4.3 Replacing the touch panel

CAUTION: The touch panel is set between the LCD module and the cover of the control panel section,
and is attached to the control panel with a double-sided tape. If excessive pressure is ap-
plied to the panel surface, Newton rings (streaks) will appear in the displayed screen, so
be extremely careful when re-installing the touch panel.
CAUTION: Spacers and flat washers are attached between the LCD module and the control panel sec-
tion cover. Write down the position and the number of spacers (or flat washer), and be sure
that they are the same when re-installing the touch panel.
1 Remove the control panel unit from the main

unit. (See p.2-32)
2 Remove the control panel board assembly

and LCD module from the control panel sec-
tion cover. (See p.2-37)
3 Remove the touch panel from the control

panel section.
4 Peel off the double-sided tape from the con-

trol panel section cover and clean the section.
5 Adhere new double-sided tapes on the four

corners of the cover frame of the control
panel section.
Double-sided tape
(4 locations)
6 Adjust the position of the touch valid area (the Translucent green section
translucent green section) of the new touch
panel to the frame of the control panel sec-
tion.
· Be careful not to mistake the back and front of the
touch panel or the direction to pull out the flexible
cable. Cover frame
· After determining the position, secure the touch
panel so it does not move out of the position.
7 With securing the touch panel so as not to

move out of the position, peel off the protec-
tive tape of the double-sided tape and attach
the touch panel. Touch panel

• Key Points for Re-installing the Touch Panel

· When re-installing the LCD module, return the same
number of spacers (or washers) that were removed to
their original positions.
· When plugging the flexible cable to the connector,
push in the lock section of the connector and confirm
that it is securely locked.
· After assembling, turn ON the power of the main
unit and adjust the touch position of the touch panel.
1) Move to OFF LINE by touching [ON-OFF LINE].
2) Touch [MAINTENANCE] > [TOUCH P.ADJ].
3) Adjust the touch position by touching the two cor-

ners in the touch panel.

2.5 Replacing Components in Supply Unit
2.5.1 Removing the sucker unit
1 Remove the four set screws securing the

sucker unit. Sucker unit
Set screws (4)
2 Slide the frame of the sucker unit toward

Direction A, then tilt the sucker unit toward Frame
Direction C while moving the separator
toward Direction B.
IMPORTANT: Do not apply excessive
force to the wiring or lines A
protruding from the sucker
unit.
IMPORTANT: When returning the sucker
unit from its tilt position,
pull its frame toward the
front, then push it in the C Sucker unit
opposite of Direction A.
Separator

• Key Points for Re-installing Sucker Unit

If the amount of play between the sucker unit frame and
Bearing Set a W4
the left and right hangers is significant, the bearings
washer.
securing the frame may fall off from the hanger slit dur-
ing operation. Apply the following measures to prevent
this.
· Set a W4 washer between the bearings and E-ring Bearings
E-ring
and decrease the amount of play. Hanger
· The amount of play differs according to the device,
so determine whether a washer is required in just one
side or in both sides.
· After setting the W4 washer, confirm that the frame
bearings move smoothly in the slit of the hanger.
Frame

2.5.2 Replacing the separator
1 Remove the sucker unit. (See p.2-42)

2 Remove the set screw, then remove the ten-
sion spring and spacer.
Tension spring
Spacer
Set screw
3 Remove one E-ring from the shaft, then

Separator
remove the shaft and the separator.
· Two spacers (made of resin) will detach at the same E-ring
time. Spacers E-ring
(2)
4 Remove one E-ring from the pin, then remove
the pin from the separator.
• Key Point for Installing the separator
· It will make this process easier by applying a light
coat of grease on one side of the two spacers and
Shaft
securing tentatively by adjusting the spacers to the Pin
holes to set the shaft. (Step 3)
• Adjustment
Make the following adjustments when the separator is
replaced.
· "3.1.4 Adjusting the timing of the separator" (See
p.3-7)
· "3.1.5 Adjusting the position of the separator" (See
p.3-8)

2.5.3 Replacing the tray
1 Pull out the tray unit from the supply unit.

(See p.2-16)
2 Remove the six set screws. Set screws (6)
3 Remove the four set screws, then remove the Taking-up assembly
taking-up assembly.
· For re-installing, secure the set screws while pushing
the winding assembly against the back side of the
tray.
Set screws (4)

Set screws (4)
cover.

5 Remove the ten set screws, then remove the

two shutter guides. Shutter guides (2)
Set screws (10)
1 Shutter

gear mount plate. Set screws (2)
Bracket
7 Remove the two set screws, then remove the Set screws (2)
bracket.
Gear mount plate
8 Remove the set screw securing one end of

the tension spring. Set screw
Spacer
Tension spring

9 Remove one E-ring, then remove the bearing.
1 E-ring
Bearing
10 Remove one set screw, then remove the Parallel pin

pulley, parallel pin, and bearing. 6
· The flat washer and spring retainer will detach at the 5 Bearing
same time. Pulley 7
4
Bearing
Flat
washer
3
Set screw 2
Spring retainer
· When reattaching the spring retainer, be sure that it

faces the front side of the tray with the claw of the Claw
taking-up shaft faced down.
Spring
retainer
Front side

11 Remove the taking-up shaft assembly.

Taking-up shaft assembly
12 Remove the magazine section from the tray.
• Adjusting the Position for Installation

After adjusting the position of the tray, assemble the
tray in the opposite sequence to disassembling as
described below.
1 Secure the six set screws loosened in Step 2

of the disassembling process tentatively.
2 Install the tray in the supply unit.


4 Place a right-angle gauge against the rib on

inner wall of the tray, and measure clearance
"a" between the rib and the roller. (two loca-
tions)
<Regulated Value> 0.5 mm < a < 1 mm
· If you do not have the right-angle gauge, use a metal
scale or others.
5 Slide the tray until clearance "a" falls within a

the range of the regulated value.
Right-angle gauge
6 Secure four of the six set screws on the front

side loosened in Step 4 of the disassembling
process.
7 Remove the tray from the supply unit.
Set screw (4 screws on the front side)
8 Secure the two remaining screws of the six Set screws (2)
set screws loosened in Step 4 of the disas-
sembling process.
• Other Adjustments
Make the following adjustments when the tray is
replaced.
· "3.1.6 Adjusting the tension of the barrier taking-up
belt" (See p.3-9)
· "3.1.7 Checking and adjusting the shutter slide
resistance" (See p.3-10)
· "3.1.8 Adjusting the open/close position of the
shutter" (See p.3-11)
· "3.1.9 Adjusting the position of the shutter lock"
(See p.3-14)

2.5.4 Replacing the supply drive board
1 Disconnect all of the following five connectors

on the supply drive board.
· JJ2, JJ6, JJ7, JJ11, JJ12
JJ12 JJ6
JJ2 JJ11 JJ7
2 Remove the four set screws, and then remove

the supply drive board. Spacers (4) Set screws (4)
3 Remove the four spacers from the screw

mount of the set screw by turning them in the
counterclockwise direction.
• Key Points for Installing the Supply drive Board
· Re-install the supply drive board in the opposite
· When setting the spacer, adjust the smaller hole of
the spacer to screw mount and turn it in the clock-
wise direction.
Supply board
• Adjustment
Make the following adjustments after replacing the
board.
· "3.1.1 Adjusting the voltage of the film empty
sensor" (See p.3-1)
· "3.1.2 Adjusting the voltage of the 2-sheet sensor"
(See p.3-3)

2.5.5 Replacing the film empty sensor

2 Remove the two set screws while lifting the
bracket and remove the sensor holder.
Sensor holder
Bracket
Set screws (2) 2
1
3 Cut the wiring band and remove the two set

screws.
Wiring band
Set screws (2) 2
4 Disconnect the following connector and re-

move the film empty sensor.
· JP180
Connector
Film empty sensor

• Key Points for Installing the Film Empty Senor

· Re-install the film empty sensor in the opposite
Side A Side B
· Align the height of Side A of the sensor holder to
Side B of the bracket.
• Adjustment
After replacing the sensor, perform "3.1.1 Adjusting the
voltage of the film empty sensor". (See p.3-1)

2.5.6 Replacing the bar code reader

2 Remove the cable of the bar code reader from
the wiring support.
3 Remove the two nuts, and then disconnect

the connector from the mounting plate. Set screws (2) Connector
Grounding cable
· One set screw, spring washer, flat washer, and
grounding cable will detach at the same time. Flat washers (2)
Spring washers
(2)
Nuts (2)
4 Cut the wiring band securing the cable of the Scan window
bar code reader to the bar code holder.
Bar code holder
bar code reader from the bar code holder. Bar code reader
• Key Points for Re-installing the Barcode Read-
er
· Set the bar code reader on the bar code holder from
the sucker side with the scan window facing up. Be
sure to attach it in the proper direction.
· Secure the cable of the bar code reader to the bar
code holder with the wiring band. Secure the cable
· Confirm that “the bar code figures of the film pack- with the wire band.
age” (See p.9-4) of the maintenance information
(See p.9-3) printed on the edge of the film and the
contents of the bar code label agree at the next print-
ing.
Set screws (2)

2.5.7 Replacing the sucker release sensor (PS20)

2 Disconnect the following connector.
· JP129
3 Remove one set screw, then remove the

sucker release sensor (PS20).
Set screw
Connector
Sucker release sensor (PS20)

2.5.8 Replacing the sucker home position sensor (PS21) / sucker separation sen-
sor (PS22)
1 Remove the supply unit. (See p.2-17)

3 Proceed to Step 4 for removing the sucker
home position sensor and Step 7 for remov-
ing the sucker separation sensor.
4 Lift up the sucker unit and remove the two set

screws securing the motor bracket.
Set screws (2)
5 Remove the three E-rings and the three

bearings from the upper and lower cam shaft
assemblies.
Upper and lower Motor bracket
6 Remove the upper and lower cam shaft cam shaft assemblies
assemblies from the sucker unit.
3
4
E-rings (3)
2
1
Bearings (3)

7 Disconnect the following connectors from the Sucker separation sensor (PS22)
sensors.
· The sucker home position sensor: JP130 Set screw
Connector Set screw
· The sucker separation sensor: JP131
8 Remove the set screw securing the sensor,

then remove the sensor.
• Adjustment
Make the following adjustment when the sensors are
replaced.
"3.1.3 Adjusting the phase of the sucker operation Connector
encoder" (See p.3-5) Sucker home position sensor (PS21)

2.5.9 Replacing the tray set sensor (PS23)

sensor mounting plate.
2 Disconnect the following connector.

· JP132
3 Remove one set screw, then remove the tray

set sensor (PS23) from the sensor mounting Connector
plate. Set screw
Tray set sensor
(PS23)
Sensor mounting
plate
Set screws (2)
• Key Point for Installing the Tray Set Sensor

(PS23)
· Confirm that the tray detection plate is at the center
of the tray set sensor when the tray is inserted fully
into the supply unit, then secure the set screws of the
sensor mounting plate.
CAUTION: If the space between the tray
detection plate and tray set
sensor is insufficient, the tray
set sensor may be damaged.
Tray detection plate Tray set sensor
Adjust the tray detection board Set screws (2)

to the center of the sensor.

2.5.10 Replacing the shutter home position/open/close sensors

(PS19/PS24/PS25)

sensor being replaced. Connector Shutter close
· The shutter home position sensor: JP128 Set screw sensor (PS25)
· The shutter open sensor: JP133
· The shutter close sensor: JP134
Set screws(2)
mounting plate of the sensor being replaced,
then remove the mounting plate.
Sensor mounting
3 Remove one set screw, then remove the sen- plate
sor from the mounting plate.
• Adjustment
Make the following adjustment when the sensor is
replaced.
· "3.1.8 Adjusting the open/close position of the
shutter" (See p.3-11)
Shutter home position
sensor (PS19)
Shutter open
sensor (PS24)

2.5.11 Replacing the suction stop valve (MV1) and suction pump (P1)
1 Disconnect one tube from the film suction

pump.
Suction pump
Tube
2 Disconnect each of the cable connector from

the suction stop valve and film suction pump,
then remove the wiring from the wiring clamp.
· JJ6, JJ12
JJ12
JJ6

Set screws (4)
shutter open/close case assembly.
4 Set the shutter open/close case assembly

upside down on the sucker unit tentatively.

5 Remove the four set screws, then remove the Pump mounting plate
pump mounting plate.
Wiring bands (2)
6 Cut the wiring bands securing the wire of the Set screws (4)
film suction pump.

suction stop valve (MV1) or suction pump Suction stop valve (MV1)
(P1) from the pump sensor mounting plate. Set screws (2)
8 Remove the nipple from the suction pump.

• Key Points for Installing the Suction Stop Valve
(MV1) and Suction Pump (P1)
· Wind a seal tape around the nipple when attaching a
tube from the suction stop valve.
· Secure the wirings of the suction pump with
wiring bands at two locations.
Nipple
Set screws (2)
Suction pump (P1)

2.5.12 Replacing the film transport motor (M8)
1 Disconnect the following relay connector.

· JP148
JP148

bracket, then remove the bracket.
Set screws (2)
Belt
Bracket
3 Write down the distance between the edge

surface of the pulley and the leading edge of Film transport
the motor shaft. Bracket motor (M8)
4 Loosen the two setting screws, then remove Set screws (3)
the pulley from the motor shaft. Setting screws (2)

the film transport motor (M8) from the bracket.
Pulley

• Key Points for Re-installing Film Transport

Motor (M8)
· Push the center of the belt with 500gf with push-pull Bracket
gauge and secure the bracket at the point where the
belt distorts by 10mm.
Set screws (2)
· Re-install the pulley in the thrust direction to match
the position noted in Step 3. Push-pull gauge
· Confirm that the pulley is set in a direction in which
a set screw is in contact with one of the D-cut sur- Belt
faces of the motor shaft, then secure the set screw.
(See Step 4.)

2.5.13 Replacing the barrier taking-up motor (M9)

bracket. Set screws (4)
2 Disconnect the relay connector while lifting

the barrier taking-up motor assembly.
· JP149 1
2 JP149
3 Remove the four set screws, then remove the Bracket

motor mounting plate from the bracket.
Motor mounting plate
Set screws (4)


barrier taking-up motor (M9) from the motor Motor mounting plate Set screws(4)
mounting plate. Spring washer
5 Separate the gear box from the main body of

the motor.
6 Write down the distance from the edge sur-

face of the gear to the leading edge of the Gear
gear box shaft.
7 Loosen the two set screws and remove the Barrier taking-up
motor (M9)
gear from the gear box. (Gear box)
• Key Points for Re-Installing the Barrier Taking- Setting screws(2)
up Motor (M9)
· Secure the set screws after confirming that the gear
box shaft is set in a direction in which a set screw is
in contact with one of the D-cut surfaces.
(See Step 7)
· Re-install the gear in the thrust direction to match the
position noted in Step 4.
· When installing the barrier taking-up motor assem-
bly, secure the assembly after confirming that it is in
constant mesh with the gear on the tray side. (See
Step 1)

2.5.14 Replacing the sucker motor (M10)

· JP150 JP150
Sucker motor (M10)
3 Remove three set screws, then remove the Set screws (3)
sucker motor (M10).
4 Pull out one spring pin and remove the gear.

Spring pin
2
Gear

2.5.15 Replacing the shutter motor (M7)
1 Disconnect the tube from the suction pump.

Suction pump
Tube

Set screws(4)
shutter open/close case assembly.

· JP169
JP169

4 Lift the shutter open/close case assembly and

mark lines around the section where the
Marker line
motor is installed.
2

shutter motor (M7).
Shutter motor(M7)
Set screws (4)
6 Pull out one spring pin and remove the gear. Motor mounting plate
7 Remove the three set screws, then remove Spring pin
the motor mounting plate.
• Key Point for Installing the Shutter Motor (M7)
· Confirm the backlash of the gear.
1
Set screws (3)

Gear

2.6 Replacing Components in Front Transport Unit
2.6.1 Replacing the 2-sheet sensor
The 2-sheet sensor is a set of sensor for the light-receiving side and the light-emitting side, and is installed on the
guide plate at the exit of the upper and lower trays. (four sensors in total)
1 When removing the sensor on the light-

receiving side (upper side) of the upper tray, • To remove the sensor on the light-receiving
remove the two set screws of the guide sup- side of the upper tray:
port assembly securing both sides of the Set screws (2)
Moving guide plate
moving guide plate, then rotate the moving
guide plate.
Guide support
assembly (2 pcs.)
1 2
2 Disconnect one of the following connectors

from the sensor board of the 2-sheet sensor
that is being replaced.
· Light-emitting side: JP124, 2-sheet sensor receiver
Light-receiving side: JP125 (DETBU)
Set screws (2)
JP125
2-sheet sensor.
• Adjustment
Adjust the volume of the supply drive board after
replacing the 2-sheet sensor. (See p.3-3)
2-sheet sensor emitter

(LETBU)
JP124 Set screws (2)

2.6.2 Replacing and adjusting the front cover solenoid
1 Make the unit standing stable after opening

the front cover.
2 Disconnect the following relay connector and

remove the cable from the wiring support. Wiring support
· JP41 Connector
3 Remove the tension spring.
Tension spring

4 Remove the two set screws, and then remove

the release lever. Flat washers (2)
· The spacer and two flat washers will detach at the Release lever
same time.
3
2
Set screws (2)
Spacers (2)
5 Remove the six set screws.

Set screws (6)
6 Tilt the solenoid unit towards Direction A, and Solenoid unit

then pull it out towards Direction B.
A


spacer and tension spring.
Tension spring
Spacer
Set screw
8 Remove the set screw, then remove the Rotating shaft

rotating shaft.
Set screw
9 Remove the four set screws, then remove the Front cover solenoid
front cover solenoid.
Set screws (4)
10 Remove the plunger from the front cover sole-

noid.
Plunger
Front cover solenoid

11 Pull out one spring pin from the plunger and

remove the arm.
Spring pin
• Key Points for Installing the Front Cover Sole-
noid
· Re-install the front cover solenoid in the opposite
· If the release plate is facing the wrong direction,
loosen the set screw securing the release plate and
align the direction. (Step 6)
· When installing the release lever, do not forget to set
the two flat washers and spacers. It will make this Arm
process easier by applying grease to the flat washers
so that they bond to the release lever. (Step 4)
· Perform "·Adjustment: Installation position of the
front cover solenoid", then "·Adjustment: Position of
the support plate" in order when installing the front
cover solenoid. (Step 9)
• Adjustment: Installation position of the front

cover solenoid
1) Loosen the four set screws securing the front cover
solenoid.
2) Screw an M3 (approx. 30 in length) screw into tap
hole (a), so that it goes into adjustment hole (b).
3) Pull the plunger into the front cover solenoid by a
hand.
4) Secure the four loosen set screws of the front cover b
solenoid.
1.5~2.5mm Set screws (4) (opposite side)
a
b Front cover solenoid
• Adjustment: Position of the support plate

1) Loosen the two set screws securing the support plate.
2) Screw an M3 (approx. 30 in length) screw into tap
hole (a), so that it goes into adjustment hole (b).
3) Slide the support plate until space (c) fulfills the fol-
lowing condition.
· c=1.5 to 2.5mm a
b
c=1.5-2.5mm Set screws (2)
a
b Support plate

2.6.3 Replacing the front transport section film pass sensor (PS7)
1 Remove the following relay connector.

· JP77 Front transport section
film pass sensor (PS7)
2 Remove the sensor cable from the wiring sup-
port.
3 Remove the front transport section film pass Relay connector

sensor (PS7) while closing its claws.
Claws (4)
Wiring support

2.7 Replacing Components in Lower Transport Unit
2.7.1 Opening the support plate assembly

the pusher transport section. Set screws (3)
Pusher transport section
2 Disconnect the following two relay connec-

tors. Relay connectors (2) Wiring support
· JP161, JP168
3 Remove the set screw securing the stay

mounting plate. Set screw
Stay mounting plate

4 Remove the two set screws securing the sup-

port plate assembly and open the support Set screws (2)
plate assembly.
Support plate assembly

2.7.2 Removing the tilt tray
1 Disconnect the relay connector (JP160).

2 Open the support plate assembly.
(See p.2-74.)
Relay connector
(JP160)
3 Remove the two set screws with a magnetic

screw driver. Set screws (2)
· It is difficult to pick up a screw that is dropped in the Tilt tray
tilt tray.
4 Remove the tilt tray.

IMPORTANT: Be very careful not to
scratch or dirty the film
contact surface of the tilt
tray.

2.7.3 Replacing the lower transport section entrance sensor (PS1)
1 Disconnect the following two relay connec-

tors. Relay connectors (2) Wiring support
· JP161, JP168
2 Remove the set screw that secures the plate

in which the stay is mounted.
Set screw
Stay mounting plate
3 Put markings around the metal mounting

plate of the entrance transport section for re-
installation.
IMPORTANT: If the entrance transport
section is installed in a
slanted direction from the
tilt tray, film may be 2 2
transported from the lower Marker line Marker line
transport section in a tilted
position, that may cause
tilted images or jams.


entrance transport unit.
Set screws (4)

· JP72
6 Remove the sensor cable from the three wiring

bands.
7 Remove the lower transport section entrance

sensor (PS1) while closing the claws.
Claws (4)
Wiring band (3)
Relay connector
Lower transport section

entrance sensor (PS1)

2.7.4 Replacing the tilt tray home position sensor (PS2)

(See p.2-74)
2 Remove the tilt tray. (See p.2-76)

3 Disconnect one connector from the tilt tray
home position sensor.
4 Remove one set screws with a stubby screw Connector

driver, then remove the tilt tray home position
sensor.
Set screw
Tilt tray home position sensor (PS2)

2.7.5 Replacing the tilt tray film sensor (SB1)

(See p.2-74)

3 Disconnect one connector from the tilt tray
film sensor.

tilt tray film sensor (SB1).
Connector
Set screws (2)
Tilt tray film sensor (SB1)

2.7.6 Replacing the pusher home position sensor (PS3) and pusher limit sensor (PS4)

(See p.2-74)

sensor being replaced.
Set screw
· Pusher home position sensor: JP98
· Pusher limit sensor: JP99 JP98
3 Remove the set screw, then remove each

sensor. Pusher limit sensor (PS4)
Set screw
JP99
Pusher home position

sensor (PS3)

2.7.7 Replacing the front transport motor (M2)
1 Loosen the two set screws securing the belt

tensioner and loosen the belt tensioner. Belt tensioner
Set screws (2)
2 Remove the belt from the pulley.

3 Loosen the two setting screws and remove Setting screws (2)
the pulley from the motor shaft.
Pulley

the front transport motor (M2). Front transport motor
(M2) Connector
5 Disconnect one front transport cable connec- Set screws
tor from the panel. (3)
• Adjustment
Adjust the belt tension to 500gf after replacing the front
transport motor. (See p.3-25)

2.7.8 Replacing the pusher motor (PM1)

(See p.2-74)
2 Disconnect the cable connector from the film

pusher motor. Cable connector

motor mounting plate, then remove the plate. Set screws (2)


surface of the pulley and the leading edge of
Pulley
the motor shaft.
5 Loosen the two setting screws and remove Setting screws (2)
Set screws (4)
film pusher motor (PM1) from the motor sen-
sor mounting plate. Motor mounting
• Key Point for Installing the Film Pusher Motor plate
(PM1)
· Re-install the gear in the thrust direction to match the
· When installing the pulley, confirm that it is in a
direction in which the setting screw is in contact with
one of the D-cut sides of the motor shaft, then secure
the screws. (See Step 5) Film pusher motor (PM1)
• Adjustment
Adjust the belt tension to 2kgf after replacing the front
transport motor. (See p.3-25)

2.7.9 Replacing the tilt tray motor (M1)

(See p.2-74)
3 Disconnect the following cable connector

from the tilt tray motor. Set screws (2) Cable connector
· JP36 Motor mounting plate
4 Remove the two set screws, then hold up the Connector

motor sensor mounting plate.

surface of the cam and the leading edge of
the motor shaft. Tilt tray motor (M1)
6 Loosen the two setting screws, then remove Motor mounting

plate
the cam from the motor shaft.
Setting screws (2)
the tilt tray motor (M1) from the motor mount-
ing plate.
• Key Point for Installing the Tilt Tray Motor
· Re-install the cam in the thrust direction to match the
· When installing the cam, confirm that it is in a direc-
tion in which the setting screw is in contact with one
of the D-cut sides of the motor shaft, then secure the Set screws (3)
Cam
screws. (See Step 6)

2.8 Replacing Components in Exposure Section
2.8.1 Replacing the V-sync upper sensor (SB4) and V-sync lower sensor (SB3)
1 Remove the subscan unit. (See p.2-24)

2 Remove the following connector from the sen-
sor being replaced. V-Sync upper sensor (SB4)
· V-Sync upper sensor: JP104 JP104
· V-Sync lower sensor: JP103 Set screws (2)

sensor.
JP103
V-Sync lower sensor (SB3)

2.8 Replacing Components in Exposure Section
2.8.2 Replacing the DD driver board

3 Remove the six set screws, and detach the
rear laser shade lid.
Set screws (6)
Rear laser shade lid
4 Disconnect all the following connectors on the

DD driver board. (in total: four connectors)
· JP88, JP89, JP90, JP91 DD driver board
JP88 JP91
JP90
JP89
5 Remove the four set screws, then detach the

DD driver board from the main unit.
6 Remove the four spacers from the screw por-

tion of the set screws by turning them coun-
terclockwise.
• Key Point for installing the DD driver board
· Re-install the DD driver board in the opposite
Main unit
· When re-installing the spacer, orient the smaller side
of the spacer hole toward the screw portion, and turn
the spacer clockwise.
Set screws (4)
Spacers (4)

2.9 Replacing Components in Elevator Transport Unit
2.9.1 Replacing the nip roller home position sensor (PS5)

(See p.2-22)
2 Disconnect the connector from the nip roller

3 Remove the set screw, then remove the nip

roller home position sensor (PS5).
• Adjustment
Perform "3.5.1 Adjusting the open position of the nip"
after replacing the sensor. (See p.3-47)
Nip roller home position sensor (PS5)
Connector
Set screw

2.9.2 Replacing the nip roller film pass sensor (SB2)

(See p.2-22)
2 Disconnect the connector from the nip roller

film pass sensor.

nip roller film pass sensor (SB2).
Nip roller pass

sensor (SB2)
Set screws (2)

Connector

2.9.3 Replacing the HPRO section entrance sensor (PS6)

(See p.2-22)

· JP76
3 Remove the sensor cable from the two wiring

supports.
4 Remove the HPRO section entrance sensor

(PS6) while closing the four claws.
Claws (4)
Wiring supports (2)
Relay connector
HPRO section entrance

sensor (PS6)

2.9.4 Replacing the nip roller motor (M4)

(See p.2-22)
2 Disconnect the cable connector from the nip

roller motor.
3 Remove the wiring support securing the

cables of the nip roller motor.
Wiring support
Connector

Set screws (2)
motor mounting plate, then remove the plate.
5 Loosen the two setting screws and remove

the cam from the motor shaft. Nip roller motor (M4)
6 Remove the three set screws, then remove Set screws (3)
the nip roller motor (M4) from the motor
mounting plate.
• Adjustment
Perform "3.5.1 Adjusting the open position of the nip"
after replacing the motor. (See p.3-47)
Cam
Setting screws (2)

2.9.5 Replacing the elevator transport drive motor (PM2)

(See p.2-22)
2 Disconnect the cable connector from the

elevator transport drive motor.
3 Remove the wiring support securing the

cables of the elevator transport drive motor.
Cable connector
Wiring supports (2)
4 Loosen the four set screws securing the

motor mounting plate.
Pulley
Set screws (4)


elevator transport drive motor (PM2) from the
motor mounting plate.
Elevator transport drive motor
(PM2)
Set screws (4)

the motor shaft. Pulley

• Key Point for Installing the Elevator Transport
Drive Motor (PM2) Setting screws (2)
the position noted in Step 6.
· When installing the pulley, confirm that it is in a
direction in which the setting screw is in contact with
the D-cut side of the motor shaft, then secure the
screws. (See Step 7)
• Adjustment
Perform "3.6.1 Adjusting the belt tension" after replac-
ing the motor. (See p.3-50)

2.10 Replacing Components in Heat Processing (HPRO) Section
2.10.1 Replacing the heat roller
OFF.
CAUTION: To prevent burns, be sure to commence this procedure only after confirming that the heat
roller and its periphery have cooled down sufficiently.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the heat roller by dropping metal items, etc. A pen in the chest
pocket should be removed just to be safe.
1 Loosen the four set screws and remove the Loosen 4 set screws.
stands from the base of the heat roller stand.
2 Set the stands on the base and secure the

four set screws.
Base
Stand
3 Open the HPRO cover.

HPRO cover


5 Remove the three set screws, then remove Heat processing front cover
Inner cover
the HPRO front cover.
· Of the three screws, the one securing from the left is
Set screws (3)
a truss screw.
6 Open the inner cover.
7 Slide the metal fixture in the A direction.
Metal fixture Metal fixture
A A
8 Remove the upper rack from the main unit.

Upper rack


slip ring cover. Set screws (2)
Slip ring cover
10 Pull (release) the separation claw release

lever. Separation claw
release lever
11 Hold the handle and gear holes.

IMPORTANT: Do not touch or scratch the Handle Gear holes
round surface of the heat
roller or the quality of the
image will decrease.
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the round sur-
face of the slip ring or it
may generate sparks.
Heat roller

12 Remove the heat roller and set it on the heat

roller stand.
• Key Points for Installing the Heat Roller
· Be sure that the gear of the heat roller and drive gear
are in constant mesh.
· Push in the separation claw release lever that was
released in Step 10.
Heat roller stand
• Checking the space between the heat roller and

the guide plate
· Use a thickness gauge and confirm that the space
between the lower rack guide plate (entrance) and Approx. 2mm
the heat roller is the same (2mm) at the entire guide
plate width.
Heat roller
IMPORTANT: The guide plate is
deformed if the space dif- Guide plate
fers (too wide or too nar-
row) at certain points. In
this case, fix or replace the
guide plate. A deformed Heat roller
guide plate may scratch the
films or cause a jam error
Thickness gauge
(E4611).
Guide plate

2.10.2 Removing the lower rack

OFF.
roller and its periphery have cooled down sufficiently.
1 Remove the heat roller. (See p.2-94)

roller cover.
Set screws (2)
Roller cover
3 Loosen the two set screws securing the posi-

tioning metal and slide the positioning metal
toward the A direction.
Set screws (2)
Positioning
metal

4 Lift the lower rack straight up.

Lower rack
5 Place the lower rack where no force is applied

to the guides beneath the rack.
IMPORTANT: The guide on the bottom
surface may deform if force
is applied.
Guides (2)

2.10.3 Replacing the felt of the separation claw

2 Remove the lower rack. (See p.2-98)
3 Peel off the old felt from the separation claw.
4 Warm the adhesive remaining on the separa-
tion claw (aluminum) with a dryer and scrape
of the adhesive with a resin spatula.
5 Wipe off the adhesive remaining on the sepa-

ration claw with a toothbrush or a cloth moist-
ened with isopropyl alcohol.
· A certain degree of adhesive remaining on the sepa-
Separation claw
ration claw will not be a problem as long as it does
not hinder the attachment of the new felt. Felt
6 Peel the protective tape off the double-sided

tape attached on the new felt.
7 Adhere the felt on the separation claw while

pushing it into the groove of the separation
claw.
· Be sure that the felt is not napped or wrinkled, or that
it does not extend off the separation claw when
adhered.

2.10.4 Replacing the felt of the discharge section

the retaining plate. Retaining plate
Set screws (3)
4 Peel away the old felt from the guide.

Retaining plate
5 Remove any tape remaining in the discharge Felt of the exit section
section with a toothbrush.
6 Secure the retaining plate tentatively. Guide

7 Peel off the protection sheet of the double-
sided tape from the new felt.
8 Place the new felt against the edge of the

retaining plate and affix it on the guide.
· Be sure to affix the felt so that it does not crinkle.

2.10.5 Replacing the densitometer

densitometer using a small flatblade screw-
driver.
· CNH1
Connector

IMPORTANT: When removing the set
screw on the left side, the
screwdriver can only reach
the screw by using it at an
angle, so turn the screw
carefully. Set screws (2)
4 Remove the densitometer while tilting it to the

direction of the arrow. Densitometer
IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble the
1
densitometer. Othrerwise it
will not perform accurate
measurements. 2
• Key Points for Installing the Densitometer

· Install the densitometer so that the connector CNH1
comes to the left side.
· Install the densitometer so that the mounting oval
hole is at the very bottom.
• Adjustment
· Perform the procedures in "3.9.3 Correction of the
densitometer" (see p.3-68) after replacing the densit-
ometer.

2.10.6 Removing the HPRO cover assembly

CAUTION: Be sure that the HPRO cover assembly is removed and installed by two people.

3 When using the DRYPRO 722 without the
sorter, remove the five set screws, and detach
the film basket. Set screws (5)
Film basket

hinge (front side) securing the inner cover. Set screws (2) Hinge (inner cover side)
· Attaching an adhesive tape under the hinge tempo-
rarily is recommended as it will prevent the set
screws from dropping into the unit.
5 Remove the inner cover by sliding it to the

front side.
Hinge
Inner cover


service window cover.
Service window cover
Set screws (2)
7 Disconnect the following relay connector for

the FILTER set sensor, then remove the wir-
Wiring clamp
ing from the wiring clamp.
· JP70
JP70
8 Remove the six set screws securing the

Set screws (6)
HPRO cover assembly.
· Three screws are located on both front and rear sides.
9 Close all HPRO covers of the HPRO section

that are open.

10 With one person on each side, lift the HPRO HPRO cover assembly
cover assembly straight up and remove it
from the main unit.
• Key Points for Installing the HPRO Cover
Assembly
· Be careful not to apply shock to the exhaust duct
located on the rear side.
· Be sure that there are no wirings caught before
securing the set screws.
Exhaust duct

2.10.7 Replacing the densitometer entrance sensor (PS8)
1 Remove the HPRO cover assembly.

(See p.2-103)
2 Loosen the two set screws securing the guide Guide assembly
assembly from the front side.
· The two collars will detach at the same time.
2
3 Remove the guide assembly.
Collars (2)
1
Set screws (2)
4 Disconnect one relay connector.

Densitometer entrance sensor
5 Remove the sensor cable from the two wiring (PS8)
supports. Claws (4)
6 Remove the densitometer entrance sensor

(PS8) while closing the four claws.
Cable connector
Wiing support (2)

2.10.8 Replacing the FILTER set sensor (PS18)

service window cover.
Service window cover
Set screws (2)
2 Disconnect the following relay connector for

the FILTER set sensor, then remove the wiring
Wiring clamp
from the wiring clamp.
· JP70
JP70
3 Remove the FILTER.

Cover
cover. Set screws (2)

5 Remove the two set screws securing the sen-

sor mounting plate, then remove the plate.
Connector Set screws (2)
6 Disconnect the connector from the FILTER Sensor
set sensor.
mounting plate
7 Remove the set screw, then remove the FIL-

TER set sensor (PS18) from the sensor FILTER set sensor (PS18)
mounting plate.
Set screw

2.10.9 Replacing the heat roller motor (M19)
1 Remove the HPRO cover assembly.

(See p.2-103)
2 Disconnect the following connector from CN2

of the drive board of the heat roller motor.
· JP210
JP210
3 Remove one set screw, then remove the

cover.
Set screw
Cover

the wiring protection cover.
Set screws (3)
Wiring protection
cover

5 Remove the wiring from the wiring clamp

fixed at two locations on the heat roller motor
assembly.
Wiring clamp (2 locations)
6 Remove the four set screws securing the heat

roller motor assembly.
Set screws
Heat roller motor assembly
7 Tilt the heat roller motor assembly.

Heat roller motor assembly


tensioner. Set screws (2)
Belt tensioner

motor mounting plate, then remove the plate.
Set screws (3)

heat roller motor (M19) from the motor mount-
ing plate.
Heat roller motor (M19)
11 Write down the distance between the edge Motor mounting
surface of the pulley and the leading edge of plate
the motor shaft. Set screws (4)

Pulley
Setting screws (2)

• Key point for installing the heat roller motor

· When attaching the pulley, confirm that one of the
setting screws is in contact with one of the D-cut
sides of the motor shaft, then secure the screws.(See
Step 12)
• Adjustment
· Perform "3.6.1 Adjusting the belt tension" when
assembling the heat roller motor assembly. (See p.3-
50)

2.10.10 Replacing the film discharge motor (PM3)
1 Remove the two guide mounting screws, then

remove the guide.
2 Remove the HPRO cover assembly. 1

(See p.2-103)
1 Guide
Guide mounting screws (2)

cover.
Set screw
Cover

the wiring protection cover.
Set screws (3)
Wiring protection
cover


guide mounting metal. Set screws (4)
Guide mounting metal
6 Remove two of the four set screws on the

front side securing the cooling discharge unit, Loosen 2 set screws.
and loosen the two on the rear side. Set screws (2)
7 Slide the cooling discharge unit to the front

side.
Cooling discharge unit

8 Disconnect the cable connector of the film

discharge motor from the panel. Connector of
2
the film exit motor
1 Cable connector

tensioner. Set screws (4)
10 Remove the four set screws, then remove the Film discharge
film discharge motor (PM3). motor (PM3)
Belt tensioner
Set screws (2)

the motor shaft. Pulley
Setting screws (2)
12 Loosen the two set screws and remove the
pulley from the motor shaft.
• Key point for installing the film discharge
motor
· When attaching the pulley, confirm that one of the
setting screws is in contact with one of the D-cut
sides of the motor shaft, then secure the screws.(See
Step 12)

2.11 Replacing Components in Outer Section
2.11.1 Opening the control box
CAUTION: To prevent electrical shock, be sure to turn OFF the breaker of the main unit or the facility
before performing the following procedure.

· The front foot cover is fixed to the main unit with
two magnet catches. Foot cover (front)
Magnet catches (2)
2 Remove the four set screws (a) securing the

control box.
Loosen 2 set screws (b).
3 Loosen the two set screws (b) securing the
shield bracket.
Set screws (a) (4)
4 Slide the shield bracket down.

CAUTION: Be extremely careful to avoid inju-
ries when handling the shield fin-
ger attached to the shield bracket.
The edges of the shield finger are
very sharp.
Shield bracket
Shield finger (7 locations)

5 Pull the control box out toward the front side.
Control box
6 Remove the snap fastener and open the lid of

the control box.
Snap fastener
• Key Point for Installing the Control Box

· Before securing the shield bracket, confirm that the
shield bracket is inserted fully in between the metal
plate in the back of the rubber packing and the main
unit.
WARNING: Be sure that the shield bracket
is in close contact with the
main unit. If it is not in close
contact, the shield would be in- Metal plate of the
complete and it may adversely main unit
affect the DRYPRO 722 and pe- Rubber packing
ripheral medical equipment.
Shield bracket

2.11.2 Replacing the mechanical control curcuit board

To transfer the setup information recorded in the existing mechanical control curcuit board to the new mechanical control curcuit
board, back up the setup information from the mechanical control PC, then download it to the new circuit board.(See p.7-33)
IMPORTANT: Be sure to wrap the grounding strap around your wrist in order to protect the board
circuit.

2 Remove all of the following connectors on the
mechanical control curcuit board. (15 connec-
tors in total)
MCN1, MCN2. MCN3, MCN5, MCN6, MCN7,
MCN8, MCN9, MCN10, MCN11, MCN12, MCN13,
MCN14, MCN15, MCN16
Mechanical control curcuit board MCN7

MCN12 MCN17 MCN13 MCN9
MCN11
MCN10
MCN14
MCN15 MCN2
MCN8
MCN1 MCN3
MCN5
MCN6 MCN16
3 Remove the six set screws, and then remove

a mechanical control curcuit board from the
main unit.
4 Remove the six spacers from the screw por-

tion of the set screws by turning them counter
clockwise.
• Key Point for Installing the Mechanical Control
Circuit Board
· Re-install the mechanical control curcuit board in the
opposite sequence to removal.
· When reattaching the spacer to the set screw, insert Set screws (6)
Main
the smaller side of the hole to the screw and turn the unit
spacer clockwise. Spacer (6 pcs)

2.11.3 Replacing the hard disk

CAUTION: The main software is pre-installed in the replaceble hard disk.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to wrap the grounding strap around your wrist in order to protect the board circuit.
1 Open the lid of the control box. (See p.2-116)

2 Disconnect one hard disk cable connector from CN11
on the main CPU curcuit board.
CN11
· JP106
Cable connector
Main CPU circuit board
3 Loosen the four set screws and remove the Hard disk
hard disk with the bracket attached.
· The mounting position of the hard disk may differ Bracket
depending on the date of the production.
Loosen 4 set screws

1

4 Disconnect the two cable connectors from the

hard disk.
Connectors (2)

bracket from the hard disk.
IMPORTANT: The screws securing the hard
disk are inch-sized screws. Be
careful not to lose them or use
metric sized screws instead.
• Key Point for Installing the Hard Disk
· When connecting the hard disk cable to the main
CPU curcuit board, make sure that the connector is
CN11. There is a connector on the main CPU curcuit
board with the same number of pins.
Set screws (4)
· When replacing the hard disk drive, set the drive

installation jumper of the new hard disk in the Mas-
ter position. The figure is an example for installing a
hard disk drive made by Western Digital. The manu-
facturer of the replaceable hard disk may sometimes
differ. In such cases, follow the instructions indicated
on the label of the hard disk or on the circuit board to
set the drive. Drive installation jumper
MASTER SLAVE

2.11.4 Replacing the CPU circuit board

IMPORTANT: Be sure to wrap the grounding strap around your wrist in order to protect the board
circuit.
1 Open the lid of the control box.

(See p.2-116)
2 Disconnect the following two connectors from

the main CPU curcuit board. CN11
· JP8, JP106
Connectors (2)
Main CPU curcuit board

mounting panel of the main CPU curcuit
board.
· JP32
JP32

4 Remove the set screw, then hold both ends of

the main CPU curcuit board and remove it
from the back plane board. Set screw
IMPORTANT: To protect the circuit, do Main CPU

not touch the terminal part curcuit board
of the main CPU curcuit
board.
Terminal part

2.11.5 Replacing the print control board (Adding print memory)

The position to install the print control board differs between the 0451H1010A type and 0451H1010 (B or C) type.
IMPORTANT:Be sure to wrap the grounding strap around your wrist in order to protect the board circuit.

(See p.2-116)

print control board. Cable connector
· LCN7
3 Disconnect the following two BNC connectors

from the mounting panel.
· HD, VIDEO
Connectors (2)

4 Loosen the set screw and remove the support

metal plate from the print control board.
· Depending on the date of production, some models
do not come with the support metal plate. 2
1
Support metal
plate
Loosen the set screw.
5 Remove the set screw, hold both ends of the

print control board and remove it from the
back plane board.
IMPORTANT: To protect the circuit, do Set screw
not touch the terminal part
of the print control board. Print control board
Terminal part
6 For the 0451H1010A type, disconnect the two

connectors from the print control board.
Connector

• [Adding print memory]

1 Insert the additional memory card into the
memory slot of the print control board.
· Insert the memory card securely until the lever claws
on both sides of the memory slot grasp the notches
on the memory DIMM securely.
Memory slot
Additional memory
• Key Point for Installing the Print Control Board

· When installing the print control board, confirm that
the leading edge of the mounting panel is securely
set between the grounding spring plate for the circuit
board and the control box cabinet.
Grounding spring
plate for the circuit
board Panel edge

2.11.6 Replacing the density I/F board

IMPORTANT: Be sure to wrap the grounding strap around your wrist in order to protect the board circuit.

(See p.2-116)

density I/F board.
Connector
· XCN1 Density I/F board
3 Loosen the two set screws, and then discon-

nect the following connector from the mount-
ing panel.
· XCNB
Connector

4 Remove the set screw, hold both ends of the

density I/F board and remove it from the back
plane board.
IMPORTANT: To protect the circuit, do not Set screw
touch the terminal part of
the density I/F board. Density I/F board
Terminal part
• Key Point for Installing the Density I/F Board

· When installing the density I/F board, confirm that
the leading edge of the mounting panel is securely
set between the grounding spring plate for the circuit
board and the control box cabinet.
Grounding spring
plate for the
circuit board Panel edge

2.12 Disassembling Sorter and Replacing Components
2.12.1 Removing the outer covers
• Removing the sorter right covers

(upper) / (lower)
1 Remove the sorter right cover (upper) while

lifting it. Handle
Sorter right cover (upper)
2 Loosen the two set screws, and remove the

sorter right cover (lower).
Loosen the two set screws.

• Removing the sorter front cover
1 Remove the six set screws, then the sorter

front cover.
Set screws (6)
Front lid
Sorter front cover
• Removing the sorter rear cover
1 Remove the six set screws, then the sorter

rear cover.
Set screws (6)
Sorter rear cover

2.12.2 Removing the bins
1 Remove the sorter rear cover.

2 Loosen the top bin positioning screw until the
edge of the screw aligns with the surface of
the metal plate.
Loosen the
positioning screw.
3 Lift the bins to remove, starting from the top

bin.

• Key Point for Re-installing the Bins

· The sorter has the three types of bins, each of which Bin for the first and second
should be attached in the specified location. Be sure cases from the top
to attach them in the correct locations.
· The bin for the bottom case has the two cutouts on
the film stopper.
· The bins for the second and the third cases from the
bottom have one cutout on the film stopper.
· The bins for the first and second cases from the top Bin for the second
have no cutouts. and third cases
from the bottom
Cutout
Bin for the bottom case
Cutout
Cutout

2.12.3 Exchanging the right cover detection micro switch

2 Remove the bins.
3 Disconnect the connector from the micro
switch.
Connector
4 Remove the two set screws, then the micro

switch assembly. Set screws (2)
Micro switch assembly

5 Remove the E-ring, the flat washer, and

E-ring
detach the micro switch from the adjustment
plate. Micro switch
Mounting plate
Adjustment plate
6 Remove the set screw, and detach the micro

switch from the mounting plate.
Set screw
Micro switch
Mounting plate
• Key Point for Re-installing the Micro Switch

· Hook both ends of the spring on the hole on the
adjustment plate and the mounting plate.
Spring
Micro switch
Spring

2.12.4 Replacing the release lever detection micro switch

2 Open the front door, and set the open/close
guide to the release position by lifting the
release lever.
3 Remove the two set screws, then the micro

switch mounting plate.
Micro switch mounting plate
Set screws (2)
4 Remove the two set screws, and detach the Micro switch mounting plate
micro switch assembly from the micro switch
mounting plate.
Micro switch assembly
Set screws(2)
5 Remove the E-ring, the flat washer, then the E-ring

adjustment plate.
Micro switch
Mounting plate
Adjustment plate

6 Remove the set screw, and detach the micro

switch from the mounting plate.
Set screw
Micro switch
Mounting plate
• Key Point for Re-installing the Micro Switch

· Hook both ends of the spring on the hole on the
adjustment plate and the mounting plate as shown in
the figure on the right.
Spring
Micro switch
Spring
• After installing the micro switch mounting plate

to the sorter main body, adjust the position of Set screws(2)
the micro switch following the procedure Tension plate
below.
(1)Loosen the two set screws slightly.
(2)Lower the release lever back to its original position.
(3)Adjust the position of the micro switch so that the
tension plate can activate the micro switch (until you
hear it click).
(4)Loosen the two set screws slightly.

2.12.5 Removing the jam detection sensors

When replacing the jam detection sensors, replace them at the light-receiving side and the light-emitting side at the
same time.
IMPORTANT: Perform "3.8.3 Adjusting the voltage of the jam detection sensor" after replacing the
sensors.
• Removing the sensor at the light-

emitting side
1 Remove the two set screws, and detach the

sensor cover.
Set screws (2)
Sensor cover

film jam detection sensor (at the light-emitting
side).
· JP16
Connector


film jam detection sensor (at the light-emitting
side).
Set screws (2)

Film jam detection sensor
(at the light-emitting side)
• Removing the sensor at the light-

receiving side
1 Remove the sorter front cover and the sorter

rear cover.

film transport guide (lower).
Film transport guide

(lower)
Set screws (2)


guide plate.
Guide plate
Set screws (4)

film jam detection sensor (at the light-receiv-
ing side).
· JP17
Connector

film jam detection sensor (at the light-receiv-
ing side).
Set screws (2)

Film jam detection sensor
(at the light-receiving side)

2.12.6 Replacing the sorter drive motor
1 Remove the sorter right covers (upper) /

(lower).
2 Remove the sorter front cover. Set screws (4)

3 Open the front door.
4 Remove the four set screws, then the protec-
tive cover (front).
Protective cover
5 Loosen the four set screws, and detach the

electrical control section cover.
Set screws (4)
Electrical control section cover

6 Disconnect the following connector of the

sorter drive motor from the sorter drive board.
· SCN12
SCN12
Sorter drive board
Sorter volume board
7 Loosen the two set screws on the belt ten-

sioner, and detach the drive belt from the pul-
ley on the sorter drive motor.
Belt tensioner
Set screws (2)
Belt

8 Remove the set screw, then the capacitor.
Capacitor
Set screw
9 Remove the four nuts from the front panel

side, and remove the four set screws securing
the sorter drive motor from the motor.
· Note that the motor, the gear unit, and the spacer
come apart when removing the set screws securing
the motor.
Flat washers (4)
Motor Gear unit
• Key Point for Re-installing the Sorter Drive Nuts (4)
Motor Spacer
· After installing the sorter drive motor, adjust the belt
tension.
Spring washers (4)

Set screws (4)

2.12.7 Replacing the gate switching solenoids

2 Disconnect the connectors of the gate switch-
ing solenoids to be replaced (JP7 to JP10).
Connector
3 Remove the three set screws, and detach the

solenoid unit from the plunger. Plunger
Solenoid unit
Set screws (3)
4 Remove the four set screws, and detach the Solenoid core
mounting plate from the solenoid core.
5 Secure the new solenoid core to the mounting Set screws (4)
plate with the four set screws.
Mounting plate

6 Insert the plunger into the solenoid unit, and Marker line
attach the solenoid unit to the sorter rear panel
with the three set screws tentatively. Plunger Solenoid unit
7 Press the plunger in the direction of arrow A B

until the plunger contacts stopper pin B. A
8 Slide the solenoid unit in the direction of
arrow B until it stops.
9 Mark a line at the edge of the solenoid unit

mounting plate (in the sliding direction).
Stopper pin B Set screws (3)
10 Return the solenoid unit 1 to 2mm rightward
from the marker, and tighten the set screws
further.
1 to 2 mm
Marker line

2.12.8 Replacing the sorter drive board

The sorter volume board is mounted on the sorter drive board.
The sorter drive board and the sorter volume board use the same circuit board as the supply drive board / New (p.9-
14) and the supply volume board / Old (p.9-12) of the DRYPRO 722.

(lower).

electrical control section cover.
Set screws (4)
Electrical control section cover
3 Remove the wiring for connecting the

DRYPRO 722 from the wiring support at the Wiring support
sorter front panel side.
4 Disconnect the following connector for the

sorter drive motor from the sorter drive board.
· SCN 12
SCN12
Sorter drive board
Sorter volume board

5 Remove the two set screws, and pull the elec-

trical control section from the right of the Electrical control
sorter. section
Set screws (2)
6 Disconnect the following eight connectors from

the sorter drive board.
· SCN1, SCN2, SCN4, SCN5, SCN6, SCN7, SCN13,
SCN14
SCN7 SCN6
SCN5
Sorter drive board SCN4
SCN13
SCN14
SCN1 SCN2
7 Remove the six set screws, and detach the Sorter drive board
sorter drive board.
Set screws (6)
8 Turn the four spacers counterclockwise to
remove from the screw parts of the set screws.
• Key Point for Re-installing the Sorter Drive Spacers (6)
Board
· When attaching the spacer, orient the spacer with the
smaller hole toward the screw part and turn it clock-
wise.
• Adjustment
· Perform "3.8.3 Adjusting the voltage of the jam
detection sensor" after replacing the boards.

Blank Page
Chapter 3
Checking and Adjusting
3.1 Adjusting Supply Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1.1 Adjusting the voltage of the film empty sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.2 Adjusting the voltage of the 2-sheet sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.3 Adjusting the phase of the sucker operation encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.4 Adjusting the timing of separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.5 Adjusting the position of separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.1.6 Adjusting the tension of the barrier taking-up belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1.7 Checking and adjusting the shutter slide resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.8 Adjusting the open/close position of the shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.1.9 Adjusting the position of the shutter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.2 Adjusting Front Transport Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.2.1 Adjusting the magnet catch of the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.2.2 Checking and adjusting the moving guide pusher pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.2.3 Adjusting the tension of the belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.2.4 Adjusting the left cover interlock (S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.2.5 Adjusting lower cover interlock (S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.3 Adjusting Lower Transport Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.3.1 Adjusting the inclination of the pusher roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.3.2 Adjusting the magnet catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.3.3 Adjusting the position of the pusher claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.3.4 Adjusting the tension of the front transport motor (M2) belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.3.5 Adjusting the tension of the film pusher motor (PM1) belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.4 Checking and adjusting Exposure Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.4.1 Adjusting the nip pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.4.2 Cleaning the subscan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.4.3 Cleaning the laser mirror of the optical unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.4.4 Checking the LD transmitter (PD signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.4.5 Confirming LD radiation (IR card) and measuring the amount of radiation . . . 3-35
3.4.6 Checking and adjusting the angle of the H-sync mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.4.7 Checking the H-sync circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.5 Elevator Transport Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.5.1 Adjusting the open position of the nip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.5.2 Adjusting the belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.6 Heat Processing (HPRO) Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.6.1 Adjusting the belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.7 Checking and Adjusting Power Supply Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.7.1 Checking the DC power voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.7.2 Checking the AC power voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.7.3 VR adjustment of DC power voltage (3.3V/5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.7.4 VR adjustment of DC power (±12V/+24V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.7.5 Descriptions on the control box cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3.8 Checking and Adjusting Sorter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.8.1 Checking AC power voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.8.2 Adjusting DC power voltage (5V / 12V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.8.3 Adjusting the voltage of the jam detection sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.8.4 Adjusting belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
3.9 Correcting Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
3.9.1 Correcting irregularities in pitch and density of left and right sides . . . . . . . . . 3-61
3.9.2 Stopping the time-changing density correction control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.9.3 Correction of the densitometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3.9.4 Correcting the densitometer correction file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3.9.5 Correcting the start position for writing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3.1 Adjusting Supply Section
Attention: The names of the parts and functions displayed on the mechanical maintenance PC might be
different from those displayed on the service manual.
3.1.1 Adjusting the voltage of the film empty sensor

Adjust the voltage of the film empty sensor after replacing the film empty sensor (SBU2U/D) or supply board.

2 Open the front cover, and insert one sheet of
unprocessed film with the cardboard packing.
3 Connect the maintenance PC to the main

unit, then start the mechanical control mainte-
nance PC. (See p.7-1)
IMPORTANT: To protect the board circuit
and the hard disk, be sure
to follow "7.1.1 Connecting
maintenance PC and
DRYPRO".
4 From the Menu screen, select [1 UNIT TEST]

–> [2 SUPPLY UNIT TEST] .
· The [SUPPLY TRANS TEST] screen will be dis-
played.
5 Press the F7 key until the sucker unit goes to

the lower limit position.
6 Press the DEL key.

· [ALL SENS] will be set as [ON].

7 Set the negative pole of the test probe to TP2,

positive pole to TP11, then measure the DC
voltage.
· If the board number is 0451H1A, set the negative
pole to TP1 and positive pole to TP4.
<Regulated Value>
3.5±0.2V (Board No. 0451H1A)
<Regulated Value>
TP2 TP11 VR7
3.5±0.2V (Board No. 0451H1B) (GND)
<Regulated Value>
3.3±0.1V (Board No. 0451H1C)
8 If the value is not within the regulated range,

adjust VR7 until the voltage is within the 0451H1A
range of the regulated value.
· If the board number is 0451H1A, adjust VR3. 0451H1B /0451H1C
9 Take out the film from the tray.

10 Measure the voltage as in Step 7.
<Regulated Value> 1.0V or less TP4 TP1
VR3 (GND)

perform the adjustment in Step 8 again.

3.1.2 Adjusting the voltage of the 2-sheet sensor

Adjust the voltage of the 2-sheet sensor after replacing the 2-sheet sensor emitter (LEDBU/D), 2-sheet sensor re-
ceiver (DETBU/D), or supply drive board.

nance software. (See p.7-1)
3 From the Menu screen, select [1 UNIT TEST]–>

[2 SUPPLY UNIT TEST]
· The [SUPPLY TRANS TEST] screen will be displayed.

5 Insert a film (blue-based or clear-based) from
the facility into the moving guide and close
the front cover.

· [ALL SENS] will be set as [ON].
7 Set the negative pole of the test probe to TP2,

positive pole to TP12, then measure the DC
voltage.
· If the board number is 0451H1A, set the negative
pole of the tester to TP1 and positive pole to TP2.
<Regulated Value> 2.0±0.1V

adjust VR9. TP2 TP12 VR9
(GND)
· If the board number is 0451H1A, adjust VR1.
IMPORTANT: Adjust the voltage of the 2-
sheet sensor after the volt-
age of the 2-sheet sensor
emitter is stabilized (wait 0451H1A
two minutes or longer after
light is transmitted). 0451H1B /0451H1C
TP1
TP2 VR1 (GND)

9 Measure and adjust as in Steps 4 to 8 while

changing the type and number of films.
<Regulated Value>
Upon two sheets of blue base films: 1.3V or
below
<Regulated Value>
When films are removed: 3.5V or above
<Regulated Value>
Upon one sheet of clear base film: 2.7±0.3V
<Regulated Value>
Upon two sheets of clear base films: 2.0V or
below

3.1.3 Adjusting the phase of the sucker operation encoder

3 From the Menu screen, select [1 UNIT TEST]–> Cam

· The [SUPPLY TRANS TEST] screen will be displayed.
4 Press the F4 [INIT] key.

· The sucker unit will move to the sucker operation
position and stop.
A
5 Press the F7 [STEP] key twice.
· The sucker unit will move to the sucker separation
position (shown in the right figure) and stop.
Upper and lower arm roller bearings
6 Confirm (visually) the relationship between
NG NG
the position of the roller bearings and cam of
the upper and lower arms.
<Regulated Value>
The extended line of surface A of cam should
roughly overlap with the roller bearings of upper
and lower arms.
• When the movement is not within the

regulated range
2 Connect the supply drive board in the supply
unit and the wiring of the main unit with an SCN14 SCN1
extension cable for the suppiy unit. SCN13
· By using a supply extension cable, the operation of
the supply unit could be checked by removing the
supply unit from the main unit.
3 Remove the sucker unit. (See p.2-42) Supply extension cable
SCNU14 SCNU1
SCNU13 SCND14 SCND1
SCND13
JJ1
JJ13
JJ14
Supply extension cable

4 Loosen the two set screws and adjust the

installed angle of the encoder so that the
extended line of surface A and the tangential
line of the upper and lower arm roller bear-
ings overlap.
5 Re-install the sucker unit. Setting screws (2)
6 Confirm the cam operation from the mechani-

cal control maintenance PC.
· Confirm that the cam and roller bearings of the upper
and lower arm stop at the proper position.

3.1.4 Adjusting the timing of separator

Adjust the timing to start saving the film separator.

2 Connect the extension cable for the supply
unit between the main device and supply unit.


· The [SUPPLY UNIT TEST] screen will be displayed.

the sucker separation position.
6 Visually confirm how the guide contacts with

the separator shaft.
<Regulated Value>
The guide and separator shaft should be in
contact.
<Regulated Value>
The separator should be slanted with a clearance NG
angle from the upright position.
Film separator shaft
GOOD NG
Guide
7 If the guide is not in the regulated position,

loosen the two set screws and adjust the
position of the guide.
IMPORTANT: Be sure that the guide is set
horizontally when securing
the set screws of the guide.
Set screws (2)

3.1.5 Adjusting the position of separator

Adjust the distant to save the sepaator.

2 Connect the extension cable for the supply
unit between the main device and supply unit.



the sucker release position.
6 Move the sepaator by hand and confirm the

space between the roller.
<Regulated Value>
There should be a space of 1mm - 2mm between
the sepaator and roller.
Sepaator
Roller
1~2mm
7 When the space is not within the regulated

value, loosen the two set screws and adjust
the position of the guide.
Set screws (2)

3.1.6 Adjusting the tension of the barrier taking-up belt
1 Remove the tray. (See p.2-45)

2 Remove the five set screws, then remove the
shutter guide. Shutter guide
Set screws (5)
3 Loosen the two set screws securing the gear Gear mount plate
mount plate.
4 Pull the gear mount plate with a push-pull Push-pull gauge
gauge.
5 Secure the set screw on the rear side when Set screws
Set screws (back) (front)
the push-pull gauge indicates 5kgf.
6 Re-install the shutter guide.

7 Continue adjusting the shutter slide resis-
tance. (See p.3-10)

3.1.7 Checking and adjusting the shutter slide resistance
1 Pull out the tray.

2 Press the push-pull gauge against the shutter
handle.
3 While checking the value indicated on the

push-pull gauge, open the shutter approxi-
mately 160mm.
<Regulated Value> 1 to 1.3kgf Shutter guide
Shutter
4 If the value is not within the regulated range, Set screws (5)
loosen the five set screws securing the left
and right shutter guides and adjust the height
of the shutter guides.
· To decrease the slide resistance, adjust the shutter
guide to a higher position.
· To increase the slide resistance, adjust the shutter
guide to a lower position.
Push-pull gauge
Shutter guide
Set screws (5)
5 Hang the push-pull gauge on the shutter han-

dle.
6 While checking the value indicated on the

push-pull gauge, close the shutter.
<Regulated Value> 1 - 1.3kgf
Shutter guide
7 If the value is not within the regulated range, Set screws (5)
Shutter
loosen each of the five set screws securing
the left and right shutter guides and adjust the
height of the shutter guides.
Push-pull gauge Shutter guide

Set screws (5)

3.1.8 Adjusting the open/close position of the shutter

Adjusting the open/close position of the shutter.

2 Connect the supply unit to the main unit using
extension cable for the supply unit.


5 Press the TAB key.
6 Press the F8 key.

· The shutter will close.
7 Press the F6 key.

· The shutter arm will go to the home position.
8 Draw out the tray and measure the space a1

between the shutter and the tray. a1 a2
9 After closing the shutter by hand, measure
the space a2 between the shutter and the
tray.
<Regulated Value> 0< (a1 - a2) < 2mm

loosen the two set screws securing the shut- Supply shutter close position sensor
ter close position sensor (PS25) to the plate Mount plate
and adjust the position of the supply shutter
close position sensor.
· (a1 - a2) > 2mm : Adjust the position in the black
arrow direction. Set screws (2)
· (a1 - a2) < 0mm : Adjust the position in the white
arrow direction.
11 Put back the tray all the way to the supply unit.
12 Repeat the Steps 6 to 11 until the measured
value is within the regulated value.

13 Press the F7 key.

· The shutter will open.

15 Draw out the tray, and measure the space b

between the shutter and tray.
<Regulated Value> 140 < b < 145 (mm) b

loosen the two set screws securing the shut- Supply shutter open position sensor
ter open position sensor (PS24) to the plate
and adjust the position of the supply shutter Mount plate
open position sensor.
· b < 140mm : Adjust the position in the black arrow
direction.
Set screws (2)
· b > 145mm : Adjust the position in the white arrow
direction.
17 Put the tray all the way back to the supply unit.
18 Repeat the Steps 13 to 17 until the measured
value is within the regulated value.


· The shutter arm will rotate to the opened position.
d
21 Visually confirm the angle c of the shutter arm c
against the metal plate of the supply unit.
Shutter arm
· The shutter arm will rotate to the closed position.

24 Visually confirm the angle d of the shutter arm

against the metal plate of the supply unit.
<Regulated Value> Angle c Angle d


loosen the two set screws securing the shut- Supply shutter home position sensor
ter home position sensor (PS19) to the plate
and adjust the position of the supply shutter Mount plate
Set screws (2)

3.1.9 Adjusting the position of the shutter lock
1 Confirm that the adjustment for the shutter

lock open/close position has been completed.
(See p.3-11)
IMPORTANT: If this adjustment is per-
formed with the shutter
close position inappropri-
ately set, the shutter will
not be locked completely
when closed and may open
when shock, etc. is applied.


4 Press the TAB key.
5 Press the F8 key.

· The shutter will close.
6 Loosen the two set screws. 2

7 Slide the shutter lock assembly to the A direc- 1
tion (rear).
8 Slide the shutter lock assembly to the B direc- Set screws (2)
tion (front) until it contacts the shutter.
Shutter lock assembly
9 Measure the dimension (a).

10 Slide the shutter lock assembly from dimen-
sion (a) to the A direction (rear) , and secure
the two set screws. 2mm
Set screws (2) a
Shutter lock assembly

3.2 Adjusting Front Transport Section
3.2.1 Adjusting the magnet catch of the front cover
The front cover magnet catch prevents the front cover from opening completely when the front cover lock is released.

2 Place a 150mm steel ruler on the frame of the
front transport section and measure how
much the magnet catch sticks out.
<Regulated Value> 9.5 - 13.5mm
9.5~13.5mm
Magnet catch

make adjustments by turning the magnet
catch.
4 Measure the other magnet catch by using the

same procedure.
<Regulated Value>
The protrusion of both magnet catches should be
equal.

adjust the other magnet catch by turning it.
6 Open and close the front cover by hand and Magnet catch
confirm that it is not extremely heavy (or
light).

3.2.2 Checking and adjusting the moving guide pusher pin

The moving guide pusher pin retains the moving guide at the supply section exit with spring force when the front
cover is closed.

2 Measure the amount of the bracket (white
resin) of the moving guide pusher pin sticking
out from the guide surface on the inner side of
the front cover.
<Regulated Value> 0 - 1.0mm

loosen the two set screws and adjust the
position of the bracket.
Bracket 0~1.0mm
Set screws (2)
4 Push the moving guide pusher pin back and

forth several times by hand.
<Regulated Value>
The pusher pin should slide smoothly.
5 If the pusher pin does not slide smoothly,

loosen the two set screws and secure them at
a position where the moving guide pusher pin
slides smoothly.
6 Check and adjust the remaining three pusher Moving guide

pins of the moving guide using the same pro-
pusher pin
cedure.

3.2.3 Adjusting the tension of the belt

2 Loosen the two set screws of the tension
adjustment pulley.
3 Press the push-pull gauge against the tension

adjustment pulley.
· Press the gauge in an upright direction against the
frame of the front transport unit. Tension adjustment pulley
4 Secure the two set screws when the value

indicated on the push-pull gauge is in the
range of 0.9 to 1.0kgf.
Set screws (2)
Push-pull gauge

3.2.4 Adjusting the left cover interlock (S2)

3 From the [MENU] screen, select [6 INPUT

PORT] and press the Return key.
· The [INPUT PORT] screen will be displayed.
4 Observe the space when the dog goes into

the slit of the left cover interlock while opening
and closing the left cover.
<Regulated Value> 1.0 to 1.5 mm

loosen the one set screw securing the dog
and adjust the position of the dog.
Cover of left cover
6 Close the left cover. 1.0-1.5mm 1.0-1.5mm
interlock swith cover
dog Set screw

7 Loosen the two set screws and slide the left

cover interlock left and right.
8 Search the position where PA-bit3 display of

“Input port” changes from 0 to 1.(See p.7-41)
9 Slide the left cover interlock 2 to 3 mm left.

10 Secure the two set screws.
Set screws (2)
2-3mm

3.2.5 Adjusting lower cover interlock (S3)

3 From the [MENU] screen, select [6 INPUT

PORT] and press the Return key.
· The [INPUT PORT] screen will be displayed.
4 Close the lower cover if it is open.

5 Loosen the two set screws and slide the lower Set screw
cover interlock back and forth.
6 Search the position where PA-bit7 display of

“Input port” changes from 0 to 1.(See p.7-41)
7 Slide the lower cover interlock 2 to 3mm to

the front side.
8 Secure the two set screws. Lower cover

interlock (S3)
9 Open and close the lower cover and confirm
that the dog on the lower cover side goes into
the slit of the lower cover interlock smoothly.

3.3 Adjusting Lower Transport Section
3.3.1 Adjusting the inclination of the pusher roller
1 Measure the distance (a) from the film tip of b b

the output screen to the top left end of the a a
image and the distance (b) from the film tip to c c
the top right end of the image, and calculate
the difference (c) (amount (a) - amount (b)).
<Regulated Value> c ≤ 1mm
[In case of A] [In case of B]

open the left cover and pull out the pusher
transport section.
Pusher transport section
3 Loosen the three set screws securing the idle Set screws (3)
roller.
[In case of A]
· Be careful not to loosen the screws too much as this
is a delicate adjustment.
4 While tapping the mounting plate of the idle 1/2 the length
of the distance C
1/2 the length
of the distance C
roller lightly, tilt the roller to 1/2 the length of
[In case of B]
the distance (c) obtained in Step 1.
5 Secure the three set screws.

1/2 the length 1/2 the length
6 Output the image again and confirm the of the distance C of the distance C
amount of inclination.
7 Repeat the above adjustment until the

amount of inclination is in the regulated
range.
8 Output flat patterns on a 14"x17" film.

<Regulated Value>
Irregularities should not be formed at 250mm
from the film tip.

9 When inconsistencies occur, loosen two

screws A on the side of the pusher transport
section, and adjust the length from the center
of the idle roller to the side board of the Bracket
pusher transport section to approximately
Idle roller
12mm.
Screws A
10 Adjust on the opposite side of the pusher
transport section in the same procedure.
• When inconsistencies occur at 210mm from
the leading edge of the film
If inconsistencies occur at 210mm from the leading
edge of the film when outputting flat patterns on a
14"x17" film, adjust the R guide position of the pusher
transport section. 12mm or more
· Loosen two screws B on the side of the pusher trans-

port section, and adjust so that the length from the
lower edge of the side board to the higher edge of the
rib of the R guide is 17.8 to 19mm. Adjust on the
opposite side of the pusher transport section in the R guide
same procedure.
Screws B
17.8-19mm

3.3.2 Adjusting the magnet catch
1 Open the left cover.

2 Draw the pusher transport section in and out
several times.
3 When the pusher transport section is pushed

in, insert a feeler gauge between the pusher
transport section and lower section and check
whether they are in absolute contact.
4 If there is a space in between the two, loosen NG GOOD

the two set screws of the magnet catch and
adjust the position.
Space
Magnet catch
Set screws (2)

3.3.3 Adjusting the position of the pusher claw

2 Pull out the lower cover.
3 Set a 14x17in. film in the tilt tray. R guide section Film
4 Connect the maintenance PC to the main Pusher claws (2)

5 Select [4 LOAD TEST] and press the Return

key. (See p.7-38)
6 Select [11 TILT TRAY MOTOR] and press the

Y key and Return key in order.
· The tilt tray will become horizontal.
Pulley
7 Turn the pulley by hand until the film tip hits

the pusher R guide section. R guide Film Pusher claws (2) Pulley
· The pusher claw returns to direction A when the
leading edge of the film makes contact with the lead-
ing edge of the R guide.
8 Observe the movement of the pusher claw.

<Regulated Value> Film Pusher claw
The two pusher claws should return
simultaneously.
A
• When the movement is not within the

Set screws (2) Set screws (2)
regulated range
1 Confirm which claw needs correction and in
which direction it needs to be corrected.
2 Remove the lower transport unit. (See p.2-19)

3 Loosen the two set screws of the pusher claw
and perform the correction.

3.3.4 Adjusting the tension of the front transport motor (M2) belt
1 Pull out the entrance transport section.

tensioner.
3 Press the push-pull gauge against the belt

tensioner.
4 Secure the two set screws when the push-pull

gauge indicates 500gf.
Push-pull gauge
Set screws (2)
Belt tensioner

3.3.5 Adjusting the tension of the film pusher motor (PM1) belt
1 Remove the lower transport unit. (See p.2-19)

2 Loosen the two set screws securing the film
pusher motor (PM1). Set screws (2)
3 Pull the film pusher motor (PM1) with the Push-pull gauge
push-pull gauge.
4 Secure the two set screws when the push-pull

gauge indicates 2kgf.
Film pusher motor

3.4 Checking and adjusting Exposure Section
3.4.1 Adjusting the nip pressure
If an irregularity occurs each time in the optical direction at approximately 15cm from the trailing edge of the film,
adjust the nip pressure.

maintenance PC and
DRYPRO".
2 Select [2 SETUP] from [MENU] and press the

Return key.
· [Setup menu] screen will be displayed.(See p.7-23)
3 Select [1 NIP PRESS SOL VALUE] and press

the Return key.
· [NIP PRESS SOL VALUE] menu will be dis-
played.(See p.7-24)
4 Press the ↓,↑ keys and move the highlighted

cursor to [NIP LO].
5 Use the ten keys to input the nip pressure.

· When inconsistencies occur within 15mm from the
trailing edge of the film, input a value that is 2%
smaller than the present value.
· When inconsistencies occur at a position higher than
15mm from the trailing edge of the film, input a
value that is 2% larger than the present value.
6 Press the Return key twice.

· Confirmation dialog will be displayed.
7 Press the Y key.

· The nip pressure low will be changed to the input
value.
8 Overwrite the changed nip pressure on the

control box cover.

• Hint for the adjusting

· The adjustment value ± 2% for Step 5 is a rough
standard. If any improvement cannot be made, adjust
the value at the range of 1 to a few %.
· The irregularity in pitch occurred around 15mm
from the end of the film cannot be erased completely.
This is because the end of the film printed in this
range is released from the lower nip rollers and is
free.

3.4.2 Cleaning the subscan unit

Follow the procedure below and clean the exposure section if copied stains attached onto the exposure section are
found on the output image.
• Cleaning the subscan unit

1 Open the left cover.
2 Remove the subscan unit.
3 Remove the four set screws and the shade Shade cover
cover. Set screws(4)
4 Wipe off the rubber roller with a dry cloth.

· The rubber roller can be cleaned while the subscan Rubber rollers
unit is being mounted on the main unit.
5 Wipe off the metallic roller with a dry cloth.

6 Confirm that no thread can be found on each
roller.
Metallic rollers

7 Wipe off the side facing the laser path of

guide plate by using lens paper. Guide plate
8 Wrap up the lens paper around the tip of a

screwdriver and wipe the inner side of the
guide plate.
9 Confirm that no threads can be found on the

guide plate.

3.4.3 Cleaning the laser mirror of the optical unit
1 Remove the two set screws and mirror cover

of the optical unit.
· A short or ratchet type screwdriver will be required
because the space for cleaning will be small.
2 Saturate whole lens paper with lens cleaner.
Set screws (2)

Mirror cover
3 Wipe off the mirror in optical direction by

changing the face of lens paper once at a
time.
IMPORTANT: Refrain from using the
same side of lens paper
twice or more. Dirt or dust-
might remain on the mirror.
· There are 1st and 2nd mirror. Wipe off the side 1st mirror (back)
where both mirrors are face to face (reflection side).
2nd mirror
(reflection side)

3.4.4 Checking the LD transmitter (PD signal)

The LD(laser diode) transmission can be checked indirectly by measuring the voltage of the PD(photo diode) signal
which is fed back from the optical unit.
• When problems like the image density going down gradually occur, by checking the PD signal periodically,
you can see whether the problem is caused by the reduction in the amount of laser light.
1 Be sure to wear laser protection goggles.

WARNING: Be sure to wear laser protection
goggles when working with a
LD transmitter jig. Laser light
may be transmitted out of the
device.
2 Check the left side of the device for safety.

• The cover of the subscan unit should be
attached.
• When the above cover is open for certain rea-
sons, people on the left side of the device
must wear laser protection goggles or move
away from the laser light path.
• No one other than those conducting the work
should be around the device.
DANGER: Perform the following proce-

dures after confirming that no
one is in the range (left side of
the device) of LD transmission.
If human eyes are exposed to
the laser light, it may lead to a
loss of eyesight.
• Connection
1 Press [Operation OFF] in the control panel
board and turn OFF the power of the main
unit.
2 Open the control box. (See p.2-116)

3 Set the DIPSW of the transmitter jig as

described below:
• [THROUGH], [CLK ON], and [LD PD
LD POWER HI CLK ON THROUGH
POWER] from the right to left should all be 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
set to [HI].
OFF
LD POWER LOW CLK OFF LD LD

MSB LSB G
4 Confirm that the power of the LD transmitter

jig is turned OFF, and connect the power
cable to AC power line.
5 Disconnect one connector(JP165) from the AC power line
relay mount panel, and connect it to the LD IF

connector of the LD transmitter jig.
6 Connect the PRINT CNT cable of the trans- 1

mitter jig to the relay mount panel.
LD IF
3 2
LD transmitter jig 4
3
To LD IF connector
• Checking transmission
1 Set the interlock release key.
2 Turn ON the power of the main unit and wait
until the initializing operation ends.
3 Turn ON the power of the LD transmitter jig.

DANGER: Laser is irradiated in the follow-
ing procedures, therefore, be
sure to wear laser protection
goggles. Also, reconfirm that
no one is in the range of LD
transmission.

4 Set the DIPSW on the right side of the LD

transmitter jig to [LD ON].
PD
5 Measure the voltage between test pins [G] LD POWER HI

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CLK ON THROUGH
DCV
and [PD] of the LD transmitter jig with a DC
range tester. OFF

MSB LSB G
<Regulated Value> 4V or above
IMPORTANT: In order to protect the cir-

cuits, the tester probe
should not make contact
with the LD transmitter jig
frame during the measure-
ment.
• When the value is not within regula-

tions
· The laser diode may be deteriorated. Refer to “Con-
firming LD Transmitter (IR Card) and Measuring the
Amount of Radiation” (See p.3-32), measure the
amount of the laser diode, and follow the given
instructions.
• Removing
1 Set the DIPSW on the right of the LD trans-
mitter jig to [THROUGH].
2 Turn OFF the power of the LD transmitter jig.

unit.
4 Re-connect the cables to their original posi-

tions.

3.4.5 Confirming LD radiation (IR card) and measuring the amount of radiation
By using an IR card, you can check the irradiation of the LD visually.
• Safety Check
WARNING: Be sure to wear laser protec-
tion goggles when working
with a LD transmitter jig. Laser
light may be transmitted out of
the device.
2 Check the left side of the device for safety.

• People on the left side of the device must
wear protection goggles or move away from
the laser light path.
DANGER: Perform the following proce-
dures after confirming that no
one is in the range (left side of
the device) of LD transmission.
If human eyes are exposed to
the laser light, it may lead to a
loss of eyesight.
• Connection of the LD transmitter jig

unit.

3 Set the DIPSW of the LD transmitter jig as
described below: PD
• [THROUGH], [CLK ON], and [LD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
POWER] from the right to left should all be
set to [HI]. OFF

MSB LSB G


cable to AC power line. AC power line
5 Disconnect the connecter (JP165) from the

relay mounting panel, and connect it to the LD
IF connector for the LD transmitter jig. 1
6 Connect the PRINT CNT cable of the LD LD IF

transmitter jig to the relay mounting panel.
3 2
3
To LD IF connector
7 Disconnect the VIDEO connector from the print

control board mounting panel, and connect it to
the BNC connector for the LD transmitter jig.
LD transmitter jig
• There are two BNC connectors on the print
control board: HD on the top and VIDEO on
the bottom.
8 Connect the maintenance PC to the main 2

unit. (See p.7-1)
BNC connector
• Checking the laser light

1 Remove the four set screws, and remove the
subscan section cover.

until initializing operation ends.
4 Start up the mechanical control maintenance

PC. (See p.7-3)
5 Select [4 LOAD TEST] from the [MENU] Cover

screen and press the Return key. (See p.7-38) Set screws (4)
6 Select [8 POLYGON MOTOR] and press the Y

key and the Return key in order.
• The polygon motor starts to rotate.


transmission.

• The laser light is irradiated in the subscan unit
direction.
9 Hold an IR card between the upper and lower

rollers of the subscan section.
IR card
10 Confirm that red linear laser light can be
observed on the IR card.
Laser light
• Measuring the amount of light using

a laser power meter
Continue the following procedure to measure the
amount of laser light.
1 Press the Return key.

• Wait for the polygon mirror to stop rotating.
After a few minutes, the polygon mirror will
stop rotating.
2 Find the laser light using the IR card.

• The laser light will irradiate as a spot as the
IR card
polygon mirror is stopped.
• The stop position of the polygon mirror can-
not be specified, therefore, the range of LD
transmission also cannot be specified.
3 If the laser light cannot be detected, press the Laser light

Enter key to rotate the polygon mirror.
4 Press the Enter key and stop the polygon mir-

ror as soon as it starts to rotate.
• If the rotation of the polygon mirror goes into
steady rotation, it will take 1 to 2 minutes to
stop rotating.

5 Repeat Steps 2 to 4 until the laser light is Within these ranges and toward the unit center
found.
IIMPORTANT: Confirm that the laser light
stops within the window of
the subscan unit and
toward the center of the
unit.
(The amount of light tends
to decrease as it moves to
the edge portion in the sub-
scan unit.)
6 Measure the amount of light by holding the

probe of the light power meter over the
searched laser light at the location approx. 30
cm away from the subscan unit.
<Regulated Value> 19mW or over
• Set the measurement wavelength of the light
power meter to 810nm. Probe
• The amount of light tends to decrease as the
light goes to the end of the optical direction.
Light power meter
Laser light
• In case of insufficient amount of

light.
• When the amount of light is 19mW or less,
replace the optical unit
IMPORTANT: 19mW is determined con-
sidering the measurement
precision of the light power
meter and the difference of
the amount of light that is
caused depending on the
measurement locations.
• Removing the LD transmitter jig


3 Press the start switch for five seconds or
longer and turn OFF the power of the main
unit.
4 Disconnect the maintenance PC.

tions.

• Safety Check
the device.
2 Confirm safety on the left and front sides of

the device.
• The cover of the subscan unit should be
attached.
• People around the device (left and front side)
must wear protection goggles, or move away
from the laser light path.
DANGER: Proceed to the following proce-

dure after confirming that no
one is in the range (left and
front sides of the device) of LD
transmission. If human eyes
are exposed to the laser light, it
may lead to a loss of eyesight.

1 Press [OPERATION OFF] in the control panel
unit.

described below. LD POWER HI CLK ON
PD
THROUGH
POWER] from the right to left should all be OFF

set to [HI]. LD POWER LOW CLK OFF ON LD
MSB LSB G


cable to AC power line. AC power line
5 Disconnect one connector (JP165) from the

relay mount panel, and connect it to the LD IF
connector of the LD transmitter jig.
1
6 Connect the PRINT CNT cable of the trans-
mitter jig to the relay mounting panel. LD IF
3 2
3
To LD IF connector
7 Disconnect the VIDEO connector from the

print control board mounting panel, and con-
nect it to the BNC connector for the LD trans-
LD transmitter jig
mitter jig.
the bottom.
2
8 Connect the maintenance PC to the device.
(See p.7-1)
1
• Checking the laser light
1 Remove the front transport unit.(See p.2-13)
BNC connector

2 Remove the three set screws (a), loosen the

three set screws (b), then remove the front
cover of the light shield.

until initializing operation ends.

PC. (See p.7-3)
Loosen set screws (b)
6 Select [4 LOAD TEST] from the [MENU] Set screws (a) (3)
screen and press the Return key. (See p.7- (3)
38)
Front laser shade lid

transmission.

• Laser scanning light will be irradiated.
10 Hold an IR card in front of the H-sync mirror of

the optical unit and confirm that laser light can
be seen.
• Checking the angle of the H-sync

mirror
1 Hold the IR card over the sensor section of
the H-sync circuit board.
<Regulated Value> IR card
LD light should impinge on the center of the sensor of
the H-sync circuit board.
Sensor

2 When the LD light is deviated from perfect

alignment upward or downward, loosen one
set screw of the H-sync mirror, and turn the
adjustment screw to adjust the angle of the H-
sync mirror.
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the reflecting H-sync mirror
side of the H-sync mirror.
• When adjusting upward, turn the adjusting
screw clockwise.
• When adjusting downward, turn the adjusting
screw counter-clockwise while pressing the
rear side of the H-sync mirror. Set screw
3 After adjusting, secure the set screw. Adjustment screw
• Removing the LD transimitter jig


longer to turn OFF the main unit.

tions.


Check the waveform of signals output from the H-sync circuit board using the oscilloscope.
• Safety Check
the device.
2 Confirm safety on the left and front sides of

the device.
• People around the device (left and front side)
must wear protection goggles, or move away
from the laser light path.
DANGER: Proceed to the following proce-
dure after confirming that no
one is in the range (left and
front sides of the device) of LD
transmission. If human eyes
are exposed to the laser light, it
may lead to a loss of eyesight.

1 Press [OPERATION OFF] in the control panel
unit.

described below. PD
POWER] from the right to left should all be
set to [HI]. OFF

MSB LSB G


cable to AC power line.
AC power line
5 Disconnect the connecter (JP165) from the
relay mounting panel, and connect it to the LD
IF connector for the LD transmitter jig.
1
6 Connect the PRINT CNT cable of the LD
transmitter jig to the relay mounting panel. LD IF
3 2
3
To LD IF connector
7 Disconnect the VIDEO connector from the

print control board mounting panel, and con-
nect it to the BNC connector for the LD trans-
mitter jig. LD transmitter jig

the bottom.
2
BNC connector

8 Connect a probe with a T-branch connector to

the oscilloscope.
9 Disconnect the HD connector from the print Oscilloscope

control board mounting panel, and connect it
to the T-branch connector of the oscilloscope.
10 Connect the T-branch connector to the HD

connector of the print control board mounting
HD connector
panel.
11 Connect the maintenance PC to the device. 1

(See p.7-1)
2
2
2
T-branch connector
• Checking the waveform

1 Select [4 LOAD TEST] from the [MENU]
screen and press the Return key. (See p.7-
38)


transmission.

• Laser scanning light will be irradiated.

5 Observe the waveform with the oscilloscope.

<Regulated Value>
A low active pulse should be output approx. every
1 msec.
• Waveforms sometimes cannot be clearly rec-
ognized (due to flickering waves) in some
oscilloscope settings. In such a case, stabilize
the waveform by adjusting the DIV, trigger
level, and brightness of the oscilloscope, and
check the pulse cycle.
approx. 1 msec
• If the oscilloscope has a delayed sweep func-

tion, set a delay of 1ms and check the stability
by enlarging the waveform.
• When the waveform cannot be seen

If the waveform cannot be seen even though LD is
being irradiated, the reason may be that the laser light
is not hitting the sensor of the H-sync circuit board.
Therefore, adjust the angle of the H-sync mirror. (See
p.3-39)
• Removing the LD transmiitter jig


longer to turn OFF the main unit.

tions.

3.5 Elevator Transport Section
3.5.1 Adjusting the open position of the nip

(See p.2-22)
· The nip of the elevator transport section will be
opened by turning the power OFF.

guide (lower).
Guide (lower)
Spring washer (2)

Set screws (2)
3 Check the distance between the guide plate

and nip roller (rubber roller).
<Regulated Value>
The nip roller should not extend out of the guide
plate.
IMPORTANT: Be careful neither scratch
nor stain the guide plate
when handling it.
GOOD NG
Nip roller

4 If the nip roller is not within the regulated

range, loosen the two set screws securing the Set screws (2)
nip roller motor (M4) and adjust the position of
the nip roller motor.
5 Return the elevator transport unit to the main

unit.

7 Select [1 UNIT TEST] from the [Menu] screen

and press the Return key.
8 Select [4 ELEVATOR TRANS UNIT TEST]

Nip roller motor (M4)
· The elevator transport section test screen will be dis-
played.
9 Press the INS key.

· The nip roller will be closed.
11 Confirm that ON is indicated for [Input] status

in the [Elevator Nip] indication.
• When OFF is indicated

2 Loosen the two set screws securing the nip
roller home position sensor (PS5) and move
the installation position to Direction A.
3 In the [4 ELEVATOR TRANS UNIT TEST], Nip roller home position sensor (PS5)
confirm that the status is ON when pressing
the F5 key, and OFF when pressing the F4
key. A
Set screws

3.5.2 Adjusting the belt tension

There are two belts in the Elevator Transport Section and both of them will be adjusted after removing the elevator
transport unit. (See p.2-22)
• Roller drive connection belt

1 Loosen the two set screws (a) securing the Set screws (a)(2)
belt tensioner.
Belt tensioner
· Loosen the above screws until the belt tensioner
moves smoothly.
2 Push the push-pull gauge against the belt.

3 When the push-pull gauge indicates the 500gf Push-pull gauge
mark, secure the two set screws (a) of the
belt tensioner.
Set screws (b)(4)
Elevator transport
drive motor
Own weight
• The belt on the motor side

1 Loosen the four set screws (b) until the eleva-
tor transport drive motor goes down by its
own weight.
2 Secure the four set screws (b).

3.6 Heat Processing (HPRO) Section
3.6.1 Adjusting the belt tension
When assembling the heat roller assembly, adjust the belt tension before installing the heat roller assembly to the
main unit.

tensioner. Belt tensioner
· Loosen the screws until the movement of the belt
tensioner becomes smooth.
2 Press a push-pull gauge on the center section

of the belt.
3 Press the belt in approximately 5mm and

when the push-pull gauge indicates 300 to
400gf, secure the two set screws of the belt
tensioner.
IMPORTANT: Apply TRI-FLOW on the pul- Push-pull gauge
ley shaft of the belt ten-
sioner when assembling
the heat roller assembly.

3.7 Checking and Adjusting Power Supply Section
3.7.1 Checking the DC power voltage
• Checking the DC power voltage for

those other than 24V DC
2 Open the left cover and set the interlock
release key.
· Refer to “1.6 How to use the Interlock Release Key”.
(See p.1-20)
3 Turn ON the power of the main unit.

4 Confirm the LED transmission on the power
I/F board.
· If each of the LED is ON, power voltage is supplied -5V -12V
P+12V +12V
to each section. +3.3V
· P+12V (2nd from the left) indicates the voltage sup-
P-12V +5V
plied from the DC power source (SUP5).
· P-12V (left end) indicates the voltage supplied from
the DC power source (SUP6).
· The other LED lamps indicate the voltage supplied
Test pin Power circuit board
from the PC power source (SUP10).
· The control box does not apply –5V power source. LED
· P+12V or P-12V is not supplied when the interlock
is disconnected.
· The old-type board (0451H1160B) does not have the
LED for checking. Check the voltage on the test pin
located directly above the LED with a tester.
• Checking the DC voltage for 24V DC

release key.

4 Use a tester and measure the voltage
between TP36 (PGND) and TP35 (24V) on
the mechanical control circuit board. (See
p.9-28)
<Regulated Value> +24V: +22.5V to +25.0V

3.7.2 Checking the AC power voltage
1 Pull out the power supply unit.(See p.2-34)

3 Measure the voltage between the TB 2 termi-
nals. 120V AC 24V AC
<Regulated Value> 24V AC: 24V AC±2V
<Regulated Value> 120V AC: 120V AC±12V
4 Check that the electrical leakage breaker

(SB2) is ON.
· The electrical leakage breaker going OFF repeatedly
indicates insulation abnormalities in the circuit to the
heat roller. Turn the power of the main unit OFF and
fix the problem.
TB2
Electrical leakage
breaker (SB2)
• When the voltage is not within regu-

lations
· Refer to the installation guidelines and check if the
setting of the terminal board for switching voltage is
appropriate for the power applied in the facility. If
not, change the wiring.
· If the setting of the terminal board for switching
voltage is appropriate, measure the power source
voltage of the facility. If the power source voltage is
abnormal, have it corrected by the facility adminis-
trator.
· If the setting of the terminal base for switching volt-
age and the power source voltage of the facility are
both appropriate, check the TB4 and later TBs
(transformer (PT1), etc.) in the main unit, and repair
or replace faulty sections.

3.7.3 VR adjustment of DC power voltage (3.3V/5V)

2 Connect the lead of the tester to the test ter-
minal of the power I/F board.
· +5V: TP3(+5V) - TP8(DGND)
+3.3V: TP1(+3.3V) - TP8(DGND)
+12V: TP3(+12V) - TP8(DGND)
-12V: TP3(-12V) - TP8(DGND)

+5V
4 Turn ON the power of the main unit. +3.3V
5 Adjust the VR in PC power supply (SUP 10).

· The right hole: For 5V adjustment
· The center hole: For 3.3V adjustment
· The left hole: Not used (no VR)
· +12V, -12V cannot be adjusted.
<Regulated Value>
+5V: 5.05V to 5.15V
+3.3V: 3.30V to 3.40V PC power supply
+12V: +11.5V to +13.5V (SUP10)
-12V: -11.5V to –13.5V

3.7.4 VR adjustment of DC power (±12V/+24V)

3 Remove the nine set screws and pull down
the power supply panel.
4 Open the left cover and set the interlock Power supply panel
release key.
Set screws (9)
· Refer to “1.6 How to use the Interlock Release Key”.
(See p.1-20)
5 Connect the lead of the tester to the test ter-

minal of the mechanical control circuit board.
(See p.9-29) -12V
· +12V: TP31(+12V) - TP32(AGND)
-12V: TP33(-12V) - TP32(AGND)
SUP5
+24V: TP35(+24V) - TP36(PGND)
6 Turn ON the power of the main unit. +12V
7 Adjust the VR in the corresponding power

supply.
· +24V : VR1 in SUP4.
· +12V : VR1 in SUP5. SUP6 +24V
· -12 V : VR1 in SUP6. SUP4
<Regulated Value>
+24V: 22.5V to 25.0V
+12V: +11.5V to +12.5V
-12V: -11.5V to –12.5V

3.7.5 Descriptions on the control box cover

On the control box cover, the labels on which the factory-shipped settings and the version are described, are affixed.
When those descriptions are changed due to upgrading or replacing the unit, indicate the changed information on the
blank fields.
• Descriptions
1 10
2
3
4 11
5
12
6
13
7
8 14
9
1 Lot number for the HPRO power circuit board 8 Nip pressure value
and HPRO CPU circuit board
9 Corrected value of the densitometer
2 Lot number for the heat roller
10 Version of the main software
3 Serial number for DRYPRO 722
11 Version of the mechanical control software (firm-
4 Serial number for the subscan unit ware)
5 Serial number for the optical unit 12 Version of the print control board
6 Correction values for pitch irregularity and 13 Version of the ROM on the control section
left/right density irregularity.
14 Version of the HPRO software
7 Starting point for writing images

3.8 Checking and Adjusting Sorter
3.8.1 Checking AC power voltage

(lower).
2 Turn the power of the DRYPRO 722 ON.

3 Measure the voltage between the terminals of
relay (X1) in the sorter electrical control sec-
tion.
<Regulated Value> 120V AC: 120V AC + 12V
• When the voltage is outside the regulated value
· Pull the power supply unit of the DRYPRO 722, and
check the AC voltage of terminal TB2. If the power
supply voltage of the DRYPRO 722 is normal, check
the connecting cable and the connector between TB2 120V AC
and the sorter, and repair or replace the defective
parts.
· If the power supply voltage of the DRYPRO 722 is
abnormal, refer to "3.7.2 Checking the AC power
voltage" to deal with it.
AC relay

3.8.2 Adjusting DC power voltage (5V / 12V)

(lower).
2 Pull the sorter electrical control section.

• Adjusting 5V DC
Sorter drive board
1 Connect the leads of the tester to the test ter-
minals on the sorter drive board.
· TP5 (+5V) - TP6 (GND)

3 Check the DC power voltage. TP6(GND) TP5(+5V)
<Regulated Value> +5.05V to 5.15V
4 If the voltage is outside of the regulated value,

adjust VR on the 5V DC power supply (SUP2) Volume
with a Phillips screwdriver. SUP2
Phillips screw driver
• Adjusting 12V DC
1 Connect the leads of the tester to the termi-
nals on the AC relay.
· Terminal 8 (+12V) - Terminal 4 (GND)

3 Check the DC power voltage.
<Regulated Value> 11.5V to 12.5V
AC relay
4 If the voltage is outside of the regulated value,
follow the procedure on the next page to
12V DC
adjust VR on the 12V DC power supply
(SUP1).

5 Tilt the sorter electrical control section toward

you, and remove the set screw (right side) Set screw
securing the 12V DC power supply (SUP1). SUP1
6 Loosen the set screw (left side), and detach

the 12V DC power supply from the electrical
control section.
7 Move the 12V DC power supply until the

screwdriver can be inserted into the hole of Loosen the set screw.
the volume.
8 Adjust the VR on the 12V DC power supply

with a Phillips screwdriver. Volume
SUP1
Phillips screwdriver

3.8.3 Adjusting the voltage of the jam detection sensor

When replacing the jam detection sensor or the sorter drive board, adjust the voltage of the jam detection sensor.

(lower).
2 Open the entrance guide of the sorter, and

drop one sheet of clear film.
3 Connect the maintenance PC to the DRYPRO

722, and start up the mechanical control
maintenance PC. (See p.7-1.)
IMPORTANT: In order to protect the cir-
cuit boards and the hard
disk, be sure to follow the
procedure in "7.1.1 Con-
necting maintenance PC
and DRYPRO" to connect
them.
4 Select [1 UNIT TEST], then [6 SORTER

TEST] from the menu screen.
· [SORTER TEST] screen appears.

· [ON] is displayed on the next to [ALL SENS].
6 Place the minus lead of the tester on TP2 of Sorter drive board
the sorter volume board, and the plus lead on
TP12, and measure the DC voltage.
· The sorter volume board is mounted on the sorter
drive board.
<Regulated Value> 2.8V or less
Sorter volume board
7 If the measured voltage is outside the regu- TP2
(GND) VR9
lated value, adjust VR9 so that the voltage is TP12
within the regulated one.
· Terminal 8 (+12V) - Terminal 4 (GND)

3.8.4 Adjusting belt tension

When replacing the sorter drive motor, or when detaching the sorter drive belt, adjust the tension of the sorter drive
belt.
1 Remove the sorter front cover.

2 Open the front door.
protective cover (front).
Set screws (4)
Protective cover
4 Loosen the two set screws on the belt ten-

sioner
5 Adjust the belt tensioner by pulling part A of

the belt shown in the figure on the right with
the push-pull gauge.
<Regulated Value> The push-pull gauge should
indicate 300g + 100g when
pulling the belt 5mm.
5mm
A
300g 100g
Push-pull gauge
Set screws (2)
Belt tensioner

3.9 Correcting Images
3.9.1 Correcting irregularities in pitch and density of left and right sides
The default value or previously-set value of this setting is indicated on the cover of the control box. If the value is
modified in this procedure or later procedures, rewrite the value on the control box cover. (See p.3-55)
1 Touch "OFF LINE" on the upper-left corner of

MAINTENANCE MENU screen for 3 seconds
or more.
· SERVICE 1/4 screen appears.
2 Touch [SET] on the right of [CORRECT].

· The [CORRECT] screen will be displayed.
3 Touch [ST16D], [PRINT] in order and print out

a flat pattern in order to check the state of the
present image.
· A flat pattern can be output by selecting the supply
tray in the CHANGE PRINT screen.
Check the pitch irregularities and left/right density
gap in the present image.

• Correcting pitch irregularities

1 Touch [ST16A], [PRINT] in order.
· A pitch irregularity test pattern that is divided into 16
steps (levels) of density will be printed by selecting
supply tray in the CORRECT PRINT screen.
· This test pattern will be printed in the value indicated
on the right side of [TEST GAIN] (default value or
the value set in the previous adjustment).
· If the pitch irregularity is hard to discriminate, touch
or on the right side of [TEST GAIN] to
increase the TEST GAIN value, then print again.
2 Orient the film so that its notch comes to the RIGHT

lower left corner, and hang it on the light box.
08
3 In the right, center, and left sections of the 00
01
02 09
film, find the step number which has the least 03
04
pitch irregularity (in the subscan direction) in 05
10
06
each of the three sections. 07 11
08
· Exp. Right : 9, Center : 15, Left : 14 09
10
4 Set the step number found in the above pro- 11
12
cedure on the right side of [PHASE]. 13
14
· Select [RIGHT], [CENTER], and [LEFT], then use 15
the and keys to input the step number in which CENTER

pitch irregularity was least noticed. LEFT
13
Notch 12
5 Touch [ST16B], [PRINT] in order. 13
14
· A pitch irregularity test pattern that reflects the set
15
results of [PHASE] will be printed by selecting sup- 14
ply tray in the CORRECT PRINT screen.
· In the right, center, and left sections of the film, find 15
the step number which has the least pitch irregularity
in the three sections as in Step 3.
6 Set the step number found in Step 4 on the

right side of [GAIN].
7 Touch [ST16D], [PRINT] in order and print out

a flat pattern in order to check the irregularity.
· The flat pattern will be printed by selecting supply
tray in the CORRECT PRINT screen. Confirm that
the pitch irregularity has been improved.

• Correcting the irregularity in density

of the left and right sides
1 When it is possible to use the 14 X 14 inch
film, rotate it 90 degrees and set it on the tray.
· Due to the manufacturing problem, the differential of
the sensitivity on the film toward the optical unit
(right and left of image) direction might occur. By
rotating the 14 X 14 inch film 90 degrees, it is possi-
ble to use the subscan unit direction, which has less
differential of the sensitivity as the standard.
2 Touch [ST16C], [PRINT] in order.

· A pitch irregularity test pattern that is divided into 16
steps (levels) of density will be printed by selecting
the tray containing the film that was set in the above
procedure in the CORRECT PRINT screen.
3 In the right, center, and left sections of the 00

film, find the step number which has the least 01
02
density gap in each of the three sections. 03
04
· Right : 12, Left : 15 in the example on the right. 05
06
4 Set the step number found in the above pro- 07

08
09
cedure on the right side of [OFFSET]. 10
11
· Select [RIGHT], [CENTER], and [LEFT], then use 12
the and keys to input the step number in which 13
14
the density gap was least noticed. 15
· Change in the value made in [CENTER] of [OFF- RIGHT
SET] will be neglected. Please leave the value as 10
“0”.
11
5 Touch [ST16D], [PRINT] in order and print out 12
a flat pattern in order to check the density
gap. LEFT 13
· A flat pattern can be output by selecting the supply 12
tray in the CORRECT PRINT screen. 13
14
15
6 Using the densitometer, measure the density

differences between right and center of the
film, and left and center of the film.
· Confirm that the irregularity in density is within the
regulated value.
<Regulated Value>
Irregularity in density of the right and center, left
and center of a film: less than 0.15
IMPORTANT: Be sure to print out a test
pattern after correcting the
value of either [TEST
GAIN], [PHASE], [GAIN], or
[OFFSET].

• Correcting irregularity in density by

entering a correction value only
For the precious correction procedures, test patterns
must be printed out and checked visually in order to
apply correct values. However, if the correction value is
known in advance, it can be applied without printing a
test pattern.
· If you cannot restore the previous data for some rea-
sons after replacing the hard disk, enter the values
indicated on the control box cover.
1 Touch [SET] on the right side of [CORRECT]

in the SERVICE 1/4 screen and display the
CORRECT screen.
2 Touch the [PARAMETER SET] key.

· The [PARAMETER SET] screen will be displayed.
3 Touch the box of each correction value, then

change the value with .or .
· “0” is always displayed under [CENTER] for [OFF-
SET].
4 Touch the [SET] key.

5 Touch the [EXIT] key.
· The screen will return to the SERVICE 1/4 screen.

6 Touch [SET] on the right side of [TEST PAT-

TERN].
· The [TEST PATTERN] screen will appear.
7 Touch [FLAT DENSITY].

8 Use the ten-key and set a density of 1200 to
1500.
9 Touch [PRINT].
· The flat pattern will be printed in the density set in
Step 8 by selecting supply tray in the TEST PAT-
TERN PRINT screen.
10 Confirm that the irregularity in density is

within the regulated value.

3.9.2 Stopping the time-changing density correction control

In order to prevent the amount of exposure from decreasing due to the temperature rise in AOM, the control to in-
crease the amount of exposure at the rate of 0.1D every 10 hours is performed in normal condition.
This control can be stopped if the degree of temperature rise is not significant due to processing only a small number
of films, etc. and the image density become too light as time goes by. The control that was stopped can be restarted.
• Stopping the control

1 Connect the maintenance PC to the HUB in
the network. (See p.7-51)
2 Log in to the main unit (DRYPRO 722) by

using telnet.(See p.9-7)
3 Move the current directory to /home/Cor-

# cd /home/CorrectLut
rectLut.
# touch stop.txt
4 Input “touch stop.txt”. # lo
5 Log out from the main unit and close telnet.

6 Turn OFF the power of the main unit by touch-
ing [OPERATION OFF] in the control panel
board, then turn the power ON again and
restart the main unit.
7 Display the MAINTENANCE screen in the

control panel board and print out a calibration
pattern by touching [CALIBRATION].
• Restarting the control

1 Set the present time of the main unit by the
operation panel.
2 Connect the maintenance PC to the HUB in

the network.(See p.7-51)

using telnet.(See p.9-7)
4 Move the current directory to /home/Cor-

# cd /home/CorrectLut
rectLut.
# rm stop.txt
5 Input “rm stop.txt”. # lo


7 Advance the time set in the main unit two
hours ahead.
· After switching the unit OFF, more than 1 hour must
pass until restart. Otherwise, the densitometer cor-
rection value cannot be cleared at 0. That is why this
operation is required.
8 Turn OFF the power of the main unit by touch-

ing [OPERATION OFF] in the control panel
board, then turn the power ON again and
restart the main unit.
9 Switch OFF the main unit and restart it.

3.9.3 Correction of the densitometer

This section explains how to read the step tablet with a built-in densitometer, and match the readout to the density
value indicated on the step tablet.
• Making a step tablet piece

Make a step tablet piece by using unnecessary film in
order to pass the step tablet (T-98A) through the built-in
densitometer easily.
1 Cut the film to about letter size.

· You can use the film without cutting it. However,
cutting it to about letter size makes it easier to handle
and carry it.
2 Cut the film on its corner so that the cutting

matches the size of the step tablet.
3 Fill the end of the step tablet (for both sides)

with the lower density about 5 mm with a
black magic marker or others. Letter size
4 Place the step tablet on the cutting.

· Orient the step tablet so that its end with the lower Orient the step tablet so that
density points to the corner. its end with the lower density
points to the corner.
5 Secure the step tablet to the film by pasting a Same size as the
tape on both sides. step tablet
· Paste the step tablet securely so that it does not curl
during transport.
· Be careful not to tape the wedge portion of the step
tablet.
Fill the end about 5 mm

with a black magic maker
or others.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TABLET
STEP Secure the step tablet
Konica to the film from both sides.
IMPORTANT: In order to prevent the

wedge portion of the step
tablet from being smudged
or damaged, use a card-
board and cover the wedge
portion when the step tab-
let is not being used.

• Reading the step tablet

maintenance PC and
DRYPRO".
2 Open the left cover, and set the interlock

release key.
3 Open the top cover and the filter case.

4 Select [4 LOAD TEST] from the menu screen,
and press the Return key. (See p.7-38)
5 Select [1 DISCHARGE MOTOR], and press

the Y key.
6 Select [4 HEAT ROLLER MOTOR] , and

press the Y key.
7 Press the Return key.

· The heat roller motor (M19) and the discharge motor
(PM3) will start rotating.
8 Hold the step tablet so that the wedge portion

is faced down, then insert the step tablet Insert the step tablet piece
piece from the entrance of the cooling sec- with wedge portion facing down.
Densitometer
tion.
entrance film sensor
· The step tablet piece is pulled by the rotating roller, (PS8)
then passed through the densitometer, and dis-
charged.
· The step tablet piece starts being read in 1.6 seconds
after it passes the densitometer entrance sensor
(PS8).
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the wedge
White mark
portion of the step tablet
piece goes through the
center (marked white) of
the densitometer.
Densitometer
Wedge portion (rear)

of the step tablet

• Executing the densitometer correc-

tion program
Correct the values that are read with the built-in densito-
meter by corresponding the readout to the density val-
ues on the step tablet.
1 Input the number of steps, and the density

value of each step multiplied by 10,000 on the Number of steps for the step
read step tablet using Notepad of Windows. 19 tablet
2 Name the above file "ndens.dat", and save it 2500

4200
Density value of step 1 multiplied
by 10,000
as a text file. Density value of step 2 multiplied
6100
3 Connect the maintenance PC to the hub in •
by 10,000
the network.(See p.7-51) •

• Density value of step 18 multi-
36100 plied by 10,000
38300 Density value of step 19 multi-

plied by 10,000

using ftp. (See p.9-9)
5 Switch the ftp transfer mode to the ascii

ftp> ascii
mode.
200 Type set to A.
6 Move the current directory to /home/DensMe- ftp> cd /home/DensMeter
ter. 250 CWD command successful
7 Send the file (ndens.dat) saved in Step 2 to ftp> put ndens.dat
the main unit. 200 PORT command successful
· When the file is sent, the size and transfer rate of the 150 Opening ASCII mode data
file will be indicated. connect..
226 Transfer complete.
8 Log out from the main unit and close ftp. 137 bytes sent in 0.00Seconds.....
ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
9 Log into the main unit by using telnet. (See

p.9-7)
10 Move the current directory to /home/DensMe- # cd /home/DensMeter

ter.
# ./dmeter
11 Input the commands on the right and activate
the density correction program.
· The densitometer correction program will start and
the prompt for selecting the menu will appear.
· If the command was input incorrectly, close the pro-
gram by pressing the C key while pressing the Con-
trol key, then restart the density correction program.

12 Press the “3” key and Enter key in the menu <Select menu>
selection prompt of the density correction pro- [1]:Read 1point_data .
gram. [2]:Make caliblation_LUT
· A prompt requesting the input of the correction data [3]:Make caliblation data.
file name will appear. ===>3
13 Input “hosei.dat” and press the Enter key. Input file name of convert_data of
· A prompt for selecting the retrieving destination of Dens meter.=> hosei.dat
the densitometer data will appear.
14 Press the “1” key and Enter key. <Select where do you get from sensor
· A prompt confirming the retrieval of the data read by data>
the densitometer will appear. [1]:From dens meter
[2]:From file(sorce of
===> 1
15 Press the “s” key and Enter key. Input ‘s’key to read source of
· Data read by the densitometer and accumulated in
the memory of the DENS I/F circuit board will be sensor data from dens meter.==> s
sent to the main unit. Dens data read success!
· A prompt inquiring whether or not to save the sent
data as a file will appear.
16 Press the “n” key and Enter key. Do you file source of sensor data?
· A prompt inquiring the name of the file in which the
[y/n] n
density value of the step tablet is written will appear.
17 Input “ndens.dat” and press the Enter key. Input file name of
· “ndens.dat” is the file sent in Step 3.
· A prompt inquiring whether or not to perform a cal-
patch_dens_data.===> ndens.dat
culation that conforms the value read out by the den-
sitometer with the density value of the step tablet
will appear.
18 Press the “y” key and Enter key. Do you file calculated data?
· A prompt inquiring the name of the density correc-
tion data file in which the calculation was performed [y/n] y
will appear.

19 Input “nhosei” and press the Enter key. Input file name of calculated
· The density correction data before and after the cal- data?===> nhosei
culation will appear along with the actual value read
by the densitometer, etc. Old calib data of sensor=
· The two lines on the top indicate the former and New calib data of sensor=
present values inclination (a) and offset (b) of the [OLD] [NEW] [SENS] [PATCHDENS]
primary equation used in the calculation for density 2609 1973 186 2200
correction.
4514 3877 340 3900
· The values under [OLD] indicate the former correc-
6476 5838 515 6800
tion values.
• • • •
· The values under [NEW] indicate the present correc-
• • • •
tion values.
• • • •
· The values under [SENS] indicate the data read out
by the densitometer. 8582 37934 3251 383880
· The values under [PATCHDENS] indicate the den-
sity values of the step tablet input in Step 2. These Do you remake the environment file to
values become the target values. New calib data of sensor?[y/n]
· A prompt inquiring whether or not to rewrite the cor-
rection file to the new value will appear.
20 Compare the density values indicated under

[NEW] and [PATCHDENS].
· Confirm that the difference in the values are within
±500.
21 Press the “y” key and Enter key. Do you remake the environment file
22 Activate the killp script. to New calib data of sensor?
[y/n] y
23 Activate the CreateCheckFile script.
# killp
24 Activate the shutdown command and shut
# CreateCheckFile
down the main unit.
# shutdown -fb
# lo

26 After approximately one minute, press the
start switch of the main unit for five seconds
or longer and turn OFF the power.
27 Turn ON the power and activate the main unit.

28 Indicate the MAINTENANCE screen in the

3.9.4 Correcting the densitometer correction file
The following procedures are for adjusting the features

of the built-in densitometer in the main unit (DRYPRO
722) to the features of the facility’s densitometer.
In the densitometer correction file, gradient "a" and off-

set value "b" (Function: y = ax + b) are recorded.
The procedure for correcting the densitometer correc-

tion file varies depending on the version of the main
software.
• For Ver1.1 or later versions
Rewrite the contents by activating the telnet [Densi-
tochange] script.
• Checking the densitometer correc-
tion value
1 Connect the maintenance PC to the network

hub. (See p.7-51)
2 Log into the main unit (DRYPRO 722) using

ftp. (See p.9-9)

mode. ftp> ascii
4 Move the current directory to /home/kil8/envi- 200 Type set to A.

ftp> cd /home/ki18/environments
ronments.
250 CWD command successful
5 Transfer the densitometer correction file ftp> get d201b.ini
(d201b.ini) from the main unit to the mainte-
200 PORT command successful
nance PC.
150 Opening ASCII mode data.........
12 bytes received in 0.00...........
6 Open the “d201b.ini” file from Notepad of

11876, 65244
Windows, etc., and confirm that the values
are the same as “a=” and “b=” of the densito-
meter correction values indicated in the con- a b
trol box. (See p.3-55)
7 Activate a shutdown command and shut down

the system.
• Obtaining a new densitometer cor-

rection value

1 For Ver1.03, print out an SMPTE pattern from

Printlink or Regiius. For Ver1.10, print out an SMPTE pattern (14 x 14 inch)
SMPTE pattern by touching [SMPTE] in the
TEST PATTERN screen of the control panel
board.
2 Measure both the left and right sides of all 16

step wedges located in the center of the
SMPTE pattern with the facility densitometer,
and obtain the average value.
· As the density on the left and right sides of films var-
ies, the average value of the wedges should be
obtained to reduce the effects caused by the varia-
tions.
3 Display the maintenance screen in the control

panel board, and print out calibration patterns
by touching [CALIBRATION].
Measure all the 16 step wedges for each
of the right and left at the center of the
SMPTE pattern, and average them.
4 Measure the 1st and 38th levels in the calibra-

tion pattern using the facility densitometer,
then check the Dmin and Dmax values of the
film.
5 Create the chart on the right and write in the

values obtained in Step 2 under Measured Target Measured
Difference
Density Density
Density for each step.
Step1 0.20 0.26 +0.06
· Write in the average value of the left and right sides.
Step2 0.39 0.49 +0.07
6 Write in the minimum and maximum values in Step3 0.57 0.68 +0.11
Step 1 and Step 16 under Target Density.
Step4 0.76 0.88 +0.12
· Set the Target Density for Step 1 and Step 16 within
the Dmin and Dmax measured in Step 4. Step5 0.95 1.09 -0.14
Step6 1.13 1.30 +0.17
Step7 1.32 1.52 +0.20
Step8 1.51 1.73 +0.22
Step9 1.69 1.92 +0.23
Step10 1.88 2.12 +0.24
Step11 2.07 2.31 +0.24
Step12 2.25 2.52 +0.27
Step13 2.44 2.70 +0.26
Step14 2.63 2.88 +0.25
Step15 2.81 3.04 +0.23
Step16 3.00 3.06 +0.06

7 Follow the procedures below to obtain new

densitometer correction values [a new] and
[bnew].
(1) Determine α from the equation below and
obtain [a new].
A2 – A1
α = -------------------------------------------------------------
2 ( A2 – A1 ) – ( B2 – B1 )
A1: step2 target density A2: step14 target den-

sity
B1: step2 measured density B2: step14 mea-
sured density
a new = α × a
a: first value in d201b.ini file
(2) Determine B from the equation below.

When b>32768: B = b – 65536
When b<32768: B = b
b: Second value in d201b.ini file
* Continue calculation even when B becomes a
minus figure.
(3) Obtain [b new] from the following equation.
B new=B+B(α-1)+1000(A1-α(2×A1-B1))
(4) Determine [b new] from the following equa-

tion.
When B new<0: b new = 65536 + B new
When B new0≥: b new = B new

• For Ver1.1 or later versions

1 Log into the main unit using telnet.
(See p.9-7)
2 Activate the DensitoChange script. # DensitoChange

· A message requesting the input of correction value
“a” will appear. 1) As for Densitometer parameter A
value?
3 Input the value of the new densitometer cor- now value :[11876]
rection value [a new] and press the Enter key. Enter 1-65535, (Q:Cancel) > 11632
· [65244] is changed to [65427] in the example on the
right. 2) As for Densitometer parameter B
· A message requesting to input correction value “b” value?
will appear. now value :[65244]
4 Input the value of the new densitometer cor- Enter 1-65535, (Q:Cancel) > 65427
rection value [b new] and press the Enter key.
· [11876] is changed to [11632] in the example on the 3) Will I be allowed to change it?
right. Densitometer parameter A value
· A message requesting to check the changes will :[11632]
appear. Densitometer parameter B value
:[65427]
It is changed. = 1
Select Cancel = Q
Enter 1 or Q >1
5 After checking the displayed changed value,

press the “1” key and Enter key if the value is
correct.
· In order to correct the displayed changed value, press
the “Q” key and Enter key, and return to the proce-
dures from Step 2.
6 Activate the killp script.

# killp
7 Activate the CreateCheckFile script. # CreateCheckFile
8 Activate the shutdown command and shut # shutdown -fb
down the system.
# lo


11 Rewrite the [Densitometer Correction Value]

indicated on the control box cover.
(See p.3-55)

13 Indicate the MAINTENANCE screen in the

3.9.5 Correcting the start position for writing images

Correct the starting coordinates for writing images in the optical and subscan directions on the film by rewriting the
input start position file (d003.ini).
1 Connect the maintenance PC to the hub in


ftp. (See p.9-9)

ftp> ascii
mode.
200 Type set to A.
4 Move the current directory to /home/kil8/envi- ftp> cd /home/ki18/environments
ronments. 250 CWD command successful
5 Transfer the input start position file (d003.ini) ftp> get d003.ini
from the main unit to the maintenance PC. 200 PORT command successful
150 Opening ASCII mode data .......
23 bytes received in 0.00..........
6 Open the “d003.ini” file from Notepad of Win-

dows, etc., and confirm that the values of 375, 88
[Horizontal position] and [Vertical position] are 0X0000, 0X0000
those indicated in the control box cover. (See
p.3-55)
Horizontal position Vartical positon
(Starting point in the optical (Starting point in the sub-
direction) scan direction)
7 Change the file by obtaining a new start posi-

tion in a unit of 0.04mm.
· In the example on the right, [355, 88] is input for
moving the input start position 0.8mm to the left.
· A figure in minus cannot be input.
8 Send the corrected file (d003.ini) to the main

unit. ftp> put d003.ini
9 Log out from the main unit and close ftp. 200 PORT command successful
150 Opening ASCII mode data ......
10 Log into the main unit using ftp. (See p.9-9) 226 Transfer complete.
23 bytes sent in 0.00.............
ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.

11 Activate the killp script. # killp

12 Activate the CreateCheckFile script. # CreateCheckFile
13 Activate the shutdown command and shut

# shutdown -fb
down the system. # lo

16 Re-write the "horizontal position" value and

the "vertical position" value indicated on the
control box cover. (See p.3-55)

Blank Page
Chapter 4
Error Codes and Remedies
4.1 Types of Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2 Remedies for F6000 and F6001 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3 Main Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3.1 Error Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3.2 Errors that can be remedied on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.4 Mechanical Control Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.4.1 Errors related to the main communication (007 - 013 / E4Fx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.4.2 Errors related to the outer cover (203 - 209 / E4A4x). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.4.3 Errors related to ROM/RAM (052 - 067 / F4A30 - F4234) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.4.4 Errors related to DownLoad (069 - 072 / F4A36 - F4A39) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.4.5 Errors related to the supply section (101 - 128 / E4110 - E4227) . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
(135 - 149 / E4310 - E4531). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.4.7 Errors related to the elevator transport section (152 - 156 / E4610 - E4621). . 4-29
4.4.8 Errors related to the heat adjustment of the HPRO section
(169 - 176 / E3000 - E3007). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
(177 - 182 / E4710 - E4810). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
(220 - 323 / E4A3A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.4.11 Errors related to MS-DOS (501 - 597) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.5 Troubles with Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.5.1 Troubles with print image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.5.2 Scratched or stained films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.6 Troubles with Film Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.7 Troubles Related to Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.8 Other Troubles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Blank Page
4.1 Types of Error Codes
Error codes are indicated by five alphanumerical characters. The error type can be recognized by the 2nd digit.
1st Digit 2nd Digit Contents Type Page Reference
C, E, F B, C Error related to the main software. Main Errors p.4-3
D Error related to DICOM.
E, F 4 Error related to the mechanical control in Mechanical Con- p.4-14

general. trol Errors
E 3 Error related to heat adjustment of the

HPRO section.
F 6 Error disabling the main CPU circuit F6000 Errors p.4-2

board operation.
• The generated errors are recorded in the error log file on the hard disk. (Only when the main CPU circuit
board is operating normally.)
• [ERROR RESET] key is displayed in the control panel section when an error of which the 1st digit is “E”
occurs.
• A code in which the 1st digit is "1" is not an error, but indicates the logging of a start-up or ending process.
• Types of Main Errors

• For a main error, the process in which the error occurred can be determined to a certain extent from the 2nd
and 3rd digits of the error code. When multiple errors occurred simultaneously, however, the error status may
not be indicated accurately.
2nd Digit 3rd Digit Process
B 0 or 1 Connection Management Process (ConnectionMngd)
2 or 3 DICOM Printer Server Process (DicomServer)
4 or 5 Output Queue Management Process (QueueMngd)
6 or 7 Mechanical Control I/F Process (MecIfd)
8 or 9 Densitometer Control I/F Process (BrightIfd)
A or B Printer Control I/F Process (PrintIfd)
C or D PCI Interrupt Sensing Process (PCI_Intd)
E or F Memory Management Process (QueueMngd)
C 0 or 1 Operation Management I/F Process (OpeIfd)
4 or 5 Maintenance Management Process (TCP/IP)(MenteIfd)
6 or 7 DICOM N-EVENT Report Process (NeventMng)
8 or 9 Test Print Process (TestPrintMngd)
A or B Common Function
CAUTION: Do not shut down the main DRYPRO unit forcefully at time other than a generation of an F
error. Please be sure to remind users of this CAUTION. If a maintenance PC is being used,
do not force a shutdown within two minutes after activating DRYPRO. (If a shutdown is
forced while activating the hard disk, the data in the hard disk will become abnormal, and
the main DRYPRO unit may not start up.)

4.2 Remedies for F6000 and F6001 Errors
• Cause of the errors
“F6000” and “F6001” are errors indicated on the control panel unit when a response is not received from the
main CPU circuit board.
• "F6000" is indicated in the "KONICA" screen when DRYPRO is being activated.
• "F6001" is indicated in the normal screen after DRYPRO is activated.
The main reason for the error can be the main CPU circuit board itself and/or the connected device.
• Remedies
Perform the steps below until the error does not occur.
Step Items to Check Cause Remedy
1. Check whether the following outer covers An outer cover is open. Close all outer covers
are opened or closed. that are open.
• Front cover, lower cover, left cover, HPRO
cover All covers are closed. Proceed to Step 2.
2. Perform one of the following steps and Only the fan stops. No Proceed to Step 3.
check the sound of shutter of the supply sound of the shutter closing
section opening and closing when the unit / opening.
has been shut down.
• Touch the [OPERATION OFF] key on the A sound of the shutter clos- Proceed to Step 4.
control panel. ing / opening is heard.
• If the above operation cannot be executed,
press the start switch for 5 seconds or
more. (Forcible Shutdown)
3. Connect a maintenance PC, run the The dog does not push the Adjust the interlock
mechanical control software, and specify interlock switch even when switch and the mounting
the abnormal interlock switch. the cover is closed. position of the dog.
No responses even when 1) Check the connection

pushing the interlock switch of the connector
directly. between the interlock
switch and mechani-
cal control circuit
board.
2) Replace the interlock
switch.
4. Perform the following steps and see if the The error is repeated or the • Replace the hard disk.
error still occurs. device does not start up. (See p.2-119)
1) Open the control box. (See p.2-116) • Replacing the main
2) Wrap a grounding strap around your CPU circuit board.
wrist. (See p.2-121)
3) Extract and insert the main CPU circuit • Replacing the print
board and print control board. control board.
4) Extract and circuit insert the connectors (See p.2-123)
of the main CPU circuit board and print • Replacing the mechani-
control board. cal control circuit
5) Return the control box to its original board. (See p.2-118)
position. • Replacing the control
6) Check the connections of the connectors panel board.
between the main CPU circuit board, (See p.2-35)
mechanical control circuit board, and
control panel control board.

4.3 Main Errors
4.3.1 Error Code List
• Error codes marked with an asterisk (*) in the following tables are not displayed on the control panel, but are
recorded in the error log.
• Perform the remedies in "4.3.2 Errors that can be remedied on site" (See p.4-11) when an error marked "S"
occurs.
• For error codes that are not marked "S", or for errors that reoccur even after performing the remedies, collect the
error log and have it analyzed by KONICA MI Development. (See p.7-58)
Error Code Error Display Error Code Error Display Error Code Error Display
Character String Character String Character String
CB015 DICOM server over CC00B* Undefined com- DB203* S Socket receive err
16 mand code:Serial
DB204* S Memory alloc err
CB016 S SCU IP Address CC00C* Message length
err:Serial DB205* S Receive data err
check
CC00D* Retry over:Serial DB209* Message receive err
CB604* Timeout:Serial
CC010* Bad message DB20A* Message send err
CB605* BCC err:Serial
received DB300* DICOM Message
CB607* Message re-
CC012* S Start Up Ope No err:ASSOCIATE
sent:Serial
Res err DB301* DICOM Message
CB60A* Undefined header
CC40C* Status err err:N_ACCTION
code:Serial
CC40E* File size err DB302* DICOM Offline
CB60B* Undefined com-
Rcv:N_ACCTION
mand code:Serial
CC40F* Socket discon-
nected DB303* DICOM Message
CB60C* Message length
err:N_CREATE
err:Serial
CC410* Invalid path
DB304* DICOM Offline
CB60D* Retry over:Serial
CC600* Process end:Fatal Rcv:N_CREATE
CB60E* Message receive err err
DB305* DICOM Message
CB60F* Message send err CC602* Message send err err:N_DELETE
CB610* Bad message CC603* Message send DB306* DICOM Offline

received err:Socket Rcv:N_DELETE
CB612* Start Up Mec No CC604* Message receive DB307* DICOM Message

Res err err:Socket err:N_SET
CB806* Bad message CC700* DICOM Message DB308* DICOM Offline

received err:ASSOCIATE 1 Rcv:N_SET
CBE06* Unreceived image CC701* DICOM Message DB310* DICOM

detected err:ASSOCIATE 2 ReleaseRep Alloc
err
CBE07* Unlink CC702* DICOM Message
failed:Image file err:ASSOCIATE 3 DB311* DICOM
ReleaseRep Sock
CBE0B* Film box max over CC703* DICOM Message Read err
err:ASSOCIATE 4
CC004* Timeout:Serial DB312* DICOM AbortRep
CC704* DICOM Message Alloc err
CC005* BCC err:Serial err:ASSOCIATE 5
DB313* DICOM AbortRep
CC007* Message re- DB200* S Process end:Fatal Sock Read err
sent:Serial err
DB202* S Socket send err

4.3 Main Errors
DB314* DICOM DB329* S DICOM ROW DB33E* S DICOM

Associate_RQ PORTRAIT Err (0028:0004) Err
Alloc err
DB32A* S DICOM ROW DB341* S DICOM LAND
DB315* DICOM LANDSCAPE Err PIXEL HSIZE Err
Associate_RQ Sock
Read err DB32B* S DICOM Film DB342* S DICOM LAND
Size&Type Not PIXEL VSIZE Err
DB316* DICOM AP Title Equal Err
Err DB343* S DICOM POR-
DB32C* S DICOM STAN- TRAIT PIXEL
DB317* DICOM AE Title DARD Format Err HSIZE Err
Err
DB32D* S DICOM ROW For- DB344* S DICOM POR-
DB318* DICOM AP Type mat Err TRAIT PIXEL
Err VSIZE Err
DB32E* S DICOM SLIDE
DB319* DICOM Context Format Err DB345* S PRN CMD
Err HDDirPrintSize Err
DB32F* S DICOM CUSTOM
DB31A* DICOM Present Format Err DB346* S PRN CMD
Context Err VDDirPrintSize Err
DB330* S DICOM
DB31B* DICOM Present (2010:0060) Err DB347* S PRN CMD
Context Length Err HDDirStartPos Err
DB331* S DICOM
DB31C* DICOM Endian Err (2010:0080) Err DB348* S PRN CMD
HDDirFrameSpace
DB31D* DICOM TRANS DB332* S DICOM Err
Err (2010:0100) Err
DB349* S PRN CMD HDDir
DB31E* DICOM MAX DB333* S DICOM Pixel Err
LEN Err (2010:0140) Err
DB34C* S PRN CMD VDDir
DB31F* DICOM Associate DB334* S DICOM TopUpperSpace Err
data Err (2011:1031) Err
DB34D* S PRN CMD VDDir
DB320* S DICOM DB335* S DICOM UpperSpace Err
(2000:0010) Err (2011:1030) Err
DB34E* S PRN CMD VDDir
DB321* S DICOM DB336* S DICOM VDDir Lower-
(2000:0020) Err (2011:1080) Err Space Err
DB322* S DICOM DB337* S DICOM DB34F* S PRN CMD HDDir
(2000:0030) Err (2020:0010) Err TotalPixel Err
DB323* S DICOM Film Type DB338* S DICOM DB350* S PRN CMD VDDir
Not Use Err (2020:0020) Err TotalPixel Err
DB324* S DICOM Film Type DB339* S DICOM DB351* S PRN CMD HD
Not Equal Err (0028:0034) Err Pixel Count Err
DB325* S DICOM DB33A* S DICOM DB352* S PRN CMD VD
(2000:0040) Err (0028:0100) Err Pixel Count Err
DB326* S DICOM DB33B* S DICOM DB353* S PRN CMD HD
(2010:0010) Err (0028:0101) Err Print Pixel Count
DB327* S DICOM DB33C* S DICOM Err
(2010:0040) Err (0028:0102) Err DB354* S PRN CMD VD
DB328* S DICOM DB33D* S DICOM Print Pixel Count
(2010:0050) Err (0028:0103) Err Err

4.3 Main Errors
DB355* DICOM N-ACT DB365* DICOM N-SET EB018 Backup ini file err
Film Session Not SLIDE (d007.ini)
Exist E Err EB019 Backup ini file
failed
DB356* DICOM N-ACT DB366* DICOM N-SET
Image Box Not CUSTOM Format EB01A Hardware clock set-
Exist Err Err ting failed
DB357* DICOM N-ACT DB367* DICOM IMAGE EB01B Status err on force
Image Block Over BOX Over online
DB358* DICOM N-CRE- DB368* S DICOM IMAGE EB01C File err:Mottle Cor-
ATE Film Session BOX 16x16 Over rection A
Exist Er EB01D File err:Mottle Cor-
DB369* DICOM IMAGE
DB359* DICOM N-CRE- BOX 1 Position 2 rection B
ATE Film Box Get Err EB01E CalcCorrectCoeff()
Exist Err failed
DB36A* DICOM N-CRE-
DB35A* DICOM N-CRE- ATE No disk free EB01F Top tray roll failed
ATE Film Session capacity
Not Exis EB020 Btm tray roll failed
DB36B* DICOM N-SET No
DB35B* DICOM N-CRE- disk free capacity EB02B Both tray not use
ATE PRN CMD
Over EB002 S Memory alloc err EB080 Parameter err:114R
DB35C* DICOM N- EB003 S Env.var not EB081 Unable action:114R

DELELTE Film found:KI18_BIN
EB082 Communication
Session Not Exi EB004 S Env.var err:114R
DB35D* DICOM N-SET NULL:KI18_BIN
EB086 Parameter err:116R
Film Session Not EB005 S Memory alloc err
Exist E EB087 Unable action:116R
EB006 S Socket init
DB35E* DICOM N-SET err:DICOM EB088 Communication
Film Box Not Exist err:116R
Err EB007 S Socket init
err:Maintenance EB08C Parameter err:118R
DB35F* DICOM N-SET
Image Box Not EB008 S Env.var not EB08D Unable action:118R
Exist Err found:KI18_LOG
EB08E Communication
DB360* DICOM N-SET EB009 S Env.var err:118R
Image Block Over NULL:KI18_LOG
EB08F Parameter err:119R
DB361* DICOM N-SET EB00A S Message send err
EB090 Unable action:119R
STANDARD For-
mat err EB00B S Shared memory init
EB091 Communication
err
err:119R
DB362* DICOM N-SET
STANDARD EB00C S Status file access
EB098 Parameter err:122R
(d007.ini) Err err
EB099 Unable action:122R
DB363* DICOM N-SET EB00D S Socket pair init err
ROW Format err EB09A Communication
EB00E S Message receive err
err:122R
DB364* DICOM N-SET
EB00F Status transition err
ROW (d007.ini) Err EB09B Parameter err:123R
EB010 Child proc exec err
EB09C Unable action:123R
EB017 Ini File restore err

4.3 Main Errors
EB09D Communication EB123 S Message format EB13F S Message time-

err:123R err:112R out:122R
EB100 Message time- EB124 S Not Assigned EB140 S BCC err:122R

out:101R
EB125 S Not Assigned EB141 S Message format
EB101 BCC err:101R err:122R
EB126 S Not Assigned
EB102 Message format EB142 S Message format
err:101R EB127 S Message time- err:123R
out:114R
EB103 Message time- EB143 S BCC err:123R
out:102R EB128 S BCC err:114R
EB144 S Message format
EB104 BCC err:102R EB129 S Message format err:123R
err:114R
EB105 Message format EB150 S Message time-
err:102R EB12A S Not Assigned out:173R
EB106 Message time- EB12B S Not Assigned EB151 S BCC err:173R

out:103R EB12C S Not Assigned EB152 S Message format
EB107 BCC err:103R EB12D S Message time- err:173R
EB108 Message format out:116R EB160 S Message time-

err:103R EB12E S BCC err:116R out:181N
EB109 Message time- EB12F S Message format EB161 S BCC err:181N

out:104R err:116R EB162 S Message format
EB10A BCC err:104R EB130 S Not Assigned err:181N
EB10B Message format EB131 S Not Assigned EB163 S Message time-

err:104R out:182N
EB132 S Not Assigned
EB10F Message time- EB164 S BCC err:182N
out:106R EB133 S Message time-
out:118R EB165 S Message format
EB110 BCC err:106R err:182N
EB134 S BCC err:118R
EB111 Message format EB17E S Message time-
err:106R EB135 S Message format out:191N
err:118R
EB112 Message time- EB17F S BCC err:191N
EB137 S BCC err:119R
err:107R EB138 S Message format out:192N
err:119R
EB115 Message time- EB182 S BCC err:192N
EB13A S BCC err:120R
err:108R EB13B S Message format out:193N
err:120R
EB121 Message time- EB185 S BCC err:193N
out:112R EB13C S Not Assigned
EB122 BCC err:112R EB13D S Not Assigned err:193N
EB13E S Not Assigned

4.3 Main Errors
EB187 S Message time- EB803 S Init err EBE08 S Memory alloc

out:194N failed:Film Box
EB804 S Message receive err
EB188 S BCC err:194N EBE09 S Memory alloc
EB805 S Message send err failed:Image File
err:194N EBA02 S Process end:Fatal EBE0A S Film number not
err found
EB18A S Message time-
out:195N EBA03 S Init err EBE0C S Discordant image
EBA04 S Init err:message format
EB18B S BCC err:195N
EBA05 S Message receive err EBE0D S Discordant image
EB18C S Message format block count
err:195N EBA06 S Message send err
EBE0E S Message receive err
EB1A0 S Message time- EBA0A S PCI init err
out:Internal EBE0F S Message send err
EBA0C S File data
EB1A1 S BCC err:Internal err:SMPTE Image EBE10 S Bad message
received
EB1A2 S Message format EBA0D S File err:SMPTE
err:Internal Image EC002 S Process end:Fatal
err
EB201 S Init err EBA0E S Discordant SMPTE
image size EC003 S Init err
EB206 S No SCU found:Bad
IP Address EBA10 S Start Up Status err EC006 S Init err:Serial
EB207 S File err:Print Com- EBA12 S File data EC008 S Message receive
mand File err:Dummy Image err:Serial
EB208 S File err:Image File EBA13 S File err:Dummy EC009 S Message send
Image err:Serial
EB530 S Failure:191N
EBA14 S Discordant Dummy EC00A S Unexpected msg
EB531 S Failure:192N received:Serial
image size
EB532 S Failure:194N EC00E S Message receive err
EBA15 S Que->Prn CMD 0
EB533 S Pickup Fail- Err EC00F S Message send err
ure:195N
EBA16 S Que->Prn CMD EC402 S Process end:Fatal
EB534 S Timeout:print ready Over Err err
EB535 S Timeout:print com- EBC02 S Process end:Fatal EC403 S Init err
plete err
EC404 S Message receive err
EB536 S Timeout:196N EBC03 S Init err
EC405 S Message send err
EB602 S Process end:Fatal EBC05 S Message receive err
err EC406 S Bad message
EBC06 S Message send err received
EB603 S Init err
EBC08 S Interrupt err EC407 S Socket init err
EB606 S Init err:Serial
EBE02 S Process end:Fatal EC408 S Message receive
EB608 S Message receive err err:Socket
err:Serial
EBE03 S Init err EC409 S BCC err:Sock/
EB609 S Message send 232C
err:Serial EBE04 S File err:Print Com-
mand File EC40A S Message send
EB802 S Process end:Fatal err:Socket
err EBE05 S File err:Image File

4.3 Main Errors
EC40B S Bad message FB029 S Process FB419 S Film count err

recieved:Sock/ ABEND:MenteIfd
232C FB41A S File Err:Film count
FB02A S Process fail
EC40D S File access err ABEND:Dicom-
Server FB41B S File Err:Empty Que
EC411 S No such file or
directory FB20B S Shared memory FB41C S File Err:Last Print
attach err Que
EC412 S Invalid IP Address
FB402 S File Err:Collect FB41D S File Err:Que
EC413 S Can’t get program Data
version FB500 S Message time-
FB403 S File Err:Collect List out:101R
EC414 S No backup file
FB404 S File Err:Current FB501 S BCC err:101R
EC415 S File copy failed Collect Data FB502 S Message format
EC416 S Can’t get system FB405 S File Err:Print Que err:101R
info Data FB503 S Message time-
EC417 S System command FB406 S File Err:Print Que out:102R
failed
FB407 S File Err:High Que FB504 S BCC err:102R
EC880 S Failure:191N
FB408 S File Err:Med Que FB505 S Message format
EC881 S Failure:192N err:102R
FB409 S File Err:Low Que
EC882 S Failure:194N FB506 S Message time-
FB40A S File Err:Film Num out:103R
EC883 S Pickup Fail-
ure:195N FB40B S File Err:Film Info FB507 S BCC err:103R
EC884 S Timeout:print ready FB40C S Shared memory init FB508 S Message format
err err:103R
EC885 S Timeout:print com-
plete FB40D S Que memory init FB509 S Message time-
err out:104R
EC8B0 S DensityCalc error
FB40E S Film Collect mem- FB50A S BCC err:104R
FB022 S Process ory init err
ABEND:Memo- FB50B S Message format
ryMngd FB40F S Msg Timeout mem- err:104R
ory init err
FB023 S Process FB50F S Message time-
ABEND:QueueM- FB410 S Timer generation out:106R
ngd err
FB510 S BCC err:106R
FB024 S Process FB411 S Message send err
ABEND:PrintIfd FB511 S Message format
FB412 S Message receive err err:106R
FB025 S Process
ABEND:MecIfd FB413 S Que regist err FB512 S Message time-
out:107R
FB026 S Process FB414 S Internal message
ABEND:BrightIfd err FB513 S BCC err:107R
FB027 S Process FB415 S Film number not FB514 S Message format

ABEND:OpeIfd found err:107R
FB028 S Process FB416 S Convey Status err FB515 S Message time-

ABEND:TestPrint- out:108R
FB417 S Film number err
Mngd FB516 S BCC err:108R
FB418 S Film size type err

4.3 Main Errors
FB517 S Message format FB553 S Unable action:107R FC80D S Que memory init
err:108R err
FB554 S Communication
FB519 S BCC err:191N err:107R FC80E S Film Collect mem-
ory init err
FB51A S Message format FB555 S Parameter err:108R
err:191N FC80F S Msg Timeout mem-
FB556 S Unable action:108R ory init err
FB51B S Not Assigned
FB557 S Communication FC810 S Timer generation
FB51C S BCC err:192N err:108R err
FB51D S Message format FB611 S Shared memory FC811 S Message send err
err:192N attach err
FC812 S Message receive err
FB522 S BCC err:194N FB807 S Shared memory
attach err FC813 S Que regist err
FB523 S Message format
err:194N FB808 S Memory alloc FC814 S Internal message
err:densitometer err
FB525 S BCC err:195N
FBA08 S Shared memory FC815 S Film number not
FB526 S Message format attach err found
err:195N
FBA09 S Child proc exec err FC816 S Convey Status err
FB528 S BCC err:181N
FBC09 S Shared memory FC817 S Film number err
FB529 S Message format attach err
err:181N FC818 S Film size type err
FBC0A S PCI init err
FB540 S Parameter err:101R FC819 S Film count err
FC011 S Shared memory
FB541 S Unable action:101R attach err FC81A S Film Err:Film count
fail
FB542 S Communication FC601 S Init err
err:101R FC850 S Message time-
FC606 S Shared memory out:101R
FB543 S Parameter err:102R attach err
FC851 S BCC err:101R
FB544 S Unable action:102R FC802 S File Err:Collect
Data FC852 S Message format
FB545 S Communication err:101R
err:102R FC803 S File Err:Collect List
FC853 S Message time-
FB546 S Parameter err:103R FC804 S File Err:Current out:102R
FB547 S Unable action:103R Collect Data
FB548 S Communication FC805 S File Err:Print Que
Data FC855 S Message format
err:103R err:102R
FB549 S Parameter err:104R FC806 S File Err:Print Que
FC856 S Message time-
FB54A S Unable action:104R FC807 S File Err:High Que out:103R
FB54B S Communication FC808 S File Err:Med Que FC857 S BCC err:103R

err:104R FC809 S File Err:Low Que FC858 S Message format
FB54F S Parameter err:106R err:103R
FC80A S File Err:Film Num
FB550 S Unable action:106R FC859 S Message time-
FC80B S File Err:Film Info out:104R
FB551 S Communication FC80C S Shared memory init
err:106R FC85A S BCC err:104R
err
FB552 S Parameter err:107R

4.3 Main Errors
Error Code Error Display Error Code Error Display

Character String Character String
FC85B S Message format FC896 S Parameter err:103R

err:104R
FC897 S Unable action:103R
FC85F S Message time-
out:106R FC898 S Communication
err:103R
FC899 S Parameter err:104R
FC861 S Message format
err:106R FC89A S Unable action:104R
FC862 S Message time- FC89B S Communication

out:107R err:104R
FC863 S BCC err:107R FC89F S Parameter err:106R
FC864 S Message format FC8A0 S Unable action:106R

err:107R FC8A1 S Communication
FC865 S Message time- err:106R
out:108R FC8A2 S Parameter err:107R
FC866 S BCC err:108R FC8A3 S Unable action:107R
FC867 S Message format FC8A4 S Communication
err:108R err:107R
FC869 S BCC err:191N FC8A5 S Parameter err:108R
FC86A S Message format FC8A6 S Unable action:108R
err:191N
FC8A7 S Communication
FC86C S BCC err:192N err:108R
FC86D S Message format FC900 S Data file read
err:192N err:D103
FC872 S BCC err:194N FC901 S Data file write
FC873 S Message format err:D103
err:194N FC902 S Data file read
FC875 S BCC err:195N err:D206
FC876 S Message format FC903 S Data file write

err:195N err:D202
FC878 S BCC err:181N FC904 S Message send

err:043N
FC879 S Message format
err:181N FC905 S Message send
err:038N
FC906 S File data
FC891 S Unable action:101R err:SMPTE Image
FC892 S Communication FC907 S File data

err:101R err:SMPTE String
FC894 S Unable action:102R
FC895 S Communication
err:102R

4.3 Main Errors
4.3.2 Errors that can be remedied on site

When errors are repeated after performing the remedies in the table below, collect the error log and have it analyzed
by KONICA Service Representative. (See p.7-58)
After that, please replace the hard disk (See p.2-119), initialize the set file, and upgrade the debug, etc. according to
the results of the log analysis.
Error Code Remedy
CB016 Check that the SCU IP address of the installed data is correct.
CC012 Check the cables between the control panel section and the main CPU circuit board.
DB320 Check that the setting for number of copies on the modality side is within the regulated range (1
to 99).
DB321 Check that the setting for priority order on the modality side is LOW, HIGH, or MED.
DB322 Check that the setting for media type on the modality side is CLEAR FILM, BLUE FILM, DR
CLEAR FILM, or DR BLUE FILM.
DB323 Set the tray to “usable” from the control panel.
DB324 Check the settings (film type designation) on the modality side is within the regulated range.
DB325 Check that the setting for destination of films on the modality side is PROCESSORS.
DB326 Check that the setting for format on the modality side is STANDARD¥C,R, ROW¥R1,R2, or
CUSTOM¥1.
DB327 Check that the setting for film orientation on the modality side is PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE.
DB328 Check that the setting for film size on the modality side is 11INX14IN, 14INX14IN, or
14INX17IN.
DB329 Check the settings (PORTRAIT designation for ROW) on the modality side is within the regu-
lated range.
DB32A Check the settings (LANDSCAPE designation for ROW) on the modality side is within the regu-
lated range.
DB32B Check the settings (film type/size designation) on the modality side is within the regulated range.
DB32C Check the settings (STANDARD format) on the modality side is within the regulated range.
DB32D Check the settings (ROW format) on the modality side is within the regulated range.
DB32E Check the settings (SLIDE format) on the modality side is within the regulated range.
DB32F Check the settings (CUSTOM format) on the modality side is within the regulated range.
DB330 Check that the setting for enlarging method on the modality side is REPLICATE or CUBIC.
DB331 Check that the setting for interpolation function type on the modality side is with the regulated
range (1 to 7).
DB332 Check that the setting for border on the modality side is BLACK or WHITE.
DB333 Check that the setting for trim on the modality side is YES or NO.

4.3 Main Errors
Error Code Remedy
DB334 Check that the setting for contrast on the modality side is within the regulated range (-7 to +7).
DB335 Check that the setting for density on the modality side is within the regulated range (-7 to +7).
DB336 Check that the setting for glossy on the modality side is NORMAL or GLOSSY.
DB337 Check that the setting for image position on the modality side is within the regulated range (one
or more and number of frames or less).
DB338 Check that the setting for polarity on the modality side is NORMAL or REVERSE.
DB339 Check that the setting for aspect ratio on the modality side is within the regulated range (0.5 or
above, 2.0 or below).
DB33A Check that the setting for bit number of pixel assignments on the modality side is 0008h or
0010h.
DB33B Check that the setting for number of pixel bits on the modality side is 0008h or 000Ch.
DB33C Check that the setting for higher bit on the modality side is 0007h or 000Bh.
DB33D Check that the setting for pixel data expression on the modality side is 0000h.
DB33E Check that the setting for optical measurement interpretation on the modality side is
MONOCHROME1 or MONOCHROME2.
DB341 Check the settings (No. of horizontal pixels for landscape designation) on the modality side is
within the regulated range.
DB342 Check the settings (No. of vertical pixels for landscape designation) on the modality side is within
the regulated range.
DB343 Check the settings (No. of horizontal pixels for portrait designation) on the modality side is
within the regulated range.
DB344 Check the settings (No. of vertical pixels for portrait designation) on the modality side is within
the regulated range.
DB345 1) Check the installed data (margin setting).

2) Check the settings (image print size in the optical direction) on the modality side is within the
regulated range.

2) Check the settings (image print size in the subscan direction) on the modality side is within the
regulated range.

2) Check the settings (start position of optical image) on the modality side is within the regulated
range.

2) Check the settings (frame spacing in optical direction) on the modality side is within the regu-
lated range.

2) Check the settings (No. of pixels in optical direction) on the modality side is within the regu-
lated range.
DB34C Check the installed data (margin setting).

4.3 Main Errors
Error Code Remedy
DB34D 1) Check the installed data (margin setting).

2) Check the settings (space from upper row) on the modality side is within the regulated range.
DB34E 1) Check the installed data (margin setting).

2) Check the settings (space from upper row) on the modality side is within the regulated range.
DB34F Check to see that the setting (total number of pixels for all frames) on the modality side has not
exceeded 5120.
DB350 Check the settings (total No. of pixels in subscan direction) on the modality side is within the reg-
ulated range.
DB351 Check the settings (No. of horizontal image pixels) on the modality side is within the regulated
range.
DB352 Check the settings (No. of vertical image pixels) on the modality side is within the regulated
range.
DB353 Check to see that the setting (No. of horizontal image pixels) on the modality side has not
exceeded the image print dimension.
DB354 Check to see that the setting (No. of vertical image pixels) on the modality side has not exceeded
the image print dimension.
DB368 Check the settings (No. of frames and image position) on the modality side is within the regulated
range.
E**** other than the Reset the error from the control panel.
ones below
EB02B Change the tray setting from “unusable” to “usable” from the control panel.
EB206 Reinstall the installation software.
EB534 1) Reset the error.

2) Check the power voltage of the print control board.
EB535 3) Extract and insert the print control board.
4) Replace the print control board.(See p.2-123)
5) Replace the optical unit. (See p.2-27)
EBA0A 1) Reset the error.

2) Check the power voltage of the main PC board, print control board, and network board.
3) Extract and insert the main PC board, print control board, and network board.
EC884 1) Reset the error.

2) Check the power voltage of the print control board.
EC885 3) Extract and insert the print control board.
4) Replace the print control board. (See p.2-123)
5) Replace the optical unit. (See p.2-27)
F**** other than the Turn the power OFF/ON after confirming that 3 minutes or more have passed since the occur-
ones below rence of the error.
FB20B Reset the error.
FB808 1) Perform an error reset.

2) Replace the densitometer. (See p.2-102)

4.4 Mechanical Control Errors
Error codes and error messages for mechanical control errors are displayed differently in the control panel and the
connected maintenance PC.
4.4.1 Errors related to the main communication (007 - 013 / E4Fx)
Error Code Error Message Cause Remedy

Upper: at Control Panel
Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
007 BCC of the received data from the 1. Reset the error.
main section is in disparity.
2. Check whether the ver-
E4F56 Mecha. unit status comm. 6 sions of the main software
008 The command header of the received and mechanical control
data from the main section is in dispar- circuit board match.
ity.
3. Check that there are no
E4F57 Mecha. unit status comm. 7
peripheral devices that
009 There is no process corresponding to may cause the generation
the received data from the main sec- of noises.
tion.
E4F58 Mecha. unit status comm. 8 4. If errors are repeated,
replace the mechanical
010 When the data length of the received
control circuit board.
data from the main section is abnor-
(See p.2-118)
mal.
E4F59 Mecha. unit status comm. 9
011 The next received interruption does not
occur within 100ms after receiving the
1st byte from the main section.
E4F5A Mecha. unit status comm. A
012 Received data from the main section
exceeds 256 bytes.
E4F5B Mecha. unit status comm. B
013 • Transmission interruption of the 1st
E4F5C Mecha. unit status comm. 6 byte does not occur within 500ms
from the start of transmission.
• The next transmission interruption
does not occur within 100ms after
sending the 1st byte.

4.4.2 Errors related to the outer cover (203 - 209 / E4A4x)

Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
203 The front cover is open at 1. Check to see if the front cover is
times other than when using locked.
the maintenance key or send-
ing an outer cover open com- 2. Reset the error.
mand. 3. If the error is repeated, check or
E4A40 Front door open 1 replace the following parts.
• Front cover solenoid (SOL2)
(See p.2-69)
• Front cover interlock (S5)
204 The lower cover is open at 1. Check to see if the lower cover is
times other than when using locked.
the maintenance key or send-
ing an outer cover open com- 2. Reset the error.
mand. 3. If the error is repeated, check or
E4A41 Front door open 2 replace the following parts.
• Lower cover interlock (S3)
205 The left cover is open at 1. Check to see if the left cover is locked.
times other than when using
the maintenance key or send- 2. Reset the error.
ing an outer cover open com- 3. If the error is repeated, check or
mand. replace the following parts.
E4A42 Left Cover open
• Left cover lock solenoid (SOL3)
• Left cover interlock (S2) (See p.3-18)
206 The top cover is open at times 1. Check to see if the top cover is locked.
other than when using the
maintenance key or sending 2. Reset the error.
an outer cover open com- 3. If the error is repeated, check or
mand. replace the following parts.
E4A43 Top cover open
• Top cover interlock (S4)
207 FILTER is not set. 1. Check to see if a FILTER is set.
E4A44 Deodorant filter sensor 2. Reset the error.
err
3. If the error is repeated, check or
replace the following parts.
• FILTER set sensor (PS18)
(See p.2-107)


Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
208 The front cover does not open 1. Check the operation of the front cover
after sending an outer cover solenoid (SOL2).
open command. (After retry-
2. Check the open/close of the front
ing 3 times)
cover. (See p.3-15)
F4A45 Front door not open
• Front cover solenoid (SOL2)
(See p.2-69)
• Front cover interlock (S5)
209 The left cover does not open 1. Check the operation of the left cover
after sending an outer cover lock solenoid (SOL3).
open command. (After retry-
2. Check the open/close of the left cover.
ing 3 times)
(See p.3-15)
F4A46 Left door not open
• Left cover lock solenoid (SOL3)
• Left cover interlock (S2) (See p.3-18)

4.4.3 Errors related to ROM/RAM (052 - 067 / F4A30 - F4234)

Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
052 The check sum (added value) Download the mechanical control soft-
F4A30 Check sum not of the boot ROM does not ware again.
argreement 1 match upon power ON.
053 The check sum (added value) Download the mechanical control soft-
F4A31 Check sum not of the flash memory does not ware again.
argreement 2 match upon power ON.
054 The loaded value cannot be 1. Reset the error.
F4A32 RAM err read upon power ON.
2. Replace the mechanical control cir-
cuit board. (See p.2-118)
057 • The contents of the fre- 1. Reset the error.
F4A35 BUS controller quency division ratio regis-
2. Replace the mechanical control cir-
ter set upon power ON is
cuit board. (See p.2-118)
damaged.
• The BUSY signal does not
go OFF within 30µs during
serial transmission.
058 None of the serial I/O of the 1. Reset the error.
E4130 Upper tray not connection upper supply could be accessed.
2. Check the connection between the
∗ ACK signal is not output supply drive board and mechanical
during serial transmission. control circuit board.
3. If the error is repeated, replace the
following boards.
• Supply drive board (See p.2-50)
• Mechanical control circuit board
(See p.2-118)
059 None of the serial I/O of the 1. Reset the error.
lower supply could be accessed.
2. Check the connection between the
E4230 Lower tray not connec- ∗ ACK signal is not output supply drive board and mechanical
tion control circuit board.
during serial transmission.
following boards.
• Supply drive board (See p.2-50)
• Mechanical control circuit board
(See p.2-118)
060 ACK signal is not output dur- 1. Reset the error.
F4131 Upper tray I/O err 1 ing serial transmission of the
upper supply. (IC1)
supply drive board. (See p.2-50)
upper supply. (IC2)


Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
upper supply. (IC3)
upper supply. (IC4)
F4231 Lower tray I/O err 1 ing serial transmission of the
lower supply. (IC1)
lower supply. (IC2)
lower supply. (IC3)
lower supply. (IC4)

4.4.4 Errors related to DownLoad (069 - 072 / F4A36 - F4A39)

These errors occur only when downloading the mechanical control software.

Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
069 D7 indicating that it is now 1. Reset the error.
F4A36 Flash ROM nothing 1 erasing does not change to 0
when erasing the flash mem-
mechanical control circuit board.
ory.
(See p.2-118)
070 D6 indicating that it is now 1. Reset the error.
F4A37 Flash ROM nothing 2 erasing does not toggle output
when erasing the flash mem-
ory.
(See p.2-118)
071 Writing does not complete 1. Reset the error.
F4A38 Flash ROM cannot delete within 300ms when erasing
the flash memory.
(See p.2-118)
072 Writing does not complete 1. Reset the error.
F4A39 Flash ROM cannot write within 500µs when writing
the flash memory.
∗ Writing is completed if the (See p.2-118)
written value could be read
for each byte.

4.4.5 Errors related to the supply section (101 - 128 / E4110 - E4227)

Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
101 • 2-sheet detection does 1. Open the front cover, sway the tray, and
E4110 Upper tray film jam1 not change to “Film reset the films.
118 existing” within the time-
2. Check the sucker operation.
out period in the pickup
E4210 Lower tray film jam1
nip operation. 3. Adjust the volume of the 2-sheet
• The mechanical control receiver (DETBU). (See p.3-3)
software version is old.
4. If the error is repeated, check or replace
the following parts.
• Film transport motor (M8) (See p.2-61)
• Sucker motor (M10) (See p.2-65)
• Suction pump (P1) (See p.2-59)
2-sheet emitter (LEDBU) or 2-sheet
receiver (DETBU)
(See p.2-68)
5. Upgrade the mechanical control soft-
ware to V1.11 or later.
102 • 2-sheet detection does 1. Open the front cover and remove the
E4111 Upper tray film jam2 not change to “No film” remaining film(s).
119 within the timeout period
in the supply transport
E4211 Lower tray film jam2
operation. 3. Adjust the volume of the 2-sheet
• 2-sheet detection does receiver (DETBU). (See p.3-3)
not change to “No film”
within 2 seconds in the
pickup return operation.
• 2-sheet emitter (LEDBU) or 2-sheet
receiver (DETBU)
(See p.2-68)
103 • Two films were detected 1. Open the front cover and remove the
E4112 Upper tray film jam3 after the supply transport remaining film(s).
120 roller stopped in the
2. Check the sucker and separation
return operation (2 sec-
E4212 Lower tray film jam3 operation.
ond operation).
• Two films were detected 3. Adjust the volume of the 2-sheet
during the supply trans- receiver (DETBU). (See p.3-3)
port operation.
• 2-sheet sensor emitter (LEDBU) or 2-
sheet sensor receiver (DETBU)
(See p.2-68)


Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
104 The home position sensor 1. Turn the power OFF and ON.
F4120 Upper tray shutter does not go ON within the
2. Check the open/close operation of the
sensor err1 timeout period in the shut-
shutter.
121 ter home position operation.
F4220 Lower tray shutter
sensor err1
• Shutter motor (M7) (See p.2-66)
• Shutter home position sensor
(PS19)(See p.2-58)
105 Shutter open is not detected 1. Turn the power OFF and ON.
F4121 Upper tray shutter within the timeout period in
sensor err2 the shutter open operation.
shutter.
122
sensor err2
• Shutter open sensor (PS24) (See p.2-58)
106 Shutter close is not detected 1. Turn the power OFF and ON.
F4122 Upper tray shutter within the timeout period in
sensor err3 the shutter close operation.
shutter.
123
sensor err3
• Shutter close sensor (PS25) (See p.2-58)
107 The home sensor does not 1. Turn the power OFF and ON.
F4123 Upper tray supply go ON within the timeout
sensor err1 period in the sucker home
124 position operation. 3. If the error is repeated, check or replace
F4223 Lower tray supply
sensor err1 • Sucker motor (M10) (See p.2-65)
• Sucker home position sensor (PS21)
(See p.2-55)
108 The separation position sen- 1. Turn the power OFF and ON.
F4124 Upper tray supply sor does not go ON within
sensor err2 the timeout period in the
125 sucker separation position 3. If the error is repeated, check or replace
operation. the following parts
• Sucker separation sensor (PS22)
(See p.2-55)


Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
109 The sucker release position 1. Turn the power OFF and ON.
F4125 Upper tray supply sensor does not go ON
sensor err3 within the timeout period in
126 the suction stop operation. 3. If the error is repeated, check or replace
• Sucker release sensor (PS20) (See p.2-
54)
110 • The tray lock sensor does 1. Reset the error.
E4126 Upper tray not close not go ON in the initial
2. Open the front cover and check the
127 operation.
installed position, etc. of the tray set sen-
• The tray lock sensor does
E4226 Lower tray not close sor (PS23).
not go ON in the supply
operation (supply initial, 3. Check the operation of the tray set sen-
pickup, package, exter- sor (PS23).
nal cover open, and shut-
4. If the error is repeated, replace the tray
down operations).
set sensor (PS23). (See p.2-57)
111 The home sensor does not 1. Turn the power OFF and ON.
F4127 Upper tray supply go OFF within the timeout
sensor err4 period in the sequential film
128 returning operation of the 3. If the error is repeated, check or replace
upper or lower supply. the following parts.
• Sucker home position sensor (PS21)
(See p.2-55)


(135 - 149 / E4310 - E4531)

Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
135 The LTS entrance sensor does not 1. Reset the error.
E4310 Film conveyer jam 1 detect “Film existing” within 6 sec-
2. Open the front cover and
onds in the front transport opera-
remove the remaining film(s).
tion.
3. Check the film size when the
error occurs.
• Always 11”x14”: Proceed to
Step 4.
• Always 14”x17”: Proceed to
Step 5.
• Unrelated: Proceed to Step 6.
4. Connect mechanical control
maintenance PC and change the
settings as indicated below.
• No. of retry: 3 times
• Return operation (up/down): 6
times
5. Remove the lower cover, turn
the conveyor gear between the
front transport section and LTS
entrance transport section by
hand, and check the amount of
backlash.
• If there is no backlash or if the
backlash is 2mm or more,
remove the front transport unit
and adjust the installed posi-
tion of the conveyor gear.
6. Adjust the position of the pause
point and the separator of the
sucker unit.
(See p.3-8)
• Front transport motor (M2)
(See p.2-82)
• LTS entrance film sensor (PS1)
(See p.2-77)


Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
136 • The LTS entrance sensor does 1. Reset the error.
E4311 Film conveyer jam 2 not detect “No films” within 6
2. Open the front cover and
seconds in the receiving opera-
remove the remaining film(s).
tion of the lower transport sec-
tion. 3. If the error is repeated, check or
• The LTS entrance sensor does replace the following parts.
not detect “Film existing” after
completing the initialization of
(See p.2-82)
the lower transport section,
exposure operation, or pusher • LTS entrance sensor (PS1) (See
home operation. p.2-77)
• Improper error reset was per-
formed after this error occurred.
137 The error was reset without remov- 1. Reset the error.
E4312 Film conveyer jam 3 ing the film after E4310, E4311, or
2. Open the front cover or lower
E4312 occurred, and the film pass
cover and remove the remain-
sensor of the front transport section
ing film(s).
detects “Film existing”.
(See p.2-82)
• Front transport section film
pass sensor (PS7)
(See p.2-73)
138 The lower transport tilt tray home 1. Turn the power OFF and ON.
F4420 Conveyer sensor err 1 sensor does not go ON within 2.5s
2. Check the transport operation
in the horizontal operation of the tilt
of the lower transport tray sec-
tray.
tion.
• Tilt tray motor (M1)
(See p.2-85)
• Tilt tray home position sensor
(PS2) (See p.2-79)
139 The tilt tray home sensor does not 1. Turn the power OFF and ON.
F4421 Conveyer sensor err 2 go OFF after the tilting operation of
the lower transport tilt tray.
of the tilt tray.
• Tilt tray motor (M1)
(See p.2-85)
• Tilt tray home position sensor
(PS2)
(See p.2-79)


Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
0140 • The pusher home position sensor 1. Turn the power OFF and ON.
F4422 Conveyer sensor err 3 does not go ON within the time-
2. Move the pusher claw by hand
out period in the pusher home
and check the ON/OFF of the
position operation.
pusher home position sensor
(PS3).
Timeout period (3.0s) = 1.2 x
max. distance of pusher claw 3. Check the operation of the
movement (515mm) ÷ speed of pusher claw. (See p.3-24)
movement (200mm/s)
• The pusher home position sensor
does not go ON after the comple-
tion of the initialization of the • Pusher motor (PM1)
lower transport section, exposure (See p.2-83)
operation, or pusher home posi-
• Pusher home position sensor
tion operation.
(PS3)
(See p.2-81)
141 “Film existing” of the V-sync lower 1. Turn the power OFF and ON.
F4423 Conveyer sensor err 4 sensor is not detected and the
pusher home position sensor does
not go OFF within the timeout
pusher home position sensor
period during feed 1 operation.
(PS3).
∗ Timeout period (14”x17”: 3.6s,
14”x14”: 4.4s, 11”x14”: 5.1s) = 3. Check the operation of the
[amount of film leading edge pusher claw. (See p.3-24)
movement (741 - film size) ÷ 4. If the error is repeated, check or
speed of movement (100mm/s)] replace the following parts.
+ 0.5s
• Pusher motor (PM1)
(See p.2-83)
(PS3)
(See p.2-81)
142 The pusher limit sensor does not go 1. Reset the error.
F4424 Conveyer sensor err 5 ON within the timeout period in the
limit position operation of the
pusher claw.
pusher limit sensor (PS4).
∗ Timeout period (15.5s) = 1.2 x
max. distance of pusher claw 3. Check the operation of the
movement (515mm) ÷ speed of pusher claw. (See p.3-24)
movement (40mm/s) 4. If the error is repeated, check or
(See p.2-83)
• Pusher limit sensor (PS4)
(See p.2-81)


Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
143 “Film existing” of the V-sync lower 1. Open the lower cover or left
E4510 Film conveyer jam 4 sensor is not be detected and the cover and remove the remain-
pusher home position sensor does ing film(s).
not go OFF within the timeout
period during feed 1 operation.
∗ Timeout period (14”x17”: 3.6s, pusher home position sensor
14”x14”: 4.4s, 11”x14”: 5.1s) = (PS3).
[amount of film leading edge
movement (741 - film size) ÷ 3. Check the operation of the
speed of movement (100mm/s)] pusher claw. (See p.3-24)
+ 0.5s 4. Attach a charge-eliminating
• Due to films being charged, a brush to models that do not
film that entered the lower trans- have the brush attached under
port section has popped out of the R guide in the entrance
the tilt tray or has not entered the transport section.
tilt tray properly.
(See p.2-83)
(PS3)
(See p.2-74)
144 • The V-sync lower sensor detects 1. Open the lower cover or left
E4511 Film conveyer jam 5 “Film existing” after the comple- cover and remove the remain-
tion of the exposure operation. ing film(s).
• The error was reset without
opening and closing the left
of the subscan section.
cover after this error occurred.
• The left cover was opened and 3. If the error is repeated, check or
closed after E4510, E4511, replace the following parts.
E4512, E4513, or E4514
occurred, but the V-Sync lower
(See p.2-83)
sensor detects “Film existing”
since the films were not removed. • DD motor (M21)
• Nip pressure solenoid (SOL4)
• V-Sync lower sensor (SB3)
(See p.2-86)
4. If the above parts are malfunc-
tioning, replace them. (For the
parts in the subscan section,
replace the entire subscan unit.)
(See p.2-24)


Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
145 “Film existing” is not be detected 1. Open the lower cover or left
E4512 Film conveyer jam 6 by the V-sync upper sensor within cover and remove the remain-
the timeout period during transport ing film(s).
2 operation. 2. Check the transport operation
∗ Timeout period (1.1s) = 1.5 x of the subscan section.
distance from V-Sync down sen-
sor to V-sync upper sensor
(29.5mm) ÷ speed of movement
(40mm/s) • Pusher motor (PM1)
(See p.2-83)
• DD motor (M21)
• V-sync lower sensor (SB3)
(See p.2-86)
• V-sync upper sensor (SB4)
(See p.2-86)
(See p.2-24)
146 • The V-sync upper sensor detects 1. Open the lower cover or left
tion of the exposure operation. ing film(s).
• After the error occurred, the
error was reset without opening
and closing the left cover.
• The left cover was opened and 3. Attach a charge-eliminating
closed after E4510, E4511, brush to models that do not
E4512, E4513, or E4514 have the brush attached under
occurred, but the V-sync upper the R guide in the entrance
sensor detects “Film existing” transport section.
since the films were not 4. If the error is repeated, check or
removed. replace the following parts.
• Due to films being charged, a
film that entered the lower trans-
port section has popped out of • Pusher motor (PM1)
the tilt tray or has not entered the (See p.2-83)
tilt tray properly.
• DD motor (M21)
• V-sync upper sensor (SB4)
(See p.2-86)
(See p.2-24)

Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
147 • The tilt tray film sensor detects 1. Open the lower cover or left
tion of the initialization of the ing film(s).
lower transport section, exposure
operation, or pusher home posi-
tion operation.
• The error was reset without 3. If the error is repeated, check or
removing the film after E4310, replace the following parts.
E4311, or E4312 occurred, and
the tilt tray film sensor detects
(See p.2-83)
“Film existing”.
• The left cover was opened and • Tilt tray motor (M1)
closed after E4510, E4511, (See p.2-85)
E4512, E4513, or E4514
• DD motor (M21)
occurred, but the tilt tray film
sensor detects “Film existing” • Nip pressure solenoid (SOL4)
since the films were not
• Tilt tray film sensor (SB1)
removed.
(See p.2-80)
(See p.2-24)
148 (V1.02) The PLL Lock port of the DD 1. Reset the error.
E4530 DD motor err motor does not go ON when the
film leading edge reaches the V-
sync lower sensor (standby position
for exposure). • DD motor (M21)
• DD motor drive board
(See p.2-24)
149 (V1.02) The PLL Lock port of the polygon 1. Reset the error.
E4531 Polygon motor err motor does not turn ON when the
film leading edge reaches the V-
replace the optical unit.
sync lower sensor (standby position
(See p.2-27)
for exposure).

4.4.7 Errors related to the elevator transport section (152 - 156 / E4610 - E4621)

Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
152 The HPRO section entrance sen- 1. Open the left cover and remove the
E4610 Film jam elevator 1 sor does not detect “Film exist- remaining film(s).
ing” within the timeout period
2. Check the operation of the elevator
during the elevator high-speed
transport.
transport operation.
∗ Timeout period (14”x17”: 3. If the error is repeated, check or
0.8s, 14”x14”: 1.2s, 11”x14”: replace the following parts.
1.6s) = [amount of film lead- • Elevator transport drive motor
ing edge movement (497 - (PM2)
film size) ÷ speed of high- (See p.2-92)
speed transport (200mm/s)] +
0.5s • HPRO section entrance sensor
(PS6)
(See p.2-90)
153 • The HPRO section entrance 1. Open the left cover or HPRO cover
E4611 Film jam elevator 2 sensor detected “Film exist- and remove the remaining film(s).
ing” after exceeding the time-
2. Check the operation of the elevator
out period during the elevator
transport.
low-speed transport opera-
tion. 3. Check the deformation of the
Timeout period (14”x17”: HPRO section guide plate
32.8s, 14”x14”: 26.8s, (entrance) and the space between
11”x14”: 20.8s) the heat roller. (See p.2-94)
• “Film existing” was detected
by the HPRO section
entrance sensor when the
error was reset without • Elevator transport drive motor
removing the films after this (PM2)
error occurred. (See p.2-92)
• The HPRO section entrance
• HPRO section entrance sensor
sensor does not detect “No
(PS6)
films” within the timeout
(See p.2-90)
period during film discharge
in the initialization of the ele-
vator section.
Timeout period (27.2s) = 1.2
x max. film length (14”x17”:
430mm) ÷ speed of low-
speed transport (19mm/s)
154 “Film existing” was detected by 1. Open the left cover or HPRO cover
E4612 Film jam elevator 3 the remaining film sensor of the and remove the remaining film(s).
elevator transport section after
resetting the error without
replace the nip roller film pass sen-
removing the films after E4610,
sor (SB2). (See p.3-47, p.2-89)
E4611, or E4612 occurred.


Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
155 • The nip roller home position 1. Reset the error.
F4620 Elevator sensor err 1 sensor does not go ON within
5.0s during the nip close
operation.
• The nip roller home position • Nip roller motor (M4) (See p.2-91)
sensor does not turn ON dur-
• Nip roller home position sensor
ing the nip open operation.
(PS5)
(See p.2-88)
156 The nip roller home position 1. Reset the error.
F4621 Elevator sensor err 2 sensor does not go ON within
5.0s during the nip open opera-
tion.
• Nip roller motor (M4)
(See p.2-91)
• Nip roller home position sensor
(PS5)
(See p.2-88)

4.4.8 Errors related to the heat adjustment of the HPRO section

(169 - 176 / E3000 - E3007)
IMPORTANT: A label with specific data of each heat roller unit is pasted on the HPRO-CPU circuit
board cover. The version of the HPRO software to be reinstalled or the offset value to
be written must match the version or value that is indicated on the HPRO-CPU circuit
board cover.

Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
169 • Temperature of 150 °C/ 1. Reset the error.
E3000 Temp. sensor maifuction 302°F or above continues
for 5 seconds. 2. If the error is repeated, reinstall the
• Temperature of below 50 HPRO software. (See p.8-11)
°C/82°F continues for 300 3. Initialize and write the offset value
seconds in the center and from the mechanical control mainte-
180 seconds on the left and nance PC. (See p.8-15)
right sides.
heat roller. (See p.2-94)
170 Abnormality during the set 1. Reset the error.
E3001 Proc temp. lower set temp temperature of 125 °C/257°F.
• The temperature is below 2. If the error is repeated, reinstall the
-25 °C/-13°F during warm- HPRO software. (See p.8-11)
up. 3. Initialize and write the offset value
• The temperature is below from the mechanical control mainte-
122 °C/252°F during nance PC. (See p.8-15)
stand-by.
• The temperature is below 4. If the error is repeated, replace the
122 °C/252°F in the center heat roller. (See p.2-94)
and 120 °C/248°F on the
left and right sides when
processing a large-size
film.
171 Abnormality during the set 1. Reset the error.
E3002 Proc temp. exceed set temperature of 125 °C/257°F.
• The temperature exceeds 2. If the error is repeated, reinstall the
temp HPRO software. (See p.8-11)
135 °C/275°F during
warm-up. 3. Initialize and write the offset value
• The temperature exceeds from the mechanical control mainte-
128 °C/262°F during nance PC. (See p.8-15)
stand-by.
• The temperature exceeds 4. If the error is repeated, replace the
128 °C/262°F in the center heat roller. (See p.2-94)
and 126 °C/259°F on the
left and right sides when
processing a large-size
film.
172 • The function to write in the 1. Reset the error.
E3003 EEPROM err EEPROM returns an error.
• The verifying function of 2. If the error is repeated, reinstall the
the EEPROM returns an HPRO software. (See p.8-11)
error. 3. Initialize and write the offset value
• The busy signal of the from the mechanical control mainte-
EEPROM stays ON even nance PC. (See p.8-15)
after 10ms elapses.


Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
173 The AD status register is read 1. Reset the error.
E3004 A/D converter err and conversion is not com-
pleted during AD conversion. 2. If the error is repeated, replace the
174 The received command is 1. Reset the error.
E3005 Proc status receive err abnormal (size, command,
header, or bcc). 2. If the error is repeated, reinstall the
HPRO software. (See p.8-11)
3. Initialize and write the offset value
from the mechanical control mainte-
HPRO-I/F circuit board.
175 The timeout of the transmis- 1. Reset the error.
E3006 Proc status trans. Timeout sion error monitor timer.
2. If the error is repeated, reinstall the
HPRO software. (See p.8-11)
3. Initialize and write the offset value
from the mechanical control mainte-
HPRO-I/F circuit board.
176 (Remarks) The time of heat 1. Reset the error.
E3007 Proc temp. fails to adjustment completion is cal-
culated at the time of opera- 2. If the error is repeated, replace the
achieve heat roller. (See p.2-94)
tion command.
• Status is not on stand-by at
the completion of heat
adjustment.
• Temperature is below 121
°C/250°F at 5 minutes
before completion of heat
adjustment.
adjustment.
adjustment.
adjustment.
adjustment.

(177 - 182 / E4710 - E4810)

Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
177 • The densitometer entrance 1. Open the top cover or HPRO cover
E4710 Film jam proc 1 sensor does not detect and remove the remaining film(s).
“Film existing” within the
timeout period during the
transport operation from
the HPRO section to the • Film discharge motor (PM3) (See
cooling section. p.2-113)
Timeout period (14”x17”:
• Heat roller motor (M19)
23.4s, 14”x14”: 29.3s,
(See p.2-109)
11”x14”: 35.2s)
Densitometer entrance sensor (PS8)
(See p.2-106)
opening and closing the
top cover after this error
occurred.
178 The rotation sensor of the 1. Reset the error.
E4730 Drive motor Malfunction servo motor is turned OFF for
2. Operate the mechanical control soft-
3.0s when the heat roller
ware and check the rotation of the
starts to rotate.
heat roller motor with the load opera-
tion test.
3. Check to see if the voltage between
the CN1 terminals on the drive motor
driver board is 24V AC.
• OK … Proceed to Step 4.
• NG … Proceed to Step 5.
CN3 terminals 1 to 5 on the drive
motor driver board is 5V DC.
• OK … Replace the drive motor driver
board or heat roller motor (M19).
• NG … Replace the mechanical con-
trol circuit board. (See p.2-118)
5. Check to see if the voltage of termi-
nals 5 to 6 of power terminal TB2 is
24V AC. (See p.3-52)
• OK … Replace the relay (X2).
• NG … Replace the power source
transformer (PT1).


Maintenance Section
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
179 TXRD of SR-GA “UART2” 1. Reset the error.
F4750 Proc unit status trans. err does not become active within
2. Open the HPRO cover and check to
1 1.0s from the start of trans-
see if the green light of the LED on
mission.
the HPRO-CPU circuit board is lit or
180 No response is received blinking.
F4751 Proc unit status trans. err within 2.0s (with 3 retries)
after transmission to the • Lighting or Blinking … Replace the
2
HPRO section. heat processing unit or HPRO-I/F cir-
cuit board.
181 BCC of the received data
F4752 Proc unit status comm. from the HPRO section is in • OFF … Proceed to Step 3.
BCC disparity.
the brushes is 120V AC.
• OK … Replace the heat roller.
4. Check to see that the circuit breaker
(CB2) is not open.
• OK … Proceed to Step 5.
5. When the voltage between TP34 and
TP37 on the mechanical control cir-
cuit board is 5.2V or above, adjust the
PC power source (SUP10) until the
voltage becomes 5.1±0.05V.
• If the error is repeated, replace the
(See p.2-118)
6. Return the earth leakage breaker and
check that the error does not occur
again.
• If the error is repeated, replace the
heat roller unit. (See p.2-94)
182 The densitometer entrance 1. Open the top cover or HPRO cover
E4810 Film jam proc 2 sensor did not detect “Film and remove the remaining film(s).
existing” after exceeding the
timeout period during the 2. Check the transport operation of the
transport operation of the HPRO and discharge sections.
cooling section. 3. If the error is repeated, check or
• Timeout period (14”x17”: replace the following parts.
26.4s, 14”x14”: 21.7s,
11”x14”: 17.1s) = 1.2 x • Film discharge motor (PM3)
film size ÷ discharge low- (See p.2-113)
speed transport (9.51mm/ • Heat roller motor (M19)
s) (See p.2-109)
removing the films after • Densitometer entrance sensor (PS8)
this error occurred. (See p.2-106)


(220 - 323 / E4A3A)
Error codes after 221 can only be confirmed on the mechanical control maintenance PC screen. They will not be
displayed on the control panel.

Upper: Top: Maintenance PC
Maintenance Bottom: Control Panel
PC Section
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
220 The check sum of the setup 1. Reset the error.

data is in disparity.
E4A3A Setup data broken 2. If the error is repeated, replace the
(See p.2-118)
221 Film data broken The checksum of the film data 1. Reset (save) the film data from the
is in disparity. maintenance PC.(See p.7-34)
(See p.2-118)
301 The communication of The header and header code 1. Release the error by pressing the ESC
the mechanical control is of the received data from the key.
abnormal. (The header is mechanical control circuit
2. Check the version of the mechanical
in disparity.) board is in disparity.
control maintenance PC software and
302 The communication of The sum of the received data mechanical control circuit board.
the mechanical control is from the mechanical control • If the versions is in disparity, change
abnormal. (The sum is in is abnormal. the version of the mechanical control
disparity.) maintenance PC software to that of
the mechanical control circuit board.
303 The communication of The command of the received (See p.6-10)
the mechanical control is data from the mechanical
abnormal. (ACK is in dis- control is in disparity. • When upgrading, change the version
parity.) of the mechanical control circuit
board to that of the mechanical con-
304 The communication of There is no process corre- trol maintenance PC software.
the mechanical control is sponding to the received data (Download the mechanical control
abnormal. (Applicable from the mechanical control. software.)
command cannot be pro-
3. Check the environment of the
cessed.)
mechanical control maintenance PC.
305 The communication of When communicating with • When more than one Windows appli-
the mechanical control is the mechanical control, data cations is running, close applications
abnormal. (Transmission was received when transmis- other than those for the mechanical
is not completed.) sion was not completed. control maintenance PC.
306 The communication of The number of data of com- 4. Check to see that there is no noise
the mechanical control is mands received from the mixed in the communication line
abnormal. (The length of mechanical control is abnor- between the mechanical control main-
data is in disparity.) mal. tenance PC and mechanical control
circuit board.

Error Code Error Message at Cause Remedy

Upper: Maintenance PC
Maintenance
PC
Lower:
Control Panel
Section
307 The communication of When the reply from the 1. Release the error by pressing the ESC
the mechanical control is mechanical control became key.
abnormal. (Receiving timeout. (Timeout … down-
2. Check the version of the mechanical
data is timeout.) load → approx. 10s, dummy
control maintenance PC software and
communication → approx.
15s, normal → 30s, next data
→ 100ms) • If the versions is in disparity, change
the version of the mechanical control
308 The communication of When the overrun error maintenance PC software to that of
the mechanical control is occurred in a communication the mechanical control circuit board.
abnormal. (The overrun from the mechanical control. (See p.6-10)
error is occurred.)
• When upgrading, change the version
309 The communication of When the frame error of the mechanical control board to
the mechanical control is occurred in a communication that of the mechanical control circuit
abnormal. (The frame from the mechanical control. maintenance PC software. (Download
error is occurred.) the mechanical control software.)
310 The communication of When the parity error 3. Check the environment of the
the mechanical control is occurred in a communication mechanical control maintenance PC.
abnormal. (The parity from the mechanical control.
• When more than one Windows appli-
error is occurred.)
cations is running, close applications
311 Connect the communica- When normal communica- other than those for the mechanical
tion cable. tion is disabled for reasons control maintenance PC.
such as communication 4. Check to see that there is no noise
cables being disconnected mixed in the communication line
during transmission to the between the mechanical control main-
mechanical control. tenance PC and mechanical control
circuit board.
323 The file format is differ- The number of data in the 1. Release the error by pressing the ESC
ent. (The number of data) setup data file and/or mechan- key.
ical control software file is
2. Reinstall the setup file (setup.dat) and
abnormal.
mechanical control software file
(kil8sys.abs).

4.4.11 Errors related to MS-DOS (501 - 597)

The following error codes are for errors generated from the maintenance PC MS-DOS, and are not errors generated
from the mechanical control maintenance PC software. All of these errors can be released by pressing the ESC key.
Refer to the messages and check the environment of the maintenance PC.
Error Code Error Message
501 Invalid function code.
502 Cannot find the file.
503 Cannot find the pass name.
504 File has been opened too long.
505 Cannot access.
506 Invalid handle.
507 Memory control block is damaged.
508 Insufficient memory.
509 Invalid memory block address.
518 Cannot find the file.
519 Disk is being write-protected.
520 Faulty disk unit.
521 Drive x: is not set up.
522 Invalid disk command.
523 CRC error.
524 Invalid length of disk operation.
525 Seek error.
526 This is not an MS-DOS disk.
527 Cannot find the sector.
528 No paper in the printer.
529 Cannot write.
530 Cannot read.
531 General error.
534 Incorrect disk.
596 Cannot close the file.
597 Insufficient memory.

4.5 Troubles with Image Quality
4.5.1 Troubles with print image
Trouble Cause Remedy Page
reference
Nothing is printed. Laser is not emitted. Check the PD signal. p.3-32

Nothing is printed. Abnormality in the H-Sync cir- Check the H-Sync signal. p.3-43
• Laser light is emitted. cuit board.
Abnormality in the H-Sync Check the H-Sync mirror. p.3-39
mirror angle.
Nothing is printed. Abnormality in the print control Replace the print control board. p.2-123
• H-Sync signal is normal. board.
Inconsistencies occur in the optical Abnormality in the nip pressure Adjust the nip pressure. p.3-27
direction at approximately 15mm of the subscan unit.
from the trailing edge of the film.
15mm
Black streaks occur in the optical Abnormality in the nip pressure Replace the subscan unit. p.2-24
direction at approximately 25mm of the subscan unit.
from the leading edge of the film.
25mm
Black streaks occur in the optical Dirty nip roller of the subscan Clean the nip roller of the sub- p.5-23
direction in 63mm intervals. unit. scan unit.
63mm
Black streaks occur on the entire film Incorrect adjustments in pitch Correct pitch irregularities. p.3-61
in the optical direction in 0.32mm irregularity correction.
intervals.
Abnormality in the polygon mir- Replace the optical unit. p.2-27
ror.
Inconsistencies occur on the entire Vibration of the HPRO section Change the drive power voltage
film surface in the optical direction cooling fan. of the HPRO section cooling fan
in 0.6mm intervals. from 24.0V to 23.5V.
Streaks (inconsistencies) occur on Abnormality in the DD driver Replace the DD driver board. p.2-87
the entire film surface in the optical board
direction in 2.6mm, 15mm intervals.
Abnormality in the DD motor. Replace the subscan unit. p.2-24


reference
Streaks (blurred inconsistencies) Poor rotation of the upper rack Clean the opposite roller and the p.5-16
occur on the entire film surface in the opposite rollers in the HPRO sec- heat roller shaft bearings in the
optical direction in 38mm intervals. tion. opposite roller.
38mm
Streaks occur in the optical direction Abnormal inclination of the Adjust the inclination of the p.3-21
at 210mm from the leading edge of pusher roller in the lower trans- pusher roller.
the film. port section.
Improper R guide position of the Adjust the R guide position of p.3-21
pusher transport section in the the pusher transport section.
lower transport section.
210mm
Streaks occur in the optical direction Abnormal inclination of the Adjust the inclination of the p.3-21
at 250mm from the leading edge of pusher roller in the lower trans- pusher roller.
the film. port section.
Improper spacing between the R Adjust the position of the pusher p.3-21
guide of the pusher transport sec- roller.
tion and the pusher roller in the
lower transport section.
250mm
The density of output is light only at Poor adhesion of the felt on the Reattach the felt on the separa- p.2-100
the leading edge portion of the film. separation claw of the HPRO tion claw.
section.


reference
Inconsistencies in band forms occur Insufficient force to transport Replace the subscan unit. p.2-24
in the trailing edge of the film. films in the subscan unit.
Straight black streaks occur in vari- Abnormality in the print control Replace the print control board. p.2-123
ous locations in the optical direction. board.
Thick black streaks of approximately The HPRO section heat roller Clean the heat roller and separa- p.5-13
3mm occur in various locations in and separation claw are filthy tion claw. p.5-18
the subscan direction. (faulty cleaning).
Open circles appear on every film at Scratches on the HPRO section Replace the heat roller. p.2-94
the same location and the same heat roller.
shape.
Sharp white lines occur in the Dust formed on the subscan Clean the guide plate of the sub- p.5-12
subscan direction on the top and bot- guide plate. scan unit.
tom portions of the film. One line
becomes two lines, and they some-
times disappear at midpoint.


reference
A black streak occurs in the subscan Abnormal timing of H-Sync sig- Replace the print control board. p.2-123
direction throughout the entire film. nal.
A blurred white streak of approxi- Abnormal timing of H-Sync sig- Replace the print control board. p.2-123
mately 10mm width occurs in the nal.
subscan direction throughout the
Dirty laser mirror. Clean the laser mirror. p.5-23
entire film.
Scratched laser mirror. Check the scratches and replace p.2-27
the optical unit if necessary.
A white streak occurs in the subscan Fluffy felt on the separation claw Cut away the fluffy portions of
direction throughout the entire film. of the HPRO section. the felt on the separation claw
with a pair of scissors.
A dark image of approximately Overlapping due to laser light Replace the subscan unit. p.2-24
50mm occurs in the subscan direc- reflecting on the guide plate of
tion throughout the film. the subscan unit.
• The dark image occurs at 85mm to
135mm from the right (or left)
edge of the film.
Images are tilted. Abnormal inclination of lower Adjust the pusher roller. p.3-21
section pusher roller.
Abnormality in the installed Adjust the position of the pusher p.3-24
position of the lower section claw.
pusher claw.


reference
Images are tilted. Abnormality in the installed Adjust the position of the magnet p.3-23
• The tilt is inconsistent. positions of the lower section catches.
magnet catches.
Density differs on the left and right Incorrect adjustments in left/right Correct the left/right density gap. p.3-61
sides of an image. density gap correction.
Density decreases at near the maxi- Deteriorated LD (laser diode). Measure the amount of laser light p.3-35
mum density level. and replace the optical unit if the
amount is below the regulated
value.
The density of output becomes dark The time-changing density Stop the time-changing p.3-66
when operating for a long time. correction control function is density correction control
operating more than necessary. function.
The density was different in the Abnormality with the densitome- Correct the densitometer. p.3-68
same image output from two ter.
Replace the densitometer. p.2-102
DRYPRO units.
Abnormality in the density Correct the density correction p.3-73
correction file. file.
CAUTION: If open circles appear in the output image even when there are no scratches on the heat
roller, the problem is in the film.
CAUTION: Be sure not to show the flat patterns that was output to assess the print image. Be sure to
take them back with you.

4.5.2 Scratched or stained films

reference
Stains are attached to the film in ver- Dirty guide plate (entrance) and Clean the guide plate (entrance) p.5-12
tical 38mm pitch and 6mm horizon- upper rack opposite roller of the and upper rack opposite roller of p.5-16
tal pitch. HPRO section. the HPRO section.
Stains substances are copied onto the Foreign substances (crystalline Clean the roller of the elevator
film in 76mm pitch. substances) attached onto the transport section using isopropyl
roller near the HPRO section in alcohol.
the elevator transport section are
copied onto the film.
Scratches occur on the emulsion side Scratches and deformation of the Fix the warped guide plate of the
of the film. HPRO section guide plate. HPRO section.
Scratches occur in the optical direc- Scratches caused by the actuator Grind the corner of the film con-
tion between 35 to 37mm from the of the front transport film pass tact portion (leading edge) of the
leading edge of the film. sensor. actuator.
35 ~ 37mm


reference
Scratches occur in the optical direc- Scratches caused by faulty posi- 1. Grind the front transport sec-
tion on films transported from the tion of the front transport section tion guide.
lower tray. guide.
2. Add a spacer to the guide
mounting position of the front
transport section.
Scratches occur in the subscan direc- Scratches generated by the sub- Grind the subscan section guide.
tion of the film. scan section guide.
• Standards in assessing scratches on films

Output flat patterns (in a range of D=12 to 1.5) from both the upper and lower trays.
• Permeable scratches that are visible to unaided eyes are not acceptable.
• Scratches that are visible when reflected by light but cannot be noticed when passed through by viewing
screen (Schaukasten) are acceptable.
CAUTION: Be sure not to show the flat patterns that was output to assess the print image. Be sure to
take them back with you.

4.6 Troubles with Film Transport

reference
No transport is made from the supply • The sucker is not attached cor- Reattach the sucker horizontally. --
section. rectly.
• All sucker surfaces are not
attached in the same height.
The moving guide pusher pin Adjust the position of the moving p.3-16
does not slide smoothly. guide pusher pin.
Jams occur frequently in the lower Transport path and film are Attach an charge eliminating --
section. charged. brush under the R guide of the
E4510, E4513 errors are indicated. entrance transport section if it is
• Jams occur in the earlier versions not attached.
of DRYPRO.
• Jams occur in dry seasons. (cf. win-
ter)
Jams occur frequently in the subscan Films become slanted in the Check the magnet catches. p.3-23
section. lower transport section.
Adjust the position of the pusher p.3-24
• Films are slanted.
claw.
Jams occur frequently in the subscan The diameter of the nip roller Clean the nip roller. p.5-23
section. increased due to formed filth.
• Films are not slanted.
Jams occur in the front transport sec- The idler gear of the front trans- Pull out the lower cover
tion. port section and the entrance (entrance transport section), then
• An EC880 error is generated. transport section drive gear of the put it back in.
lower transport section are not
meshed accurately.
Films stop at the lower transport sec- H-Sync cannot be detected Adjust the angle of the H-Sync p.3-39
tion. because the H-Sync mirror is mirror.
• An EC885 error is generated. misaligned.

4.7 Troubles Related to Mechanism

reference
The open/close mechanism of the The protruding amount of the Adjust the protruding amount of p.3-15
front cover is too heavy (too light). magnetic catches for the front the magnetic catches for the front
cover is inappropriate. cover.
The shutter opens when attaching or The slide resistance of the shutter Adjust the slide resistance of the p.3-10
detaching a tray. is too small. shutter.
Screechy noise comes from the Friction of the belt tensioner pul- Apply TRI-FLOW on the pulley p.5-24
HPRO section (near the heat roller ley shaft in the heat roller assem- shaft of the belt tensioner.
motor). bly.

4.8 Other Troubles

reference
The screen changes to the touch The LCD module or control Check the installation of the p.2-37
panel adjustment screen after startup panel board is pressing the touch LCD module.
even when the touch panel is not panel from the rear.
touched.
Beep sounds even when the touch Change the cable clamp of the
panel is not touched. control panel board to the tie
wrap.
Nothing is displayed in the LCD 1. Faulty connection of the flexi- Confirm that the slide-lock sec-
module ble cable connector. tion of the connector has been
returned to its regulated position.
2. Faulty circuit board of the Replace the circuit board of the
control panel section. control panel section.
3. Faulty HDD.
The densitometer cannot be cor- Faulty densitometer circuits. Replace the densitometer. p.2-102
rected.
• "DENSITOMETER (EC808)" is
indicated.
The film sum-up data cannot be The results of resetting are not Follow the procedures below to
reset. reflected because the power of reset the film sum-up data.
• The value in the counter returns to the main unit is turned OFF
1. Enter the SERVICE2/4 screen
the original value the next day. before the time for summing up
and select [CLEAR] of
the films.
[CLEAR TOTAL FILM
DATA].
2. Select [YES].
3. Confirm that the film sum-up
data has been reset.
4. Select [TIME SET] in the
maintenance screen, and set
the date to +1 (next day’s
date).
5. Select [OK].
6. Select [TIME SET] in the
maintenance screen, and reset
the date to the original date
(current date).
7. Select [OK].
* Perform the above procedures
continuously, and do not
select OPERATION OFF.
* After the setting has been
completed, select OPERA-
TION OFF to reboot the sys-
tem and confirm that the film
sum-up data has been reset.

Blank Page
Chapter 5
Maintenance
5.1 Items for Periodical Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2 Cleaning the HPRO Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 Procedures for cleaning the HPRO section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.2 Cleaning the FILTER case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.3 Cleaning the periphery of the rear side of the control panel unit . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.4 Cleaning the roller cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.5 Cleaning the duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.6 Replacing the duct packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.2.7 Cleaning the inner side of the inner cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.2.8 Replacing the packing of the inner cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.9 Cleaning the brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.10 Cleaning the guide plate (entrance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.2.11 Cleaning the separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.2.12 Checking the operation of the separation
roller bearings moving arm and the separation claw roller bearings . . . . . . 5-14
5.2.13 Replacing the separation claw felt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.2.14 Cleaning the opposite rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.15 Cleaning the slip ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.2.16 Cleaning the heat roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.2.17 Checking and adjusting the separation claw clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.2.18 Cleaning the guide plate (cooling discharge section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.2.19 Confirming after cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.3 Cleaning Other Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.3.1 Cleaning the filter (for the control box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.4 Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.4.1 Heat roller drive gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.4.2 Heat roller motor assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Blank Page
5.1 Items for Periodical Maintenance
Section Parts Contents Cycle Refer to

HPRO section Roller cover Cleaning 6 months p.5-5
Duct Cleaning 1 year p.5-6
Inner cover Cleaning 6 months p.5-8
Brush Cleaning 6 months p.5-10
Guide plate (entrance) Cleaning 6 months p.5-12
Separation claw Cleaning 6 months p.5-13
Separation roller bearings moving arm, sepa- Cleaning 6 months p.5-14
ration claw roller bearings
Opposite roller Cleaning 6 months p.5-16
Slip ring Cleaning 6 months p.5-17
Heat roller Cleaning 6 months or 20,000 p.5-18
sheets
Separation claw Clearance adjust- At inspection p.5-19
ment
Heat roller drive gear Lubrication 1 year p.5-23
Separation claw Replacing felt 2 years p.5-15
Heat roller Replacing 3 years or 180,000 p.2-94
sheets
Discharge FILTER case Cleaning 1 year p.5-3
section FILTER Replacing 4 months or 10,000 -
sheets
Guide plate Cleaning 1 year p.5-20
Felt Replacing p.2-101
Control box Filter (for control box) Cleaning 6 months p.5-22
CAUTION: To prevent electrical shock, be sure to turn OFF the breaker of the main unit or facility be-
fore performing the following procedures.
CAUTION: To prevent burns, be careful when commencing this procedure, as the HPRO section com-
ponents are very hot. Wear working gloves to remove the upper rack and heat roller.

5.2.1 Procedures for cleaning the HPRO section
When cleaning the HPRO section, perform all of the items for cleaning and adjusting in the order listed below. This
procedure enables cleaning to be done efficiently by disassembling the HPRO section.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to check all items after cleaning so that there are no problems in the printed
images.
1 Cleaning the FILTER case (See p.5-3)
2 Cleaning the periphery of the rear side of the control panel unit (See p.5-4)
3 Cleaning the roller cover (See p.5-5)
4 Cleaning the duct (See p.5-6)
5 Replacing the duct packing (See p.5-7)
6 Cleaning the inner side of the inner cover (See p.5-8)
7 Replacing the packing of the inner cover (See p.5-9)
8 Cleaning the brush (See p.5-10)
9 Cleaning the guide plate (entrance) (See p.5-12)
10 Cleaning the separation claw (See p.5-13)
Cleaning the operation of the separation roller bearings moving arm

11 and the separation claw roller bearings (See p.5-14)
12 Replacing the separation claw felt (See p.5-15)
13 Cleaning the opposite rollers (See p.5-16)
14 Cleaning the slip ring (See p.5-17)
15 Cleaning the heat roller (See p.5-18)
16 Checing and adjusting the separation claw clearance (See p.5-19)
17 Cleaning the guide plate (cooling discharge section) (See p.5-20)
18 Confirming after cleaning (See p.5-21)
• White solid substances stuck in the HPRO section are easier to remove by warming them. Prepare a dryer or
hot water.

5.2.2 Cleaning the FILTER case
1 Remove the FILTER.

2 Vacuum the white crystalline substances
attached on the FILTER contact surface of the
FILTER case to some extent with a vacuum
cleaner.
FILTER contact surface
3 Remove the remaining crystalline substances
with a resin spatula without scratching the
FILTER case.
4 Vacuum the crystalline substances around

the opening section of the FILTER case with a
vacuum cleaner, then wipe the section with a
cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol.
5 Wipe off the foreign substances on the FIL-

TER contact surface with a cloth moistened
Opening section
with isopropyl alcohol.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to clean the FILTER
case so that the white crys-
talline substances do not
remain except the corners
of the FILTER case. The
amount of ventilation dis-
charge wind may decrease
if foreign substances
remain around the opening
section.

5.2.3 Cleaning the periphery of the rear side of the control panel unit

around the rear side of the control panel unit
with a vacuum cleaner.
3 Wipe off the foreign substances around the

control panel unit with a cloth moistened with
isopropyl alcohol.
Clean around this area.

5.2.4 Cleaning the roller cover

2 Remove the HPRO front cover. (See p.2-103)
3 Open the inner cover.
roller cover.
Set screws (2)
Roller cover
5 Wipe off the foreign substances on the roller

cover with a cloth moistened with isopropyl
alcohol. Roller cover
· The foreign substances do not have to be totally
cleared.
Wipe off the foreign substances.

5.2.5 Cleaning the duct

Duct
inside the duct with a vacuum cleaner.
· Vacuum until the powder of the crystalline substance
cannot be seen floating.
2 Vacuum the external section and opening

section of the duct with a vacuum cleaner.
3 Wipe off the foreign substances on the duct

with a cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol.
· Wipe the external section and opening section of the
duct until the foreign substances are totally cleared.
· A certain degree of yellow foreign substances Packing
remaining inside the duct will not hinder the perfor-
mance.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to peel off
the packing of the duct
when cleaning.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the duct and
soak it in hot water or water
as it is liable to rust.
• Inspections upon cleaning
Check the packing of the opening section when cleaning
the duct.
· Whether they are deteriorated.
· Whether they are crushed and do not function as
packings.
· Whether some portions are peeled.
If any of the above problems exist, replace the packing.

5.2.6 Replacing the duct packing

CAUTION: The duct packing does not have to be replace if it is not deteriorated, crushed, or peeled.

duct, then remove the duct.
Set screws (3)
Duct
2 Scrape off the packing of the duct with a resin

spatula. Duct
3 Wipe off the double-sided tape remaining on

the duct with a cloth moistened with isopropyl
alcohol.
4 Attach a new packing.

5.2.7 Cleaning the inner side of the inner cover
1 Wipe the inner side of the inner cover with a

· Wipe off the crystalline substances that have formed Inner cover
Packing
into a convex shape until they are totally cleared. A
certain degree of yellow crystalline substances
remaining on the inner cover will not hinder the per-
formance.
IMPORTANT: Be careful to clean the
inner cover so that the alu-
minum foil does not peel
off.
• Inspections upon cleaning
Check the packing of the opening section when cleaning
the duct.
· Whether they are deteriorated.
· Whether they are crushed and do not function as
packings.
· Whether some portions are peeled.
If any of the above problems exist, replace the packing

5.2.8 Replacing the packing of the inner cover

CAUTION: The duct packing does not have to be replace if it is not deteriorated, crushed, or peeled.

hinge (front side) securing the front cover.
· Attaching an adhesive tape under the hinge tempo- Set screws (2) Hinge (inner cover side)
rarily is recommended as it will prevent the set
screws from dropping into the unit.
2 Remove the inner cover by pulling it out

toward the front.
Hinge
Inner cover
3 Scrape off the packing with a resin spatula.

4 Wipe off the double-sided tape remaining on
the duct with a cloth moistened with isopropyl Packing
alcohol.
5 Attach a new packing.

5.2.9 Cleaning the brush

CAUTION: To prevent burns when removing the upper rack and heat roller, be sure to wear working
gloves for this procedure.
1 Assemble the roller stand. (See p.2-94)

2 Remove the cover of the slip ring.
(See p.2-94)
3 Remove the upper cover and heat roller.

(See p.2-94)
· Place the removed upper rack at a safe place so as
not to be touched by anyone.
· Set the heat roller on the roller stand.
4 Sand the slip ring contact surface of the brush

with No. 600 to 1000 sandpaper.
Brush
5 Vacuum the dust around the brush with a vac-
uum cleaner. Holder
6 Slide the brush up and down by hand.

7 If it does not slide smoothly, pull the brush out
of the holder and clean the sliding portion of
the brush and the inner section of the holder.

• Inspecting the cleaning procedure

· Check whether the set screws securing the brush Brush holder
holder are loose or not when cleaning the brush.
· If they are loose, attach a control part to prevent the
brush from becoming loose.
Set screws
• Attaching a control part to prevent the brush

from becoming loose
· Put the control part on the brush holder and insert it Control part
deep inside the brush holder.

5.2.10 Cleaning the guide plate (entrance)

2 Loosen the four set screws securing the guide
plate from both sides and remove the guide
plate.
Set screws (4)

Guide plate (entrance)
3 Wipe off the foreign substances on the guide

with a JK wiper or a cloth moistened with iso-
propyl alcohol.
4 Soften the solid white crystalline substances

by warming them with a cloth moistened with
hot water or a dryer, then wipe off the crystal-
line substances with a cloth moistened with
isopropyl alcohol.
· Wipe the guide plate until the crystalline substances
are totally cleared.
· A certain degree of white foreign substances remain-
ing on the plate will not be a problem.
IMPORTANT: Wipe the guide plate with
appropriate strength. Oth-
erwise, the the guide plate
may deform which may
lead to faulty transport of
films.
• Confirmation upon assembly
· Check the clearance between the heat roller and the
guide when installing the heat roller and attaching
the lower rack to the main unit. (See p.2-94)

5.2.11 Cleaning the separation claw
1 Wipe off the foreign substances on the alumi-

num section of the separation claw with a
IMPORTANT: Wipe especially the rear
side of the aluminum sec-
tion thoroughly until the
attached substances on the
Separate claw
separation claw are totally
cleared. Aluminum portion
· A certain degree of remaining substances will not of separation claw
become a problem.
Felt
Clean especially the

rear side sufficiently.

5.2.12 Checking the operation of the separation claw roller

bearings moving arm and the separation claw roller bearings
If filth remain around the separation roller bearings moving arm, the movement of the separation claw roller bearings
and separation claw will aggravate. Check the movement, and clean the area if the movement is not smooth.
1 Check if the rotation of the separation claw

roller bearings and the movement of the sep- Separation claw roller bearings
aration claw moving arm are smooth. A
· Section A may sometimes be stuck under the influ-
ence of solid substances.
2 If the movement is unsatisfactory, spray TRI-

FLOW on the roller bearing shaft of the sepa-
ration claw and the sliding section of the arm.
· Check that the separation claw roller bearings and
the separation roller bearings moving arm move
smoothly after spraying the TRI-FLOW.
Separation roller
bearings moving arm

5.2.13 Replacing the separation claw felt
1 Peel off the old felt from the separation claw.

2 Warm the adhesive remaining on the separa-
tion claw (aluminum) with a dryer and scrape
it off with a resin spatula.
3 Wipe off the adhesive remaining on the sepa-

ration claw with a toothbrush or cloth moist-
ened with isopropyl alcohol.
· A certain degree of adhesive remaining on the sepa-
ration claw will not be a problem as long as it does Separation claw
not hinder the attachment of a new felt.
Felt
4 Peel the protective tape off the double-sided
tape attached on the new felt.
5 Adhere the felt on the separation claw while

pushing it into the groove of the separation
claw.
· Be sure that the felt is not napped or wrinkled, or that
it does not extend off the separation claw when
adhered.

5.2.14 Cleaning the opposite rollers

CAUTION: To prevent burns, commence this procedure only after confirming that the upper rack that
was removed from the main unit has cooled down sufficiently.
1 Wipe the opposite roller one by one with a

cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol to
remove the foreign substances. Opposite rollers
· Scrape off the crystalline substances that have
formed into a partially convex shape with a resin
spatula.
IMPORTANT: Clean the opposite roller
sufficiently until the convex
crystalline substances are
totally cleared. Crystalline
substances remaining on
the opposite roller would
form into protuberances
and hollows on the roller
surface which would lead
to irregularities (38 pitch
streaks) in the image.
· A certain degree of yellow crystalline substances
remaining on the opposite rollers will not be a prob-
lem.
· Discoloration on the opposite rollers caused by heat
cannot be removed.
2 Check that the opposite rollers rotate

smoothly.
3 If any of the rotation of the opposite rollers is

not smooth, remove and clean the heat roller
shaft bearing section from the upper rack. E-ring
· Confirm that all of the opposite rollers are moving
smoothly.
IMPORTANT: The four opposite rollers
on the film entrance side of
the upper rack differ from Opposite roller
the other rollers. Be sure to
reattach the opposite roll- Heat roller shaft bearing
ers removed from the
upper rack to their original
positions.
IMPORTANT: Do not clean the opposite
roller by soaking it in hot
water or water as it can
easily rust. If water applied
on the opposite roller while
cleaning, wipe it off with a
dry cloth.

5.2.15 Cleaning the slip ring

roller removed from the main unit has cooled down sufficiently.
CAUTION: If the surface of the slip ring has a crater-shaped dip, replace the slip ring.
1 Sand and remove the foreign substances

stuck on the round surface of the three slip
rings with No. 1000 to 1500 sandpaper while
turning the heat roller gear by hand. Drive gear
· Grind the three slip rings until the protuberances and
hollows are totally cleared and the black discolora- Slip rings (3)
tion becomes faint.
IMPORTANT: If foreign substances
remain on the surface of
the slip ring, it may gener-
ate sparks.
2 Apply grease (Multemp AC-D) on the drive

gear.

5.2.16 Cleaning the heat roller

roller removed from the main unit has cooled down sufficiently.
IMPORTANT: Do not touch or scratch the round surface of the heat roller. It may lead to deteriora-
tion of the image quality.
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the round surface of the slip ring. Otherwise, it may generate sparks.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to damage the heat roller by dropping metal items, etc. A pen in the
chest pocket should be removed just to be safe.
1 Fold a clean cloth moistened sufficiently with

tap water, so that the thickness becomes 1cm Rubber surface of heat roller
or thicker.
2 Wipe the entire rubber surface of the heat

roller while rotating the roller.
· Wipe the same area of the rubber surface toward the
shafts direction back and forth three times without
applying too much force.
· Continue this procedure until the roller rotates three
times. Wipe the same area
IMPORTANT: Wiping too strongly may back and forth three times.
damage the rubber surface
and the heat roller may not
be able to be used.
· The brown discoloration on the roller surface at the
film pass section cannot be wiped off.
· A certain degree of white streaks remaining on the
roller surface will not affect the image quality.
CAUTION: Wipe with a cloth that does not
produce thread scraps.
• Confirmation upon assembly
· Check the clearance between the heat roller and the
guide when installing the heat roller and attaching
the lower rack to the main unit. (See p.2-94)

5.2.17 Checking and adjusting the separation claw clearance

CAUTION: Be sure to check the clearance of the separation claw during inspection or maintenance. If
the specified space is not secured, readjust the clearance.
1 Attach the lower rack to the main unit.

2 Install the heat roller.
3 Confirm the clearance between the heat roller
and the separation claw. Heat roller Separation claw
<Regulated Value> Thickness gauge
The clearance should fit a thickness gauge of 0.15mm
but not a thickness gauge of 0.20mm.
• Adjusting the clearance of the separation claw
1 Loosen screw (a) of the separation claw with b

a M3 hex wrench.
2 Adjust the space between the heat roller and

separation claw by turning screw (b) with a
precision screw driver.
3 Adjust the space between the heat roller and a

separation claw so that a thickness gauge of
0.15mm would pass through and 0.20mm
would not.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to scratch
the surface of the heat
roller when inserting the
thickness gauge in the
space.
b
4 Secure screw (a) when the space is adjusted.
· Adjust both sides of the separation claw equally. a

5.2.18 Cleaning the guide plate (cooling discharge section)
1 Open the FILTER case.

2 Remove the two guide mounting screws, then
remove the guide.
1 Guide
Guide installation screws (2)
3 Wipe off the foreign substances attached on

the film contact surface of the guide plate with Guide plate (cooling transport section)
a cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol.
IMPORTANT: Apply appropriate force
when wiping the guide
plate to prevent it from
bending. If too much force
is applied, the plate may
bend and cannot be recov-
ered.

5.2.19 Confirming after cleaning

After cleaning the HPRO section, confirm that the flat patterns of D=1.2 to1.5 are output and images are printed
normally. If abnormalities are found in the image, follow the procedures in "4.5 Problems with the Image Quality"
(See p.4-38).
CAUTION: Be sure not to show the flat patterns that was output to assess the print image to anyone.
Be sure to take them back with you.

5.3 Cleaning Other Sections
5.3.1 Cleaning the filter (for the control box)

· The front foot cover is secured to the main unit by
two magnetic catches.
2 Remove the filter, then vacuum the dust with Filter

a vacuum cleaner. (for control box)
3 Wash the filter with water.
Foot cover (Front) Magnet catches (2 sections)

5.4 Lubrication
5.4.1 Heat roller drive gear

Cover of the slip ring
4 Apply grease (Multemp AC-D) on the surface

of the gear teeth while rotating the heat roller
gear by hand.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to apply
Heat roller gear
grease on the gear section
of the opposite roller or on
the slip rings.

5.4 Lubrication
5.4.2 Heat roller motor assembly

Spray some lubricant agent (TRI-FLOW) on the belt tensioner’s pulley during periodical maintenance, or when ab-
normal noise (screechy sound) is heard from the heat roller motor assembly.

Cover of the slip ring
4 Attach a special nozzle on the TRI-FLOW

spray.
5 Insert the special nozzle deep into the heat Heat roller motor Assy Special nozzle
roller motor assembly and spray the area
around the pulley shaft of the belt tensioner.
Belt tensioner pulley

Chapter 6
Service Screens on Control Panel Section
6.1 Service Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1.1 How to display service screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.2 SERVICE1/4 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.3 SERVICE2/4 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.1.4 SERVICE3/4 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.1.5 SERVICE 4/4 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2 CORRECT Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3 Test Pattern Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.4 Version Scereen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.5 Flow Chart of Service Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Blank Page
6.1 Service Screens
6.1.1 How to display service screens
1 Touch the "MAINTENANCE" key on the nor-

mal screen of DRYPRO 722.
· The MAINTENANCE MENU screen will appear.
2 Touch "OFFLINE" on the upper left corner on

the MAINTENANCE MENU screen for 3 sec-
onds or more.
· The SERVICE screen (SERVICE 1/4) will appear.
†˙
· By touching the arrow key on the upper right corner

of the SERVICE screen, you can move to different
SERVICE screens (SERVICE 1/4 to 4/4).
• Note :To enter the value with the numeric keys on the service screen
• As the figures are input, they will appear on the screen from the right end.
• Figure in the 1st digit place moves to 2nd, 2nd to 3rd digit place, and so on when the next figure is input.
• Each display has its limit of digits, and when the figure exceeds the limit, it is not displayed (Max. 4 digits).

6.1 Service Screens
6.1.2 SERVICE1/4 screen
1) UPPER TRAY/LOWER TRAY

Set the valid or invalid for the upper and lower trays. Also use to set the film count.
2) CORRECT
Touch "SET" to switch to CORRECT screen where you can set the condition with which the film is printed with-
out blurs.
3) TEST PATTERN
Touch "SET" to switch to TEST PATTERN screen where you can perform different test prints.
4) OK
Setting is finalized.
5) EXIT
Settings on its way being changed will be cancelled, and the settings before change become valid. Then, returns
to MAINTENANCE screen.

6.1 Service Screens
1) RESTART
Touching "COLD" key will initiate a restart to delete the remaining image queue. After touching this key, a dia-
logue box will appear to confirm the selection.
2) VERSION
Displays the version No. of the software for main, mechanical control, print unit, control section.
3) CLEAR TOTAL FILM DATA
Clears the number of films (total film data) printed before.
4) FORCED OUTPUT
This is a switch to output films forcefully. When this key is touched while the queue remains, printing starts.
Also, the display changes from "OFF" to "ON". When touching this key again while ON is displayed, the display
changes to OFF, and printing stops.

6.1 Service Screens
1) UPPER TRAY/LOWER TRAY

Displays the initial data of the film obtained in the form of the bar code.
Also, use this screen when you need to change the film data.
2) FILM EMPTY ERROR RESET

Select [125] when different films are to be used in the upper and lower trays. If films of the same size and type
are to be used, select [250]. The timing in sending a Film Empty Error message from DRYPRO 722 to the mo-
dality side (including Printlink) will differ according to this setting.
125: The message is sent when one of the trays becomes empty.
250: The message is sent when both trays become empty.
The Film Empty Error will be handled differently on the modality side according to the modality. Error Reset is
required for Printlink.

6.1 Service Screens
6.1.5 SERVICE 4/4 screen

When DRYPRO 722 is under the following conditions, the keys on the screen are shaded, disallowing you to use
them.
• When the sorter is not connected
• During print
• When the images to be printed remain
1) FIRST BIN
Select whether the sorter bin number is assigned starting from the top bin (TOP) or the bottom bin (BOTTOM).
2) TEST PRINT OUTPUT

Select whether the test print, calibration film, dummy film, etc. exits into the top bin (TOP) or the bottom bin
(BOTTOM).

6.2 CORRECT Screen
Touching the "CORRECT" key on the SERVICE 1/4 screen will display the CORRECT screen. On this screen, you
can correct the irregularity in density.
Refer to "3.9.1 Correcting irregularities in pitch and density of left and right sides" as to the procedure of correcting
irregularities.(See p.3-58)
• CORRECT screen
Key Function
ST16A Touching this key, then the "PRINT" key will print out the test pattern for checking
the pitch irregularity (phase) that is effected by the density value of [TEST GAIN]
displayed on the right of this key.
ST16B Touching this key, then the "PRINT" key will print out the test pattern for checking
the pitch irregularity (gain) that is effected by the correction value of [PHASE] dis-
played on the right of this key.
ST16C Touching this key, then the "PRINT" key will print out the test pattern for checking
the difference of the density between the right and left that is effected by the correc-
tion value of [GAIN] displayed on the right of this key.
ST16D Touching this key, then the "PRINT" key will print out the test pattern for the final
check of the filled-in image that is effected by the correction value of [OFF SET] dis-
played on the right of this key.
PRINT For printing out the test pattern film that is effected by the correction value of each
correction. Touching this key will display the CORRECTION PRINT screen.
LEFT, CENTER, RIGHT For selecting and displaying the correction value of each correction for each film
area.
/ For increasing and decreasing the selected correction value.
PARAMETER SET For displaying the PARAMETER SET screen for finalizing each correction value by
one operation. In this case, the test pattern is not printed out. Use this key when you
know the correction value in advance.
EXIT For terminating the CORRECT screen.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to print out the test pattern when you change the correction values displayed
on the right of ST16A to ST16D. If the CORRECT screen is terminated without printing
out the test pattern, the correction values are not changed.

6.2 CORRECT Screen
• CORRECT PRINT screen

Touching the "PRINT" key on the CORRECT screen will display the CORRECT PRINT screen.
Key Function
UPPER TRAY Outputs the film on the upper tray.
LOWER TRAY Outputs the film on the lower tray.
EXIT Stops outputting the films.
• PARAMETER SET screen

Touching the "PARAMETER SET" key on the "CORRECT" screen will display the PARAMETER SET screen.
Key Function
SET Finalizes the displayed correction values.
/ Increases or decreases the selected correction value.
LEFT, CENTER, RIGHT Selects and displays the correction value of each correction for each film area.
EXIT Terminates the PARAMETER SET screen without finalizing the correction value.

6.3 Test Pattern Screen
Touching the "TEST PATTERN" key on the SERVICE 1/4 screen will display the TEST PATTERN screen.
• TEST PATTERN screen
Key Function
SMPTE Touching this key, then the "PRINT" key will print out the SMPTE pattern of the
frame number displayed on the right of this key.
Touching this key, then the or key will change the frame number of the SMPTE
pattern.
• Setting values: 1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15
Even when changing the setting for the number of frames, it will not be reflected to
the printed number of frames using the [TEST PRINT] key in the maintenance
screen. (Fixed at four frames.)
/ Increases or decreases the frame number of the SMPTE pattern.
FLAT Touching this key, then the "PRINT" key will print out the flat pattern (contact
DENSITY image) of the amount of laser light displayed on the right of this key.
Touching this key, then the "0" to "9" key will change the amount of laser light of the
flat pattern.
• Setting range: 0 to 4095 (AOM value)
CHAR Touching this key, then the "PRINT" key will print out the character pattern. The
value on the right side of this key is not applied. This is not commonly used when
performing service.
FLAME Touching this key, then the "PRINT" key will print out the FRAME patterns.
DENSITY (The figure on the right of this key is not used.)
LI / FL Touching this key, then the "PRINT" key will print out the LI/FL patterns.
(This key is not used for a service purpose.)
WEDGE Touching this key, then the "PRINT" key will print out the wedge pattern (This key is
used to check the amount of laser light or the maximum density.)
PRINT This key is for printing out the test pattern film.
Touching this key will display the TEST PATTERN PRINT screen.
OK Touching this key finalizes the changed set value, and terminates the TEST PAT-
TERN screen.
EXIT Terminates the TEST PATTERN screen without finalizing the changed set values.

6.3 Test Pattern Screen
• TEST PATTERN PRINT screen

Touching the "PRINT" key on the TEST PATTERN screen will display the TEST PATTERN PRINT screen.
Key Function
UPPER TRAY Outputs the film on the upper tray.
LOWER TRAY Outputs the film on the lower tray.
EXIT Stops outputting the films.

6.4 Version Scereen
Touching the "VERSION" key on the SERVICE 2/4 screen will display the VERSION screen.
By touching the arrow key on the upper right corner on the screen, you can move to the IP address display.
• VERSION screen (Version display)
• VERSION screen (IP address display)

6.5 Flow Chart of Service Screens
MAINTENANCE MENU Screen
Pressing "OFF LINE" on the upper left for 3 sec.

switches to SERVICE 1/4 screen.
SERVICE 1/4 screen CORRECT screen CORRECTPRINT screen
PARAMETER SET screen
TEST PATTERN screen TEST PATTERN PRINT
Continued

6.5 Flow Chart of Service Screens
Continued from
the previous page
SERVICE 2/4 screen COLD START screen
SERVICE 3/4 screen

VERSION screen VERSION screen
SERVICE 4/4 screen

Chapter 7
Maintenance PC
7.1 Connecting and Starting Mechanical Control Maintenance PC . . . 7-1

7.1.1 Connecting maintenance PC and DRYPRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.2 Starting mechanical control maintenance PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2 Description on Screens of Mechanical Control Maintenance PC . . 7-5
7.2.1 Title screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.2 Menu screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.3 Unit test menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.4 Unit test; Overall transport test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.2.5 Unit test; Supply test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.2.6 Unit test; Lower transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.2.7 Unit test; Elevator transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.2.8 Unit test; Heat processing - Discharge section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.2.9 Unit test; Sorter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.2.10 Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.2.11 Setup; Nip pressure SOL value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.2.12 Setup; Pusher motor value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.2.13 Setup; Optical DD motor value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.2.14 Setup; Elevator transport motor value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7.2.15 Setup; Heat roller motor value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.2.16 Setup; Discharge motor value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.2.17 Setup; Supply processing value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7.2.18 Setup; Lower transport tray processing value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.2.19 Setup; Sorter processing value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.2.20 Setup; Saving setup data in file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.2.21 Counter display; Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.2.22 Counter display; Operation time display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.2.23 Counter display; Film data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.2.24 Load test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.2.25 Input port display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7.2.26 RAM clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7.2.27 Error count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.2.28 Error log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7.2.29 Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.2.30 Dummy communication (HPRO dummy communication) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7.3 Connecting Mechanical Control Maintenance PC to Network . . 7-51
7.3.1 Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7.3.2 Scripts and commands of Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7.3.3 Initializing the set file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7.3.4 Backing up the set file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7.3.5 Restoring the set files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7.3.6 Collecting log files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
7.3.7 Clearing the log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7.3.8 Check control of film type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7.3.9 Displaying the sum of films. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
7.3.10 Displaying the filter exchange time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
7.4 Install Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.4.1 Before starting install software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.4.2 Main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
7.4.3 File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7.4.4 Software menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
7.4.5 Reset menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
7.4.6 Maintenance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
7.4.7 Help menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
7.4.8 System screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
7.4.9 System dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
7.4.10 Channel setting screen 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
7.4.11 Channel setting screen 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
7.4.12 SCU-DICOM dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
7.4.13 SCU-Film dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
7.4.14 SCU-Format dialogue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
7.4.15 SCU-LUT dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
7.4.16 Stamp setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
7.4.17 SCU-Stamp-Strings dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
7.4.18 SCU-Stamp-Information dialogue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
7.4.19 SCU-Stamp-Format dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
7.4.20 Correction screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
7.4.21 Correction-Smooth dialogue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
7.1 Connecting and Starting Mechanical Control Maintenance PC
7.1.1 Connecting maintenance PC and DRYPRO
1 Touch [OPERATION OFF] in the control panel

unit.
2 Clip the grounding strap to the metal portion

of the main unit, and wrap the other end
around your wrist.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to wrap the
grounding strap around
your wrist in order to pro-
tect the board circuit.
Grounding strap

4 Disconnect the following cable connector of
the hard disk from the main CPU circuit CN11
board.
· JP106
IMPORTANT: To protect the hard disk, be
sure to disconnect the
cable connector. When the
mechanical control mainte- Cable connector
nance PC is connected, the
main unit may be turned
OFF while the hard disk is
being written on.
5 Disconnect the following power cable connec-

tor of the hard disk from the power I/F board. Main CPU circuit board
· ICN4


main CPU circuit board mounting panel. Maintenance PC
· JP32
7 Connect the serial port of the maintenance

PC to the connector (JP32) that has been dis-
connected in Step 5, with the cable for the
maintenance PC.
· JP32 can be connected directly to the serial port of
the maintenance PC if a mechanical control mainte- 2
nance cable is not available.

release key. 1
· By setting the interlock release key, the interlock of
the outer covers is closed. 2
JP32
Maintenance cable for mechanical control

7.1.2 Starting mechanical control maintenance PC
CAUTION: The mechanical control main-

tenance PC sometimes cannot
communicate properly with the
mechanical control when it is
activated with MS-DOS prompt
of Windows95 or 98.
1 Confirm that the maintenance PC is con-
nected properly. (See p.7-1)

3 Turn ON the power of the maintenance PC
while pressing the F8 key.
· The Startup Menu of Microsoft Windows will
appear.
4 Press the “6” key (command prompt only) and

Enter key.
· The maintenance PC will activate from the MS-DOS
mode.
5 Insert the “MEC PC” floppy disk in the floppy

disk drive of the maintenance PC.
6 Move the current drive to A\.

7 Move the current directory to \MecPCV121. C:\>A:
A:\>cd \MecPCV121
A:\MecPCV121\>ki18pcv
8 Activate ki18pcv.
· The mechanical control maintenance PC will acti-
vate and the activate screen will appear.
9 Check the activate screen.

10 Press the ESC key when an error message

appears in the upper section of the screen
such as when the outer cover is open.
IMPORTANT: If the system of the
mechanical control is V1.02
or earlier, a communica-
tion error (data length
abnormality) will occur
upon activating the
mechanical control mainte-
nance PC (V1.11). This
error is caused by the dif-
ference in the mechanical
control software specifica-
tions. Press the ESC key
and release the error.

7.2 Description on Screens of Mechanical Control Maintenance PC
Attention: The names of the parts and functions displayed on the mechanical maintenance PC might be
different from those displayed on the service manual.
7.2.1 Title screen
This screen shows the version No. of programs.

1) PC Displays the mechanical control maintenance PC version and date.
2) SYSTEM Displays the mechanical control software (firmware) version and date (not
displayed in the above figure).
Normally, it displays as shown below.
SYSTEM1 Vx.xx JAN.01.00
SYSTEM2 Vx.xx JAN.01.00
SYSTEM means the program stored in Flash ROM.
3) BOOT Displays the mechanical control software (firmware) version, and date (not
displayed in the above figure) when it is downloaded from EPROM. BOOT
is a program stored in EPROM. If the flash ROM program (SYSTEM)
doesn’t work for some reasons, install EPROM on the mechanical control cir-
cuit board and start it up from EPROM, then download the mechanical con-
trol software to the flash ROM.
4) [MAIN POWER ON!!] The mechanical control and the maintenance PC are not connected or the
power of DRYPRO 722 is not ON.
5) [WAIT] The maintenance PC is waiting for a response from the mechanical control. If
the screen does not change from this message, there may be an abnormality
in the mechanical control or the connection of the communication cable be-
tween the maintenance PC and mechanical control may be inappropriate.
• Disconnect connector JP106 from the main CPU circuit board and connector ICN4 from the power I/F board
so as a caution indicates in the upper screen. (See p.7-1)

7.2.2 Menu screen
1) UNIT TEST Displays the operation tests for the entire device and each unit (the supply
section, the lower transport section, the heat processing (HPRO) / discharge
section, the sorter, etc.), and the current status of sensors, etc.
2) SET UP Displays or changes the parameter of each operating sequence.
3) COUNTER Displays an operation time while the mechanical control maintenance PC is
connected.
4) LOAD TEST Turns ON/OFF each motor and solenoid, etc.
5) *BOARD TEST Do not use.
6) INPUT PORT Displays the current input port.
7) RAM CLEAR Clears the specified RAM. However, the setup data is initialized to ROM
constant (default).
8) *COMMUNICATION TEST Do not use.
9) *ERROR COUNT Displays error counts while the mechanical control maintenance PC is
connected.
A) *ERROR LOG Displays error logs while the mechanical control maintenance PC is
connected.
B) *MEMORY READ/WRITE Do not use.
C) DOWNLOAD Upgrades the mechanical control software (firmware).
D) DUMMY COMMUNICATION Communicates with the heat processing section.
E) TERMINATE Terminates the mechanical control maintenance PC.
• (Key Operation)
• Input the item code (1-E) to move the cursor.
• Press the Return key to execute the selected item.
• Select [E. TERMINATE] to terminate a program.

7.2.3 Unit test menu
1) OVERALL UNITS TEST Performs a transport test from the supply section to the discharge section.
2) SUPPLY UNIT TEST Performs a transport test in the supply section.
3) LOWER TRANS UNIT TEST Performs a transport test from the front transport section to the exposure
unit.
4) ELEVATOR TRANS UNIT TEST Performs a transport test in the elevator transport section.
5) HPS TO DCS TEST Performs a transport test from the heat processing section to the discharge
section.
6) SORTER TEST Performs the transport test on the sorter (option).
• (Key Operation)
• Press the “↑”, “↓” key or input the item code (1-5) to move the cursor.
• Press the ESC key to return to the main menu.

7.2.4 Unit test; Overall transport test
On this screen, you can perform a transport test (supply pick up operation - sorter discharge operation).
1) BIN NO.
Displays the bin numbers of the sorter (option) into which the film exits,
starting from the bottom bin. ("0" and "1" show the bottom bin.)
2) P-UP RETRIED (Counts from 0 to 255.)
1: Displays the count of a situation in which a film does not reach to the
transport roller.
2: Displays the count of a situation in which more than one film are
picked up and transported to the transport roller.
3: Displays the retry counts of picking up the current film.
3) P-UP RETRY COUNT Displays the sum of retry counts of picking up a film after RAM is cleared.
The retry count shows in values from 1 to 9. This value is counted from 0
to 255.
4) BAR CODE VALUE Displays the value read by each of the upper and lower supply unit trays.
5) TEST SH Displays the number of films which will be transported for test.
6) SEL COV Used to open/close the outer covers.
SUP COV: Front Cover
LEFT COV: Left Cover
TOP COV: Top Cover
SET COV: Set (Outer cover operation completed.)
7) STATUS Displays the input/output status of the upper and lower supply unit trays
and the lower transport-elevator transport section and the heat processing-
discharge section.
• (Key Operation)
Key Display Function
F2 F-SIZE Changes the film size. Auto-change by reading bar code is not carried out.

F3 TRAY Changes upper/lower supply unit trays. At the same time, film size will be changed
according to each tray. The bar code data will also be changed.
F4 INIT(IAL) Performs whole initialization. Discharges all films remaining in DRYPRO.
F5 TRANS Starts film transportation.

(PORT)
F6 2SH ON Selects use/not use of 2-sheet detection. (When not used, the message “2 SH SEN
OFF” is displayed on the screen.)
Use/Not Use of 2-sheet detect
F7 ER RST Resets the error. (Press this key after clearing the errors by pressing the ESC key at the
occurrence of errors.)
F8 SHEETS Input the number of films to be transported. (Input numbers 0 to 9 in the place (Film
sheets) where the cursor is blinking.)
F9 SHU C Closes the shutter of each upper/lower supply.
F10 COVER Specifies the outer cover to be opened. Each press changes the display as shown
below.
Selection of the outer covers
Shift+F10 COVER Opens the specified outer cover. “COV OPN” is displayed. Be sure to select and exe-
OPEN/CLOSE cute “Set” after closing the outer cover. When "Set" is executed, “SEL COV” is dis-
played.
Display during outer cover operations
DEL ALL SENS Changes the lighting status of the sensor LED. (OFF–>ON–>Blinking)
Back space BIN NO. Set the bin numbers of the sorter into which the film exits. Each press changes the bin
numbers from 0 to 5. When the sorter is not connected, the numbers does not change.

ROLL UP/ Status display Changes the status display.

ROLL DOWN (Upper supply → Lower supply → Lower transport - Elevator transport → Heat pro-
cessing - Discharge → Sorter)
Lower Supply Status Lower transport – Elevator transport Status
HPRO – Discharge Status Sorter Status
INS HPRO board Turns ON/OFF the HPRO board. (The power status is displayed on the lower part of
the screen when the HPRO - Discharge status is displayed.)
• If the power of the HPRO board is not turned ON, that of the other power-
driven units won’t be turned ON. Be sure to turn ON the HPRO board when
the other power-driven units are operated for each task. Besides, HPRO
board should be turned ON when carrying out an initialization of whole trans-
port unit test and error reset.
ESC Cancels the error when an error occurs. (A blue bar on top of the screen will be blink-
ing white and an error message will be displayed.) Besides, terminates the test and
returns to the unit test menu.

• Key Operation during Transportation
F5 TRANS Adds the number of films to be scanned.

(PORT)
ESC Stops the transportation forcefully. During transportation, a message with a green col-
ored frame, “TESTING. STP BY ESC” will be displayed.
Display during transportation

7.2.5 Unit test; Supply test
On this screen, you can perform the unit test in the supply transport section. When performing the test after detach-
ing the supply transport unit, set DIPSW (S1) No. 4 of the mechanical control board ON.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to return the DIPSW (S1) to the original position after finishing the test.
1) BAR CODE VALUE Displays each value which is read by each upper/lower supply.
2) BAR CODE CMD Sets and displays the command which is sent to the bar code reader.
3) BAR CODE SET COM Displays the command which can be used (is required to set) on
DRYPRO 722.
4) LOOPBK VAL Not used at service.
• (Key Operation)
F2 SIZE Changes the film size. Auto-change by reading bar code is not carried out.
F3 SUPPLY Changes upper/lower supply unit trays. At the same time, film size will be changed
according to each tray. The bar code data will also be changed.
F4 INIT(IAL) Initializes the supply transport section. If a film stays at 2-sheet detector, it will be
transported. A suction cup moves to the home position and the shutter opens.

F5 PICKUP Performs a pick up operation. (Until the film reaches the transport roller.)
F6 TRANS Transport roller rotates and transports films.

(PORT)
F7 STEP Changes pickup operations by each press in the following order.

Suction stop valve, pump ON position → sucker release position → sucker release
position → sucker home position and film nip .
F9 OPEN Opens the shutter, moves the suction cup to the home position. Checks whether any
films are remaining in the transport roller or not (if any, they should be transported),
and closes the shutter.
F10 F SET Opens the shutter, takes up the package, and reads the bar code.
DEL ALL SENS Changes the lighting status of the sensor LED. (OFF–>ON–>Blinking).
ROLL UP/ STATUS Changes the status display.

the screen when the Lower transport - Elevator transport status is displayed.)
ESC Releases the error when an error occurs. (A blue bar on top of the screen will be blink-
TAB Changes among the function keys.
• Function keys that are changed by the TAB key
F3 TRAY Changes upper/lower supply tray. At the same time, film size will be changed accord-
ing to each tray.
F4 CR COM A cursor is flashing at the bar code CMD. Input the command which is displayed in the
bar code setting command box. Press the Return key to set the command.
F5 SD COM Sends the set bar code CMD to the bar code reader.
F6 SHUT-H The shutter arm moves to the home position.

F7 SHUT-O The shutter arm moves to the open position.
F8 SHUT-C The shutter arm moves to the close position.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to return the shutter arm to the home position by pressing
the “SHUT-H” after performing “SHUT-O” and “SHUT-C”. Pulling the
tray out without returning the shutter arm to the home position may
damage the shutter arm.
F9 PKG-MT Takes up the barrier package.
F10 LOOPBK Not used at service
• Key operations during transport

7.2.6 Unit test; Lower transport section
On this screen, you can perform the unit test from the front transport – exposure section.
• (Key Operation)
F3 TRAY Changes upper/lower supply unit trays. At the same time, film size will be changed
according to each tray.
F4 INIT(IAL) Initializes the lower transport section. Moves Pusher to the home position, and moves
the lower transport tray to the tilt position.
F5 TRANS Transports the films in the lower transport section.

(PORT) (Front transport section–>Lower transport tray–>Pusher–>Exposure)
F10 EL ON Turns ON the elevator transport motor with low speed.

When pressed once again, the motor will be stopped.
ROLL UP/ STATUS Changes the status display.


the screen when the HPRO-Discharge status is displayed.)
• Key Operation During Transportation

7.2.7 Unit test; Elevator transport section
On this screen, you can perform the unit test in the elevator transport section.
• (Key Operation)
F3 SUPPLY Changes upper/lower supply unit trays. At the same time, film size will be changed
according to each tray.
F4 INIT(IAL) Initializes the elevator transport section. An elevator nip moves to the open position.
F5 TRANS Transports the films in the elevator transport section. (Elevator nip close–>End of ele-
(PORT) vator transport)
ROLL UP / STATUS Changes the status display.


the screen when the HPRO - discharge section status is displayed.)
ESC Cancels the error when an error occurs. (A blue bar on top of the screen will be blink-

7.2.8 Unit test; Heat processing - Discharge section
On this screen, you can perform the transport test in the heat processing - discharge section.
• (Key Operation)
F4 INIT(IAL) Initializes the heat processing – discharge section.
F5 TRANS Transports the films in the heat processing – discharge section.

(PORT)

the screen when the HPRO - discharge section status is displayed.)

ESC Stops the transportation forcefully. During transportation, a message with a green
colored frame, “TESTING. STP BY ESC” will be displayed.

7.2.9 Unit test; Sorter
On this screen, you can perform the transport test on the sorter.
• (Key Operation)
F2 ON Allows the sorter to be used.
F3 OFF Disallows the connected sorter to be operated.
F4 INIT(IAL) Initializes the sorter.

Checks whether the film remains or not.
F5 BIN1 Transports the film in the sorter.

Bin No. 1 (the bottom bin)

Bin No. 2

Bin No. 3

Bin No. 4

Bin No. 5 (the top bin)

DEL ALL SENS Changes the lighting status of the sensor LED. (OFF → ON → Blinking)

the screen when the HPRO-Discharge status is displayed.)
the other power-driven units are operated for each unit test. Besides, HPRO

7.2.10 Setup menu
On this screen, you can display and change the set value of each operation parameter. Select the item to be set from
the menu.
• Key Operation
• Press the “↑”, “↓” key or input the item code (1-A) to move the cursor.
IMPORTANT: When you change the set value, follow the procedure in “7.2.20 Setup; Saving setup
data in file". A file of “Setup.dat” will be created in the folder where the command file
of the maintenance PC, “ki18pcv.exe” is saved. Do not change the file name of
“Setup.dat”; otherwise, it won’t be read.

7.2.11 Setup; Nip pressure SOL value
On this screen, you can display and change the set value of the sub-transport roller nip pressure control.
IMPORTANT: This constant value will affect the image quality (inconsistencies from transport) sig-
nificantly. Be extremely careful to change the value.
• (Key Operation)
• Press the ”↑”, ”↓” key or Return key in order to select the item.
• Input a value from the numeric keypad. If the input value exceeds the range of min - max, a beep will sound
to reject the input value.
• When the final item is selected and the Return key is pressed, a message “Store? Y/N” will be displayed.
• Select the “Y” key: An input value is stored and the screen returns to the setup menu.
• Select the “N” key: An input value is not stored and the screen returns to the setup menu.
• Select the ESC key to abort the setup and return to the setup menu. In this case, changed value is not stored.

7.2.12 Setup; Pusher motor value
On this screen, you can display and change the set value of the push pin motor control.
IMPORTANT: This constant value will affect the image quality (inconsistencies from transport) and
the processing speed significantly. Be extremely careful to change the value.
MIN (minimum value), MAX (maximum value), and TYP (typical value) are displayed on the right side of the
screen.
• (Key Operation)

7.2.13 Setup; Optical DD motor value
On this screen, you can display and change the set value of the optical DD motor control.
IMPORTANT: This value will affect the image quality (inconsistencies from transport)
significantly. Be extremely careful to change the value.
screen.
• (Key Operation)

7.2.14 Setup; Elevator transport motor value
On this screen, you can display and change the set value of the elevator transport motor control.
IMPORTANT: This value will affect the image quality (inconsistencies from processing) significantly.
Be extremely careful to change the value.
screen.
• (Key Operation)

7.2.15 Setup; Heat roller motor value
On this screen, you can display and change the set value of the heat roller motor control.
IMPORTANT: This value will affect the image quality (inconsistencies from processing) significantly.
Be extremely careful to change the value.
screen.
• (Key Operation)

7.2.16 Setup; Discharge motor value
On this screen, you can display and change the set value of the discharge motor control.
IMPORTANT: This value will affect the cooling of films and the processing speed significantly. Be
extremely careful to change the value.
screen.
• (Key Operation)

7.2.17 Setup; Supply processing value
On this screen, you can display and change the set value of the transport control in the supply section.
IMPORTANT: This value will affect the transport from the supply section significantly. Be extremely
careful to change the value.
screen.
• (Key Operation)

7.2.18 Setup; Lower transport tray processing value
On this screen, you can display and change the set value of the transport from the lower transport tray control.
IMPORTANT: This value will affect the storage of films in the lower transport tray significantly. Be
screen.
• (Key Operation)

7.2.19 Setup; Sorter processing value
On this screen, you can display and change the bin number into which the film that remains in the sorter exits during
the initial operation. As for the bin number, "1" is assigned to the bottom bin, and "5" to the top bin.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to make this setting when upgrading to Ver1.21 (Ver1.22 ; main unit).
• (Key Operation)
• When the final item is selected and the Return key is pressed, a message "Store? Y/N" will be displayed.
• Select the "Y" key: An input value is stored and the screen returns to the setup menu.
• Select the "N" key: An input value is not stored and the screen returns to the setup menu.

7.2.20 Setup; Saving setup data in file
On this screen, you can save the setup data in the file, and load the setup data from the file.
• (Key Operation)
• Select the “Y” key: Files are saved or loaded.
• Select the “N” key or ESC key: The screen returns to the setup menu.
IMPORTANT: The setup data will be saved in the folder where the command file of the maintenance
PC, “ki18pcv.exe”, is saved. The file name will be “setup. dat”. Do not change the file
name; otherwise, it won’t be read.

7.2.21 Counter display; Menu
On this screen, you can display the counter of each item and select the counter display item.
• (Key operation)
• Press the "↑", "↓" key or input the item number (1-2) to move the cursor.

7.2.22 Counter display; Operation time display
On this screen, you can display the time of the transport section of each unit when the mechanical control mainte-
nance PC is connected. The operation time display does not include errors. Average frequency of process from the
last startup is displayed in the “Average”. This value will be cleared at startup.
• (Key Operation)
• Press the ↑ key to display PAGE 1,the ↓ key to display PAGE 2.
• Press the ESC key to terminate the operation time display and to return to the counter display / menu.

7.2.23 Counter display; Film data
On this screen, you can display and change the number of the film sheets remaining on the upper and lower supply
unit trays.
Also, you can confirm the bar code data on the upper and lower supply unit trays.
• (Key Operation)
F1 UT F/S Changes the number of the films remaining on the upper supply unit tray.
F2 LT F/S Changes the number of the films remaining on the lower supply unit tray.
F9 SAVE Saves the film data

Saved data
•Film size (Can be changed in the unit test.)
•Film type (Can be changed in the unit test.)
•The number of remaining films
•Bar code data (Can be confirmed in the unit test.)
•Pick-up retried (Can be confirmed in the unit test and reset with the RAM clear.)
•Pick-up retry counts (Can be confirmed in the unit test and reset with the RAM clear.)
IMPORTANT: A "221 Film data broken" error that may occur when
connecting the maintenance PC can be released per-
forming a SAVE operation.

F10 LOAD Loads the saved film data from the file.
IMPORTANT: The film data will be saved in the folder where the command file of the mechanical
control maintenance PC, "ki18pcv.exe", is saved. The file name will be "film.dat". Do
not change the file name; otherwise, it won’t be read.

7.2.24 Load test
Load test

On these screens, you can perform the load test of unit by unit or multiple units. The frequency of operation and
error are displayed. A unit under the load test is marked with “*”.
CAUTION: Keep your clothing away from moving parts in order to avoid any injury caused by getting
caught in moving parts.
CAUTION: Once the operation test starts, the power is supplied to the HPRO board (heater). Be careful
not to suffer an electrical shock by touching a brush of the drum in the HPRO section.
CAUTION: Be extremely careful in performing this test because it may damage the device if the test
is improper.
• (Key Operation)
• Press "↑”, “↓” key to select the item.
• Press “Y” key for the power-driven unit to be functioned (“YES” is displayed); “N” key for the power-driven
unit not to be functioned (“NO” is displayed).
• Once the Return key is pressed, the operation starts and continues until the Return key is pressed again or one
step is finished.
• Under continuous operation, it starts after the Return key is pressed and continues until the Return key is
pressed again.
• Once the “N” key is pressed to change the display to “NO” for the item in operation, the operation won’t stop
even if the Return key is pressed afterward.
• F2 key (CONT):Switches between 1 time/continuous.

• F4 key (HI/LOW):Changes the motor speed.
• ESC key:Stops the load operation and returns to the menu.

• The following motors cannot be operated at the same time
Shutter motor (M7) Sucker motor (M10)
Film transport motor (M8)
Barrier taking-up (M9)
Sucker motor (M10) Film transport motor (M8)
Barrier taking-up motor (M9)
Film transport motor (M8) Barrier taking-up motor (M9)
Tilt tray motor (M1) Pusher motor (PM1)
When you try to operate the above motors at the same time,the motor that is selected later does not operate.
The shutter motor (M7) does not operate when the sucker is not at the home position.

7.2.25 Input port display
On this screen, you can display the status of input ports. Each bit of input ports is displayed using 1 or 0. “S14”
shows IC4 in the upper supply section, and “S21” shows IC1 in the lower supply section. P0 to PG are the ports of
the mechanical control CPU.
• Each bit of 8bit number corresponds to d0-d7 from the right.
• “0” is displayed when a port is not detected.
• The bit which is changed last is highlighted and the signal name is displayed.
• Correspondence of bit and sensor
S14 d0 2-sheet emitter / receiver (upper) (one or two sheet(s) of Clear type)
d1 2-sheet emitter / receiver (upper) (two sheets of Clear type only)
d2 2-sheet emitter / receiver (upper) (one or two sheet(s) of DR blue)
d3 2-sheet emitter / receiver (upper) (two sheets of DR blue only)
d4 –
d5 Shutter close (upper) (PS25)
d6 Shutter open (upper) (PS24)
d7 Tray set (upper) (PS23)

S13 d0 Sucker separation (upper) (PS22)
d1 Sucker home position (upper) (PS21)
d2 Sucker release (upper) (PS20)
d3 Shutter home position (upper) (PS19)
d4 Film empty (upper) (SBU2U)
d5 –
d6 2-sheet emitter / receiver (upper) (one or two sheet(s)of blue)
d7 2-sheet emitter / receiver (upper) (two sheets of blue only)
S24 d0 2-sheet emitter / receiver (lower) (one or two sheet(s) of Clear type)
d1 2-sheet emitter / receiver (lower) (two sheets of Clear type only)
d2 2-sheet emitter / receiver (lower) (one or two sheet(s) of DR blue)
d3 2-sheet emitter / receiver (lower) (two sheets of DR blue only)
d4 –
d5 Shutter close (lower) (PS25)
d6 Shutter open (lower) (PS24)
d7 Tray set (lower) (PS23)
S23 d0 Sucker separation (lower) (PS22)
d1 Sucker home position (lower) (PS21)
d2 Suction stop (lower) (PS20)
d3 Shutter home position (lower) (PS19)
d4 Film empty (lower) (SBU2U)
d5 –
d6 2-sheet emitter / receiver (lower) (one or two sheet(s) of blue)
d7 2-sheet emitter / receiver (lower) (two sheets of blue only)
S22 d0-d7 –
S21 d0-d7 –
S34 d0 –
d1 –
d2 Sorter film jam detection LED
d3 Sorter solenoid 2 (SOL2)
d5 Sorter motor

S33 d0 –
d1 –
d2 Sorter right cover detection
d3 Sorter entrance guide and Sorter guide plate detection
d4 –
d5 –
d6 Sorter film jam detection
d7 Sorter film jam detection
S32 d0-d7 –
S31 d0-d7 –
P0 d0-d7 –
P1 d0 –
d1 Interlock for all outer covers
d2-d7 –
P2 d0 Cover interlock release (MS2)
d3 Nip roller home position (PS5)
d4 Pusher limit (PS4)
d5 Pusher home position (PS3)
d6 Tilt tray home position (PS2)
d7 Lower transport section entrance (PS1)
PT d0 –
d1 Densitometer entrance (PS8)
d2 HPRO section entrance (PS6)
d3 Nip roller film pass (SB2)
d4 V-sync upper (SB4)
d5 V-sync lower (SB3)
d6 Tilt tray film (SB1)
d7 Front transport section film pass (PS7)

PA d0 –
d1 –
d2 Top cover interlock (S4)
d3 Left cover interlock (S2)
d4 –
d5 Forcible shut down (Connected with Start switch S1)
d6 Lower cover interlock (S3)
d7 Front cover interlock (S5)
PB d0 Digital switch S1-4 (S1-4)
d1 Digital switch S1-3 (S1-3)

d4 FILTER set (PS18)
d5 – d7 –
• (Key Operation)
• ESC key: Terminates the input port display, and returns to the menu.
• F1 key (Transmitter): Changes the lighting status of the sensors.
• Press “Y” key to set “YES” (light ON); “N” key to set “NO” (light OFF). Press Return key to execute.

7.2.26 RAM clear
On this screen, you can initialize the data in the specified RAM.
1) WORK MEMORY Initializes the memory used in the program, and reboots the program.
2) SET UP DATA Initializes the setup data to the ROM constant value.
3) OPERATION TIME Clears the operation time.
4) INITIAL DATA Initializes the following data.
(The use/not use of the supply unit and the sorter is changed to “use” by
initializing it.)
• Pick-up retry count
• Pick-up retried, use/not use of the supply section
• Use/not use of the sorter
5) BLANK Does not function in this version. Do not use it.
6) ERROR COUNT Clears the error counts and error log.
7) DRIVER COUNT Clears the frequency of the load test.
8) ALL MEMORIES Initializes all items.
IMPORTANT: The work memory is cleared in all items.
• (Key Operation)
• Press the “↑”, “↓” key or numeric keys to select an item.
• Press “Y” key to set “YES” (clear); “N” key to set “NO” (not clear).
• Press the ESC key to terminate the RAM Clear and return to the menu.
• Press the Return key ten times to execute the selected item.

7.2.27 Error count
On this screen, you can display the error counts while the mechanical control maintenance PC is connected. The
error count can be reset by selecting “ERROR COUNT” from the RAM CLEAR menu.
• (Key Operation)
• Press the “↑”, “↓” key to scroll the screen.
• Press the ESC key to terminate the Error Count and return to the menu.

7.2.28 Error log
On this screen, you can display the error log while the mechanical control maintenance PC is connected. The error
which occurs while the maintenance PC is connected will be displayed in order of date. (last 100 errors)
The error log can be reset by selecting “ERROR COUNT” from the RAM CLEAR menu.
• (Key Operation)
• Press the “↑”, “↓” key to scroll the screen.
• Press the ESC key to terminate the Error Log and return to the menu.

7.2.29 Download
On this screen, you can download the mechanical control software (system program for mechanical control).
Also you can upgrade the mechanical control software. When download starts, the program addresses (08000 to
0DFFFF) being written are displayed.
When download is complete, a beep sounds, and message “Download is successful” appears.
For details on how to download the software, refer to "8.3 Upgrading the mechanical control software".
IMPORTANT: Be sure to save the setup data in a file from the [Saving Setup Data] screen under the
[Setup Menu] and save the film data in a file from the [Counter Display/Film Data]
screen before downloading.
IMPORTANT: There are cases in which the values of the setup data become abnormal due to
upgrading, etc. Press the start switch of the main unit for five seconds or longer to
turn OFF the power, then turn the power ON again to reboot the main unit. Also be
sure to check the setup data after downloading.
• (Key Operation)
• Insert the system disk into the drive that is specified on the screen (the drive that starts up the mechanical con-
trol maintenance PC), and press “Y” key to start downloading. (This does not matter when the mechanical
control maintenance PC is started up from the hard disk.)
• Press the ESC key to abort the download. (The message “Download failed” is displayed.) In this case, BOOT
is executed on the DRYPRO program.
IMPORTANT: Avoid to abort the download as much as possible; otherwise, the program in the Flash
ROM may be damaged. If it is damaged, the EPROM is required.

7.2.30 Dummy communication (HPRO dummy communication)
On this screen, you can perform the communication with the HPRO through the mechanical control maintenance
PC as the main dummy. Change of the HPRO setting (data transfer) or check (received data) can be performed.
CAUTION: When the HPRO dummy communication screen is displayed, the power is supplied to the
HPRO board (heater). Be careful not to suffer an electrical shock by touching a brush of
the HPRO drum.
IMPORTANT: The settings of the HPRO section will affect the image processing significantly. Be
• (Key Operation)
F1 SET Film size and offset value can be set. Input the setting value using a numeric key and
execute it with the Return key, then move to the next item. Press the ESC key to move
to the next item without setting the item.
F2 OPE Sends HPRO operation setting. Receives estimated temperature control time.
F3 F-SIZE Sends HPRO film setting. Receives no signal for its command.
F4 STATUS Sends a check of HPRO status. Receives maximum temperature, minimum tempera-
ture, error code, and HPRO status, message code data from the HPRO section.
F5 RESET Sends HPRO reset command.

Receives the reception command from the HPRO section.
F6+SHIFT SET I Sends HPRO setting input data. Sends the offset value set by F1 SET, and receives the
reception command from the HPRO section.

F7 SET O Sends HPRO setting output. Receives the offset value from the HPRO section.
F8 ER CLR Sends the HPRO error clear command. Receives no signal for this command.
F9 TEMP O Sends HPRO temperature output. Receives the sensor temperature and the DT ratio
from the HPRO section.
F10+SHIFT INIT Sends the HPRO initialization command. Receives only the reception command from
the HPRO section.
ESC Terminates the HPRO dummy communication and returns to the dummy communica-
tion menu. Press the ESC key again to return to the menu.

7.3 Connecting Mechanical Control Maintenance PC to Network
By connecting the maintenance PC and the main unit (DRYPRO 722) to the network, various setting information
recorded in the hard disk of the main unit can be obtained with ftp which then can be edited or confirmed by the
maintenance PC. Furthermore, scripts and commands can be performed by logging in to the main unit using telnet.
Upgrading the main and mechanical control software is also performed from the maintenance PC.
7.3.1 Network connection
· Connect the maintenance PC to the hub in the net-

work where DRYPRO 722 is connected.
· Using "ftp" and "telnet", confirm that the mainte-
nance PC can access DRYPRO 722.
Ethernet cable
Maintenance PC
Hub
DRYPRO 722

7.3.2 Scripts and commands of Telnet
The following is a list of script/command that can be

performed from the maintenance PC using telnet. Pro-
cedures for using each script/command are described
in the following pages.
· For procedures in using [DensitoChange], refer to
"3.9.4 Correcting the densitometer correction file".
(See p.3-73)
· Input the names of the script/command using capital
letters and small letters properly.
List of telnet scripts and commands
Command / Name Remarks

Script
killp Main process Some scripts require this script to be executed to stop the main process in advance.
stop script
deldata File initializa- This script initializes the setting file of the main unit ("killp" required) (See p.7-53)
tion script
clrlog Log data delet- This script deletes the current log file. It does not delete the past log compression files.
ing script (See p.7-62)
log Log file com- This script compresses and saves the current log and the management file. (See p.7-58)
pression script
CreateCheck Updating of This command updates the check file of the setting file (reference for start-up of the
File check file main unit) to the latest one. Some scripts require this script to be executed before
rebooting the main unit.
DataBackup File backup This script backs up the setting file for replacing the hard disk. (See p.7-54)
script
DataRestore File restoring This script restores the setting file for replacing the hard disk. (See p.7-56)
script
Film Control script This script sets whether or not to check the film type with DICOM.(See p.7-63)
TypeChange of checking
film type
FilmSum Film sum data This command displays the sum of films. It is not changed even if the number of films
display com- is cleared on the control panel. (See p.7-65)
mand
PrintFilter Filter exchang- This command displays the exchanging time of the current filter.(See p.7-66)
Exchange ing time dis-
play command
Densito Densitometer This script changes the set parameters of the densitometer correction file (Ver. 1.10 or
Change correction file later only). (See p.3-73)
change script

7.3.3 Initializing the set file
Initialize the set files, such as print queue data, etc. that
are saved in the hard disk.
1 If you can operate from the control panel sec-

tion, display the service screen 2/4, and touch
[COLD]. If you cannot, follow the procedure
below.

3 Log in DRYPRO 722 with telnet.(See p.9-7)

4 Activate killp and stop the process of the main # killp
unit.
# deldata
5 Activate deldata and initialize the setting file. # shutdown -fb
6 Activate the shutdown command and shut # lo
down the main unit.


7.3.4 Backing up the set file
When the hard disk of the main DRYPRO 722 unit

must be replaced, back up the setting file inside the
hard disk to the maintenance PC.

2 Turn ON the power of DRYPRO with the start

switch.
3 Confirm the IP address of the main unit on the

service screen of the control panel.
4 Log in DRYPRO 722 using telnet.(See p.9-7)

5 Activate the DataBackup script.
· The DataBackup message will appear.
6 Input “1” and press the Enter key.

· A backup file will be created in the hard disk of the
main unit.
· The backup file will be created in the "tmp" direc-
tory, and be named "Backup xxxxxx.tgz" automati-
cally. (xxxxxx shows the date of creation of the
backup file.)
· The name of the created file and “Backup End!!”
will appear when the backup is completed.
# DataBackup
1) Do you do a data backup for the HDD exchange?
backup OK. = 1
backup cancel = Q
Enter 1 or Q > 1
a data/Init 1 Blocks
a data/FilimCollectionIndex.free 3 Blocks
a data/FilimCollectionIndex 1 Blocks
:
:
-rw-rw-rw-1 root root 1866850 Apr 19 11:36 /tmp/Backup000419.tgz
Backup End!!
7 Log in to the main unit using ftp. (See p.9-9)

8 Switch the ftp transfer mode to the binary ftp> binary

mode.
200 Type set to I.
9 Move the current directory to /temp. ftp> cd /temp
10 Send the backup file (Backup000419.tgz) 250 CWD command successful
from the main unit to the PC. ftp> get Backup000419.tgz
· The size of the file and the transfer rate will be indi- 200 PORT command successful
cated when the file is sent. 150 Opening BINARY mode data.......
11 Log out from the main unit and close ftp. 1866850 bytes received in..........
ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
12 Activate a shutdown command from telnet # shutdown -fb

and shut down the main unit.
# lo
15 Turn ON the power with the start switch and

activate the main unit.

7.3.5 Restoring the set files
After replacing the hard disk, restore the setting file

that was backed up in the maintenance PC with the
DataBackup script in the new hard disk.


switch.

4 Log in DRYPPO 722 using ftp. (See p.9-9)

5 Switch the ftp transfer mode to the binary ftp> binaly
mode.
200 Type set to B.
7 Send the backup file (the file in the example 250 CWD command successful
ftp> put Backup000419.tgz
on the right is Backup000419.tgz) to the main
unit from the PC. 200 PORT command successful
· The size of the file and the transfer rate will be indi- 150 Opening BINALY mode data.......
cated when the file is sent. 226 Transfer complete.
1866850 bytes sent in..............
ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
8 Log out from the main unit and close ftp.

9 Log in to the main unit using telnet. (See p.9-
7)
10 Activate the killp script and stop the process # killp

of the main unit.
# DataRestore Backup000419.tgz
11 Activate the DataRestore script.

· Input a space after “DataRestore” then input the
name of the backup file (the file in the example on
the right is Backup000419.tgz).
· A prompt that confirms whether or not to activate
restore will appear.

1) Do you restore the backup file made for the HDD exchange?
In file :
restore OK. = 1
restore cancel = Q
Enter 1 or Q >1
Tar:blocksize =20
x data/Init,4 bytes,1 tape blocks
x data/FilimCollectionIndex.free,960 bytes,2 tape blocks
x data/FilimCollectionIndex,504 bytes,1 tape blocks
x data/FilimCollectionData,30744 bytes,61 tape blocks
x data/CurrentFilimCollection,188 bytes,1 tape blocks
:
:
Restore End!!
# shutdown -fb
# lo

· The restoring of the backup file will begin.
· “Restore End!!” will appear when the restoring is
completed.
13 Activate a shutdown command and shut down

the system.



7.3.6 Collecting log files
Collect log files in order to know the operation status at the occurrence of errors.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to mistake telnet and ftp as input when logging in is different.
IMPORTANT :Be careful not to mistake telnet and ftp oparation ,specially when inputting
password.


switch.
3 Check IP address of DRYPRO from the ser-

vice mode in the control panel section.
4 If a log has not been created from the time of Previous day Today
the error to present, proceed to Step 5 and
12:30 12:30
create a log file. If a log has already been cre-
ated at this point, proceed to Step 14 and
Log is created
extract the created log file.
· A log file is created every day at 12:30pm automati-
cally. Log is not yet created
Log is created
Log is not yet created
: Time of error : Present time
5 Log in DRYPRO 722 with telnet.(See p.9-7)

6 Activate the log script. # log
· Two files are created in /home/kil8/log.
# lo
· kil8file.xxxxxxxxxxxx.tgz
Internal information upon performing a log com-
mand.
· kil8log.xxxxxxxxxxxx.tgz
Operational records of each process.
· The year the log command was performed (last two
digits of the year), month and day, and hour, minute,
and second are entered in the xxxxxxxxxxxx section
of the file name.
Example: June 15, 2000, 2:45:30pm
Kil8file.000615144530.tgz
· Confirm the name of the created file using the ls
command of telnet.


mode.
200 Type set to I.
10 Move the current directory to /home/ki18/log. ftp> cd /home/ki18/log
11 Send the two files created in Step 6 from the 250 CWD command successful.
main unit to the maintenance PC. ftp> get Kil8file.000615144530.tgz
200 PORT command successful.
12 After confirming that the two files were sent 150 Opening BINARY mode data........
properly, input a delete command and delete 226 Transfer complete.
the files in the main unit. 736114 bytes received in............
IMPORTANT: This is a process to prevent ftp> get Kil8log.000615144530.tgz
the files from pressuring 200 PORT command successful.
the HD capacity in the main 150 Opening BINARY mode data........
unit, therefore, be sure to 226 Transfer complete.
perform this procedure. 254830 bytes received in............
13 Log out from the main unit and close ftp. ftp> delete Kil8file.000615144530.tgz
· Proceed to Step 22. 250 DELE command successful.
ftp> delete Kil8log.000615144530.tgz
250 DELE command successful.
ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
14 Log in the main unit using ftp. (See p.9-9)

15 Move the current directory to /home/ki18/log.
16 Input “dir –t Error*” and display the list of error
log files.
ftp> cd /home/ki18/log
250 CWD command successful.
ftp> dir -t Error* File date
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for.
total 814
-rw-rw-rw- 1 ki18main ki18main 0 jun 15 14:50 ErrorLog.0
-rw-rw-rw- 1 ki18main ki18main 408 jun 15 12:30 ErrorLog.1.tgz
:
:

17 Search for an error log file of 12:30 dated

immediately after the generation of the error.
· The “x” portion in ErrorLog.x.tgz indicates the his-
tory of log creation. Please refer to “9.3.1 Automatic
creation of log files”. (See p.9-5)
18 Switch the ftp transfer mode to the binary

mode. ftp> binary
19 Send the error log file found in Step 11 from 200 Type set to I.
ftp> get ErrorLog.2.tgz
the main unit to the maintenance PC.
· The example on the right is for sending an error log
file (ErrorLog.2.tgz) created at 12:30 of the previous 150 Opening BINARY mode data........
day. 226 Transfer complete.
· The transferred error log file is compressed. An 1216 bytes received in..............
appropriate decompression tool is required to con- ftp> get ConnectionMngd.2.tgz
firm the file contents with the maintenance PC. 200 PORT command successful.
20 Send the log files of each process created on 150 Opening BINARY mode data........
the same day as the error log file to the main-
3121 bytes received in..............
tenance PC.
ftp> get ????????.2.tgz
· If the error code of the generated error is acknowl-
edged, determine the log file to be transferred from 200 PORT command successful.
the 2nd and 3rd digits of the error code and from the 150 Opening BINARY mode data........
table in the following page, then input the file name 226 Transfer complete.
in the ???????? section in the example shown on the :
right. :
IMPORTANT: Send a log file in which the

number in the file name
(“x” in .x.tgz) is the same
number as the error code
file sent in Step 19.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to send the log file

for the connection man-
aged process (Connection-
Mngd.x.tgz).
· If the error code cannot be determined, send all of

the log files listed in the table just to be sure. (All log ftp> mget *.2.tgz
files created on the same day can be sent by using the
ftp mget command and the wildcard “*”.)

Correspondence to error codes and log files
2nd & 3rd digits Process name File name
B0 or B1 Connection control process ConnectionMngd.2.tgz

*Always collect this log.
B2 or B3 DICOM printer-server process DicomServer@@.2.tgz

* @@ corresponds with channel numbers 01 to 16.
B4 or B5 Output queue control process QueueMngd.2.tgz
B6 or B7 Mechanical control I/F process MecIfd.2.tgz
B8 or B9 Densitometer control I/F process BrightIfd.2.tgz
BA or BB Printer control I/F process PrintIfd.2.tgz
BC or BD PCI interrupt detecting process PCI_Intd.2.tgz
BE or BF Memory control process MemoryMngd.2.tgz
C0 or C1 Operation control I/F process OpeIfd.2.tgz
C4 or C5 Maintenance control process MenteIfd.2.tgz
C6 or C7 DICOM N-EVENT report process NeventMng.2.tgz
C8 or C9 Test print process TestPrintMngd.2.tgz
CA or CB Common function * Extracts the log for all processes.
21 Log out from the main unit and close ftp. ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
22 Attach the following items to the two files

transmitted in Step 8 or the log files transmit-
ted in Step 10 and 11 and sent them to KON-
ICA MI Development.
· UDate of error generation
· Condition of the error and the error code (when
available)
· Place of error generation
· System configuration
· Serial number of DRYPRO 722
· Version of each software

7.3.7 Clearing the log
Clear the contents of the present log file. Only the con-
tents of the present log file can be cleared in this pro-
cess, therefore, use ftp to delete the past log files that
were compressed.
· In case of a repeated error, clear the log file tempo-

rarily, then reproduce the error. The log file will con-
tain only the operational status of the time the error
was generated, therefore, the information subjected
to analysis can be narrowed down.

2 Turn ON the power of DRYPRO.


5 Execute clearlog script. # clearlog
6 Log out from the main unit and close telnet. # lo

7.3.8 Check control of film type
Set whether or not to check the film type of DRYPRO

722 from DICOM. The priority order of using the
upper tray or lower tray can also be set when films of
the same size and quality are set in the trays.


switch.

4 Log in DRYPRO 722 using telnet.

5 Activate the FilmTypeChange script.
· A prompt that inquires whether or not to check the
title of FilmTypeChange and the film type from
DICOM will appear. “<-now, value” indicates the
present setting.
# FilmTypeChange
+-------------------------------------------+
+-------------------------------------------+
| |
| DICOM Film Type Check Setting Program |
| Ver 1.00 |
| |
+-------------------------------------------+
+-------------------------------------------+
1)Do you check the type of the film with DICOM?
It is checked. =1 <-now,value
It isn't checked. =2
Select Cancel =Q
Enter 1-2 or Q > 1
6 Input “1” to check and “2” to not check the film

type from DICOM, then press the Enter key.
· A prompt that inquires whether or not to give priority
to one of the trays will appear. “<-now, value” indi-
cates the present setting.

2) Which is a Priority tray?
Upper tray priority. = 1 <-now,value

The bottom tray priority. = 2
Select Cancel = Q
Enter 1-2 or Q > 1
3)Will I be allowed to change it?

It is changed. =1
Select Cancel =Q
Enter 1 or Q > 1
File Name[ d002.ini.CT] File Length[ 870] BCC Code[0x23] Status[ OK ]
File Name[ d002.ini.REGIUS] File Length[ 714] BCC Code[0x2b] Status[ OK ]
:
:
Done.
# lo
7 Input “1” to give priority to the upper tray and

“2” to the lower tray, then press the Enter key.
· A prompt that inquires whether or not to change the
set data of the main unit according to the input con-
tents.
8 Input “1” to change the contents and “Q” to

cancel the setting, then press the Enter key.
· When “1” is input, each of the set data in the main
unit will be checked and “Done.” will appear when
the procedure is ended properly.

7.3.9 Displaying the sum of films
Film sum data can also be displayed from the control

panel section, however, the FilmSum command
described in this section can display the cumulative
sum data (for 12 months) which is not affected by the
number of films to clear from the control panel sec-
tion. The number of dummy prints are not contained in
the film sum data displayed in this section. The num-
ber of normal prints and built-in test prints are calcu-
lated.


switch.


5 Activate the FilmSum command. # FilmSum
· Sum data for each film type can be displayed by acti-
vating the FilmSum command and inputting the Film Collection Data
options listed in the table below during the com- ------------------------------------
mand. The example on the right shows the sum data 14x17 14x14 11x14
of blue films. 05/01-05/31--- 0 0 0
06/01-06/30--- 0 0 0
:
:
Option Definition 03/01-03/31--- 0 0 0
04/01-04/19--- 199 265 445
None Indication of monthly sum per film size. ------------------------------------
B Indication of monthly sum per film size
TOTAL 199 265 445
for blue films.
# FilmSum B
C Indication of monthly sum per film size
Film Collection Data
for clear films. ------------------------------------
T Indication of monthly sum of size and 14x17B 14x14B 11x14B
type of films presently set in the tray. 05/01-05/31--- 0 0 0
06/01-06/30--- 0 0 0
:
:
6 After confirming the sum data, log out from 03/01-03/31---
04/01-04/19---
0
199
0
265
0
445
the main unit and close telnet.
------------------------------------
TOTAL 199 265 445
# lo

7.3.10 Displaying the filter exchange time
This procedure is for displaying the time to exchange

the filter that is now attached. The time to exchange
the filter is after counting 10,000 films or after 120
days. The command to display the time for exchanging
the filter will display the previous time the filter was
exchanged and the number of films processed from
that time along with the next time the filter is to be
exchanged.

2 Turn ON the power of DRYPRO.


5 Activate the PrintFilterExchange command.
· The time to exchange the filter will appear.
# PrintFilterExchange
<<<<Filter Xchg timing: Film Count[10000] or 120days>>>>
--------------------------------------------------------
Previous filter Xchg time : 2000/8/7 16:33:51
Next filter Xchg time : 2000/12/5 16:33:51
Time period : 115 days 2 hours 58 minutes 45seconds
Current film count : 403
# lo
· Previous filter Xchg time:

The previous filter exchanged time is displayed.
· Next filter Xchg time:
The next filter exchange time is displayed.
· Current film count:
The number of films processed since the previous fil-
ter was exchanged.
6 After confirming the time to exchange the fil-

ter, log out from the main unit and close tel-
net.

7.4 Install Software
7.4.1 Before starting install software
• File name of install software
• DryPro722inst.exe
• System Requirements
• Windows 95/98
• Capable of Ethernet networking (10/100Base)
(same condition as Printlink)
• Memory 32MB or more
• HD Free Space 200MB or more
• Installing the software

• Start up "Setup.exe" in the first floppy disk of the install software, and follow the instructions on the screen.
• Install the software of the latest version.
• Starting the install software

• Double-click the DryPro722inst to start up.
• Add "/D" to start up the install software in debag mode.
(In the debag mode, "dbg.log" file is created.)
• Confirming the Version

• By using the service mode screen in the control panel section of the main unit, confirm that the version of the
installation software is the same as the version of the main software in the main unit. (See p.6-10, "6.4 Ver-
sion Screen")
IMPORTANT: Be sure that the version of the installation software matches the version of the main
software in the main unit.

7.4.2 Main screen

When the install software starts up, the main screen will be displayed.
The names of the parameters that are to be set in the install software, appear under "Name" on the right portion of
the screen.
Clicking the parameter name in the tree display on the left portion of the screen, or double-clicking the parameter
name on the right portion of the main screen changes to the setting screen of each parameter.
• System : Set the system parameters of the DRYPRO 722. (See p.7-78.)
• Channel : Set the parameters of each channel of the DRYPRO 722. (See p.7-83.)
• Correction : Set the correction value of the image writing size. (See p.7-97.)
When selecting each menu on the menu bar, you can store and read the set parameters, transmit/receive the param-
eters between the maintenance PC and the DRYPRO 722, select the DRYPRO 722 to be connected, and confirm the
maintenance information of the DRYPRO 722.

7.4.3 File menu

Click [File (F)] on the main screen to display the file menu.
load(L) Loads the parameters stored in HD. Need to specify the directory.
save(S) Stores the set parameters in HD. Need to specify the directory.
PC>>DryPro(P) Transfers the set parameters to DRYPRO 722.
DryPro>>PC(D) Reads parameters set on DRYPRO 722 into PC.
Server Connection(C) Sets the communicating DRYPRO 722 by inputting IP address.
Name Set the IP address of the target by inputting a related name.

The address is stored in "DryPro.adr" by text.
IP address Set the IP address of the target DRYPRO 722.
Set IP Address(A) Displays the current status of DRYPRO 722. Also capable to change the setting.
Press OK to finalize the changed setting. It is necessary to reboot DRYPRO 722 to
make the changed settings effect.
IP Address IP address of DRYPRO 722
net mask Net mask of DRYPRO 722
gateway Default gateway of DRYPRO 722
To Online(N) Switches DRYPRO 722 to Online. It may sometimes take rather long before it is
switched to Online. To verify whether it is switched to Online, check Maintenance-
Status of the main menu.

To Offline(F) Switches DRYPRO 722 to Offline. It may sometimes take rather long before it is
switched to Offline. To verify whether it is switched to Offline, check Mainte-
nance-Status of the main menu.

7.4.4 Software menu

Click [Software (S)] on the main screen to display the software menu.
Main - Main Version UP (U) Upgrades the version of the main software. Selecting this displays the Browse
screen. On the Browse screen, selecting the directory in which the main software is
included starts to upgrade the software, and performs a cold start automatically.
Note: Before upgrading the software, be sure to back up the main
software and the set files.
Main - Main Backup (B) Backs up the main software and the set files.
Selecting this displays the Browse screen. When selecting the directory on the
Browse screen, the data is backed up in the specified directory.
Main - Main Restore (R) Transfers the data that has been backed up when replacing the hard disk in the main
unit.

7.4.5 Reset menu

• Reset-Cold Start
A cold start will take place when this sub-menu is selected. The cold start deletes all queues in DRYPRO 722 and
initiates a restart.

7.4.6 Maintenance menu

Download log (L) Selecting this displays the Browse screen. On the Browse screen, select the direc-
tory in which the data is to be stored. The dialogue box for selecting the log types
appears.
Only Error log Selects only the error log.

Choice Selects all the logs except the error log.
From, To Specifies the search period of the log.
Pressing "OK" displays the log for the specified search period.
Select the log, and press "Download" to store it.
Example of error log

Status(S) Displays the status of DRYPRO 722 in real time.
Status Displays the status of DRYPRO 722.

Starting/Ready/Not Ready/Printing/Error/Online/Offline
Level Displays the error level.
· F: Unable to restore (Power off/on)
· E: Able to restore (Normal error)
· 0: No error
Code Displays error codes.
· 0000-FFFF
Message Displays error messages (Max32 characters)
Upper tray Displays film count of the upper tray. (0-125)
Lower tray Displays film count of the lower tray. (0-125)
Queue Displays the remaining print queue.(0-255)
Exchange Req. Exchange request (0: Not requested, 1: Requested)
(xxxxxxxx) b7 - b3: Not Used, b2: HPRO FILTER,
b1: Upper tray film, b0: Lower tray film
Print Films1 Status of film transport 1 (0: No film, 1: With film)
(xxxxxxxx) b7: Exposure section, b6: Not Used, b5: Lower transport sec-
tion,
b4: Front transport section, b3: Lower supply, b2: Upper sup-
ply,
b1: Lower pickup, b0: Upper pickup
Print Films2 Status of film transport 2 (0: No film, 1: With film)
(xxxxxxxx) b7 - b5: Not Used, b4: Sorter, b3: Discharge section,
b2: Cooling section, b1: HPRO section, b0: Elevator transport
section

Status(S) Cover (Outside) Status of outer cover 1 (0: Closed, 1: Opened)

(xxxxxxxx) b7: Sorter, b6: Sorter 2, b5: FILTER,
b4: Top cover, b3: HPRO cover, b2: Front cover Left cover,
b1: Lower cover,
b0: Front cover Left cover
Cover (Inside) Status of internal section 1
(xxxxxxxx) b7: Not Used, b6: OPEN warning (0: Available, 1: Not avail-
able)
b5: Interlock (0: Not available, 1: Release)
b4: Filter (0: Available, 1: Not available)
b3: Upper tray package: (0: Available, 1: Not available)
b2: Lower tray package,
b1: Upper tray open/close (0: Closed, 1: Opened), b0: Lower
tray open/close
Cycle to Update Cycle to confirm the status. When the cycle is input, it will
1-255(s) take effect.
Film Data (F) Displays the film data that is read from the DRYPRO 722. Selecting the film size
and type from the edit box displays the corresponded film data.
Edit box Selecting the film size/type

· 14 x 17 / 14 x 14 / 14 x 11r
· Blue/Clear/DR Blue/DR Clear
Total tab Displays the total number of films.
day 1 tab Displays the number of films for each day over 1 to 16 days
before.
day 2 tab Displays the number of films for each day over 17 to 32 days before.
week tab Displays the number of films for each week over 1 to 16
weeks before.
month tab Displays the number of films for each month over 1 to 13
months before.

7.4.7 Help menu

• Help-About
Displays the version of DryPro722inst.

7.4.8 System screen

On this screen, you can confirm and set the system parameters of the DRYPRO 722.
The names of the system parameters of the DRYPRO 722 appear under "Name" on the right portion of the screen,
and next to which the current values are displayed.
• Resource : Main CPU memory capacity and the hard disk capacity of the DRYPRO 722
• Version : Software version of the each unit of the DRYPRO 722
• DICOM : DICOM information of the DRYPRO 722
• Settings : Time for collecting films, and maximum density
Double-clicking the parameter name on the right portion of the screen displays the System dialogue box, allowing
you to confirm and set the parameters.

7.4.9 System dialogue

• Resource tab
Double-clicking " Resource" on the System screen, or clicking the "Resource" tab in the System dialogue box dis-
plays the "Resource" screen.
The main CPU memory capacity and the hard disk capacity of the DRYPRO 722 are displayed on this screen. How-
ever, you can only confirm the data, cannot edit it.
Memory Main memory capacity (128, 256) MB
Hard disk HD capacity (0-65535) MB

• Version tab
Double-clicking " Version" on the System screen, or clicking the "Version" tab in the System dialogue box dis-
plays the "Version" screen.
The versions of the main software, the mechanical control software, the print control board, and the control panel
section of the DRYPRO 722 are displayed on this screen. However, you can only confirm the data, cannot edit it.
Version Version display (x.xx)
Date Date of the file created (x.xx)
Main Version of main software/date of creation (x.xx/xxxx.xx.xx)
Mec. Version of mechanical control software/date of creation (x.xx/xxxx.xx.xx)
Print Version of the software for print section/date of creation (x.xx/xxxx.xx.xx)
Ope. Version of the software for control panel section/date of creation (x.xx/xxxx.xx.xx)

• DICOM tab
Double-clicking " DICOM" on the System screen, or clicking the "DICOM" tab in the System dialogue box dis-
plays the "DICOM" screen.
On this screen, you can confirm and set the DICOM information of the DRYPRO 722.
AE Title AE title of DRYPRO 722 (Max.16 characters)
Port No. Print service port No. of DRYPRO 722 (1024-65535)

• Settings tab
Double-clicking " Settings" on the System screen, or clicking the "Settings" tab in the System dialogue box dis-
plays the "Settings" screen.
On this screen, you can confirm and set the time for collecting the film and the maximum density of print.
Collect time Sets the time for film count. (hour/day/date) Ex) 00:00-23:59, Mon,1-31
DMAX Sets "Maximum density x 100" for DRYPRO 722 (1-380)

7.4.10 Channel setting screen 1

On this screen, you can change the channel names and set the channel to Validity/Invalidity.
• Changing the channel name

Right-clicking the channel name (SCUx) in the tree on the left portion of the screen allows you to change the default
channel name (SCUx) to the name that is easy to understand, such as a modality name. A maximum of 16 characters
(single-byte) and 8 characters (double-byte) can be entered for the channel name.
• Setting the channel to Validity/Invalidity

Right-clicking the channel name (SCUx) on the right window displays a pop-up menu for selecting "Validity" and
"Invalidity". On this menu, set only the channels that are connected to the modalities, to "Validity".
When selecting "Validity", a pop-up menu for selecting the modality type is displayed. When "MRI,CT" or "Regius"
is selected on this menu, the default of the parameter of the concerned channel is changed according to the selected
modality type.
When "None" is selected, the parameters are not changed.
is displayed next to the valid channel, and ∆ is displayed next to the invalid channel.
• Selecting the channel

In order to set the parameter for each channel, click the channel name in the tree display on the left portion of the
screen, or double-click the channel name on the right portion of the screen.
The set screen for the selected channel (Channel setting screen 2) is displayed.

7.4.11 Channel setting screen 2

On this screen, you can set the parameters for the selected channel.
The names of the parameters for the selected channel appear under "Name" on the right portion of the screen, and
next to which the current values are displayed.
• DICOM : DICOM information for the selected channel

• Film : Print conditions such as margin and density when printing from the selected channel
• Format : Image format when printing from the selected channel
• LUTv Image density when printing from the selected channel
Double-clicking the parameter name on the right portion of the screen displays the dialogue box for setting the pa-
rameters.
Double-clicking "∆ Stamp" changes into the stamp setting screen.

7.4.12 SCU-DICOM dialogue

Sets DICOM condition for the selected channel (for the modality).
IP address IP address of the device connected to this channel (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
AE Title AE title of the device connected to this channel (Max. 16 characters)
output Choice whether to output N-EVENT-REPORT (on/off)
Port No. Port No. at the device that receives N-EVENT-REPORT (1-65535)
Default Sorter The bin No. (1-5) of the sorter to which the films exit when making a print without
designating the bin No. from the device connecting with this channel.

7.4.13 SCU-Film dialogue

• Margin tab
Sets the margin (unexposed area) on the film.
Light Box Light box area (0-440)
Strings Text area (0-440)
Top Circumference (top) (2-440)
Bottom Circumference (bottom) (0-440)
Right Circumference (right) (0-440)
Left Circumference (left) (0-440)
Can be defined in increments of 0.2mm from the film edge.
Normal format Rotate format

14inch (For stamp in vertical position) 17inch (For stamp in vertical position)
Left Right Left Right
Light Box Top Light Box

Top
Strings
Bottom
Strings Bottom Strings
Strings
(For stamp in vertical position) (For stamp in vertical position)

• Density tab
Sets the trim, border, etc.
Trim Width Trim width (0.2-440)
Trim Density Trim density (0-380)*
Border Density Border density (0-380)*
Empty Density Empty image density (0-380)*
BLACK BLACK density (0-380)*
CLEAR CLEAR density (0-380)*
*The density that can be set, however, is limited within the range of the minimum and maximum density of the film.

• Format tab
On this screen, you can set the layout of the frames when receiving the print command in the custom format from
the Printlink.
· As for the custom format, set and change in the Printlink.
Y interval 1-2 Set the interval between the frames on the first and second columns in the unit of
pixel (1-255).
Y interval 2-3 Set the interval between the frames on the second and third columns in the unit of
pixel (1-255).
Arrange Select the image layout from Centering and Even (applies to all custom formats).

7.4.14 SCU-Format dialogue

This screen displays the image formats that can be used in the DRYPRO 722 for each film size in the list.
Right-clicking any of image format moves to the format adjusting dialogue, allowing you to adjust the layout of the
frames.
· The image formats of the DRYPRO 722 are pre-registered. You cannot add or change the image formats.
14 x 17 / 14 x 14 / 11 x 14 Switches into each film size for the image formats (14 x 17 / 14 x 14 / 11 x 14).
tabs
Format display Displays the layout of the frames in each format.

"a*b" shows the normal format (a: the number of frames in a horizontal direction,
b: the number of frames in a vertical direction)
"a/b" shows the mix format (a: the number of frames on the first column, b: the
number of frames on the second column)
"R" shows that the normal format is rotated and printed.
Arrange Select the image layout from Centering and Even (applies to all the formats).

• Format adjusting dialogue

Adjust the layout of the image format that is selected in the Format dialogue.
Block 1/2/3 Displays the parameters for the interval between the frames on each column.
· The mix format that can be used in the DRYPRO 722 is only two columns. "0" is
always displayed for "Block3".
X no. Displays the number of frames in X direction on each column (displayed automati-
cally, cannot be input).
Y no. Displays the number of frames in Y direction on each column (displayed automati-
cally, cannot be input).
mag. Relative scaling (displayed automatically, cannot be input).
Rotate Displays on/off of rotation.
X interval Set the interval between the frames in X direction in the unit of pixel (0-255).
Y interval Set the interval between the frames in Y direction in the unit of pixel (0-255).
Block Displays the number of blocks (columns) for the format.

(1: Normal format, 2: Mix format (2 columns))
· Displayed automatically. Do not change.
Y interval 1-2 Set the interval between the frames on the first and second columns in the unit of
pixel (1-255).
Y interval 2-3 Set the interval between the frames on the second and third columns in the unit of
pixel (1-255).
Arrange Select the image layout from Centering and Even (applies to all custom formats).
• When receiving the print command in the custom format from the Printlink, the layout is made according to
the values for "Y interval 1-2, Y interval 2-3" that are set on the "Format" tab in the "SCU-Film" dialogue.

• Arrange (adjusting the layout)
• When setting "Arrange" to "Centering" b: Interval between the frames set in the field of "X interval"
f: Interval between the frames set in the field of "Y interval"
The layout of the frames on the film is adjusted so that "a"
equals "c" and "e" equals "g".
a b c
• When setting "Arrange" to "Even" Comparing "a" with "e", with "Centering" selected, adjust
only the wider interval.
If "e" is wider than "a", interval "f" that is set in the field of "Y
interval" is ignored so that "e" equals "f" and "g", and "a"
equals "c".
"b" is the interval frame that is set in the filed of "X interval".
a b c
Original After adjustment

• When setting "Arrange" to "Even" in mix When the vertical interval between the frames in the mix for-
format mat is wide, the layout is adjusted as the normal format.
When the horizontal interval between the frames in the mix
format is wide, the frames are laid out with the equal interval
on each column.
Original After adjustment

7.4.15 SCU-LUT dialogue

LUT is only the linear LUT that connects the maximum density and minimum density.
Max Density Specifies Max. density of LUT (0-380)
Min Density Specifies Min. density of LUT (0-380)
• The straight line connecting the maximum and minimum density becomes the LUT of DRYPRO 722.

7.4.16 Stamp setting screen

On this screen, you can set the print conditions of the stamp for the selected channel.
The parameter names for the stamp of the selected channel appear under "Name" on the right portion of the screen,
and next to which the current values are displayed.
• Strings : Position at which the stamp is written on the film

• Information : Position at which the management information is written on the film
• Format : Descriptions of stamp
Double-clicking the parameter name on the right portion of the main screen displays the dialogue box for setting the
parameters.

7.4.17 SCU-Stamp-Strings dialogue

On this screen, you can set the position at which the stamp is written for each film size.
14 x 17 / 14 x 14 / 11 x 14 Switches into the film size to be set.

tabs
Horizontal position Starting position of optical direction (0-11000/0-8800/0-6900) mm
Vertical position Starting position of subscan direction (0-11000/0-8800/0-6900) mm
Nor/Hor Normal format/Horizontal stamp
Nor/Ver Normal format/Vertical stamp
Rot/Hor Rotate format/Horizontal stamp
Rot/Ver Rotate format/Vertical stamp
• Stamp items: Time, Date, ID No., Stamp, Copy

• Start position measured from the film edge: input the coordinates for each arrow’s beginning point in 0.2mm
increments.
Optical direction
Subscan direction
Rot/Ver(Rotate Form./Vert.stamp)
(Normal Form./ Ver. stamp)
(Rotate Form./ Hor.stamp)

Nor/Ver
Rot/Hor
Nor/Hor(Normal Form./Hor.stamp)

7.4.18 SCU-Stamp-Information dialogue

On this screen, you can set the position at which the management information is written for each film size.
14x17/14 x 14/11 x 14 Switches format display of film size.
Horizontal position Starting position of optical scan (mm) (0-11000/0-8800/0-6900)
Vertical position Starting position of subscan (mm) (0-11000/0-8800/0-6900)
Normal Normal format
Rotate Rotate format
• Refer to "9.2 Management Information" for details on the management information to be printed.
• Writing position measured from the film edge: Input the coordinates for each arrow’s beginning point in
0.2mm increments.
Optical direction
Subscan direction
Normal (Normal format)
Rotate (Rotate format)

7.4.19 SCU-Stamp-Format dialogue

On this screen, you can set the description of stamp to be printed.
String On/off of Stamp received via DICOM (on/off)
Information On/off of film data (on/off)
Date/Time Display order of date, time, contents, time+date

(Time+Date/Date+Time/Time/Date)
Form Form of date display(Switches between last 2 or 4 digits of the year (YY-MMM-
DD/YYYY-MMM-DD)
Copy On/off of Copy when not specified by DICOM (on/off)
Date/Time On/off of date/Time when not specified by DICOM (on/off)
ModalityID On/off of ModalityID when not specified by DICOM (on/off)
Stamp On/off of Stamp when not specified by DICOM (on/off)
Form Start of the writing position of the stamp block. (Left/Centering/Right/Left)

Locating left/Centering/ Locating right/ Locating left
(Locating right for Copy only)
Stamp Sets Stamp contents when not specified by DICOM (Max.32 characters)

7.4.20 Correction screen

On this screen, you can correct the writing size in the optical direction for the DRYPRO 722.
" Smooth" is displayed under "Name" on the right portion of the screen, on the right of which the current writing
size (ratio) is displayed.
Double-clicking " Smooth" on the right portion of the screen displays the dialogue box for setting the parameters.

7.4.21 Correction-Smooth dialogue

Corrects the size of the optical direction when images are to be written.
File Directory Not used.
Correction of image’s size Enter the enlargement and reduction ratio of the image in the optical direction. (0.00 ~
200.00%)
The ratio can be adjusted by 0.01% increments.
• Correction method
1. Set the "Correction of image’s size" to 100%.
2. Output the FRAME pattern of the test pattern. (See p.6-8)
3. Measure the size of the output grid to the optical direction.
* The more number of grids to be measured, the higher the accuracy of the correction can be made.
* If a grid size is 40mm, no correction is required.
4. Calculate the enlargement and reduction ratio. (Up to the second decimal place)
The ratio (%) = (the number of grid measured x 4000) ÷ Measured Value (mm).
5. Set the calculated expansion and contraction scale to the "Correction of image’s size".
Optical (14 inch) direction
Target value
: 40mm
FRAME pattern (ex.14 X 11 inch)

Chapter 8
Upgrading
8.1 Upgrading the DRYPRO 722. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1.1 Controlling the version of the DRYPRO 722 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Upgrading the Main Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2.1 Backing up the setting file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2.2 Upgrading the main software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.3 Restoring the set files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.3 Upgrading the mechanical control software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.3.1 How to upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.3.2 When failing a download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.3.3 When the Flash ROM does not activate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.4 Upgrading the HPRO CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.4.1 Installing the HPRO software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.4.2 Initializing and setting the offset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.5 Upgrading the Control Panel Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.5.1 Replacing the ROM in the control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Blank Page
8.1 Upgrading the DRYPRO 722
8.1.1 Controlling the version of the DRYPRO 722
In order to upgrade the system program for the main CPU of the DRYPRO 722, it is necessary to upgrade the soft-
ware for other CPUs in the DRYPRO 722 at the same time.
The following shows the latest software version for the DRYPRO 722 and how to upgrade the software.
CPU Version How to upgrade
Main CPU Ver.1.22 Use "ftp" and "Telnet" on the maintenance PC to upgrade.
Mechanical control CPU Ver.1.21 Start up the mechanical control maintenance PC on the
maintenance PC, and download the software.
Print control Ver.1.10 Replace the ROM on the print control board.
CPU in the control panel Ver.1.21 Replace the ROM on the control panel board.
section
HPRO CPU Ver.1.00 Start up the download program on the maintenance PC, and
download the software.
• Note: When upgrading the DRYPRO 722, use the latest version for both the mechanical
control maintenance PC and the install software.
The following shows how to confirm the current version of the DRYPRO 722.
• Touch "VERSION" on SERVICE 2/4 screen (SERVICE 2/3 screen for the DRYPRO 722 of Ver.1.2 or earlier)
on the touch panel on the control section. In this case, you cannot confirm the version of the HPRO CPU.
• Connect the maintenance PC to the DRYPRO 722 in the network, and start up the install software. Click "
System" on the left portion of the main screen, and double-click " Version" on the right portion of the
screen. In this case, you cannot confirm the version of the HPRO CPU.
• Pull the control box from the main body, and confirm the version on the label on the lid of the box.
IMPORTANT: In order to connect the optional sorter LiS-722 to the DRYPRO 722, the software ver-
sion of the main CPU must be Ver.1.20 or later.
IMPORTANT: After upgrading the software, be sure to describe the new version and the date on
which you upgrade the software, on the label on the lid of the control box.

8.2 Upgrading the Main Software
8.2.1 Backing up the setting file
When upgrading the software of the main CPU in the DRYPRO 722, or when replacing the hard disk, it is necessary
to back up the setting file in the hard disk to the maintenance PC.
In order to upgrade the main software, back up the setting file, and restore it, use "ftp" and "telnet" on the mainte-
nance PC connected to the DRYPRO 722 in the network.


switch.

service screen of the control section.

5 Execute the DataBackup script.
· The DataBackup message will appear.

· A backup file will be created in the hard disk of the
main unit.
· The backup file will be created in the "tmp" direc-
tory, and be named "Backup xxxxxx.tgz" automati-
cally. (xxxxxx shows the date of creation of the
backup file.)
· The name of the created file and “Backup End!!”
will appear when the backup is completed.
# DataBackup
1) Do you do a data backup for the HDD exchange?
backup OK. = 1
backup cancel = Q
Enter 1 or Q > 1
a data/Init 1 Blocks
a data/FilimCollectionIndex.free 3 Blocks
a data/FilimCollectionIndex 1 Blocks
:
:
-rw-rw-rw-1 root root 1866850 Apr 19 11:36 /tmp/Backup000419.tgz
Backup End!!


mode.
200 Type set to I.
10 Send the backup file (Backup000419.tgz) 250 CWD command successful
from the main unit to the PC. ftp> get Backup000419.tgz
· The size of the file and the transfer rate will be indi- 200 PORT command successful
cated when the file is sent. 150 Opening BINARY mode data.......
11 Log out from the main unit and close ftp. 1866850 bytes received in..........
ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
12 Execute a shutdown command from telnet

# shutdown -fb
and shut down the main unit.
# lo


8.2.2 Upgrading the main software

In order to upgrade the main software, use "ftp" and "telnet" on the maintenance PC connected to the DRYPRO 722
in the network.

2 Turn ON the power of DRYPRO, and confirm

the IP address of the main unit on the service
screen.
3 Copy all the files in the installation floppy disk

(disk labeled “MAIN”) to the maintenance PC
hard disk.
· Suppose that the files are to be copied in a directory
named C:\V1.21 in this procedure.
· The installer of the main upgrading software is con-
tained in one floppy disk. (as of 21/10/1999)

ftp. (See p.9-9)

mode.
200 Type set to I.
6 Move the current directory to /tmp. ftp> cd tmp
7 Move the directory on the PC side to \Vx.xx. 250 CWD command successful
ftp> lcd V1.10
8 Use the mput command and wildcard to send local directory now C:\V1.21
all the files in the \V1.21 directory to the main
ftp> mput *.*
unit.
:
9 When all files are transferred, log out from the :
main unit and close ftp. :
ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
10 Log into the main unit using telnet.

(See p.9-7)

11 Move the current directory to /tmp. # cd /tmp

12 Input the chmod command and change the # chmod +x setup
permission of the installation software (setup)
to executable. # ./setup
Version=[ 1.10]
13 Activate the installation software. ENV TGZ FILE NAME =env1.10.tgz
· A prompt inquiring whether or not to change the ver- BIN TGZ FILE NAME =bin1.10.tgz
sion will appear after information of the file to be SCRIPT TGZ FILE NAME =script1.10.tgz
upgraded is displayed. TOOL TGZ FILE NAME =tool1.10.tgz
14 Input “1”. 1)Do you change the version?

· A prompt inquiring whether or not to send Ping peri-
odically (every 10 sec.) from the DRYPRO 722 side Change OK = 1
will appear. Setup cancel = Q
IMPORTANT: When set to send Ping, the Enter 1 or Q > 1
frequency of generating an Tar:blocksize =20
“Imager Not Ready” error x tool/clrlog.882 bytes.2 tape
on the modality side can be x tool/log.796 bytes.2 tape blocks
reduced. x tool/SystemMemGet.13115 bytes.
15 Input “1” to send and “2” to not send ping. x tool/SysinitChange.17813 bytes
· A prompt confirming the change, Ping setting ([exe- 2)Do you execute ping Check?
cute] is indicated when performing Ping and [not
execute] for not performing Ping) and the memory execute OK = 1
size of the main CPU circuit board will be displayed.
execute cancel = 2
16 Input “1”. Setup cancel
Enter 1-2 or Q > 1
= Q
· The processing status for changing the version will
be indicated.
· “Install End!!” will be displayed when the installa- 3)Will I be allowed to change it?
tion is completed.
PINGCHECK :[execute]
17 Activate the killp script. System memory size :[128Mbyte]
18 Activate a shutdown command and shut down changed OK
Setup cancel
= 1
= Q
the system.
Enter 1 or Q > 1
19 Log out from the main unit and close telnet. Tar:blocksize =20
x environments/d850.ini,28384.
x environments/d202a.ini,431 bytes
x environments/d206.ini,234 bytes.
:
:
File Name[ smpte.image] File Length.
File Name[ version.info] File Length
Install End!!
# killp
# shutdown -fb
# lo


8.2.3 Restoring the set files
Restore the setting file that was backed up in the main-

tenance PC with the DataBackup script in the new
hard disk.


switch.

service screen of the control section.
4 Log in DRYPPO 722 using ftp. (See p.9-9)

5 Switch the ftp transfer mode to the binary ftp> binaly
mode.
200 Type set to B.
7 Send the backup file (the file in the example 250 CWD command successful
ftp> put Backup000419.tgz
on the right is Backup000419.tgz) to the main
unit from the PC. 200 PORT command successful
· The size of the file and the transfer rate will be indi- 150 Opening BINALY mode data.......
cated when the file is sent. 226 Transfer complete.
1866850 bytes sent in..............
ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
8 Log out from the main unit and close ftp.

9 Log in to the main unit using telnet. (See p.9-
7)
10 Execute the killp script and stop the process # killp

of the main unit.
# DataRestore Backup000419.tgz
11 Execute the DataRestore script.

· Input a space after “DataRestore” then input the
name of the backup file (the file in the example on
the right is Backup000419.tgz).
· A prompt that confirms whether or not to execute a
restoration will appear.

1) Do you restore the backup file made for the HDD exchange?
In file :
restore OK. = 1
restore cancel = Q
Enter 1 or Q >1
Tar:blocksize =20
x data/Init,4 bytes,1 tape blocks
x data/FilimCollectionIndex.free,960 bytes,2 tape blocks
x data/FilimCollectionIndex,504 bytes,1 tape blocks
x data/FilimCollectionData,30744 bytes,61 tape blocks
x data/CurrentFilimCollection,188 bytes,1 tape blocks
:
:
Restore End!!
# shutdown -fb
# lo

· The restoring of the backup file will begin.
· Restore End!!” will appear when the restoring is
completed.
13 Execute a shutdown command and shut

down the system.



8.3 Upgrading the mechanical control software
8.3.1 How to upgrade
In order to upgrade the mechanical control circuit board, connect the maintenance PC to the DRYPRO 722, and
download the mechanical control software of the latest version into the flash ROM on the mechanical control circuit
board.
1 Check if the maintenance PC and DRYPRO

722 are connected properly. (See p.7-1)
2 Turn ON the maintenance PC.

3 Activate the mechanical control maintenance
PC. (See p.7-3)
4 Select [Download] on the displayed screen,

5 Remove the floppy disk of the mechanical

control maintenance PC from the floppy disk
drive and install the disk (MEC) with the new
mechanical control software.
6 Follow the instructions on the screen, and

press the Y key forn confirmation. Upgrading
the software will start.
7 When a prompt notifying the end of the proce-

dure appears, press the start switch of the
main unit for five seconds or longer, turn OFF
the power, then turn the power ON again to
reboot the main unit.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to save the setup data in a file from the [Saving Setup Data] screen
under the [Setup Menu] and save the film data in a file from the [Counter Dis-
play/Film Data] screen before downloading.
IMPORTANT: There are cases in which the values of the setup data become abnormal due to
upgrading, etc. Press the start switch of the main unit for five seconds or
longer to turn OFF the power, then turn the power ON again to reboot the main
unit. Also be sure to check the setup data after downloading.
IMPORTANT: Avoid suspending the download procedure as much as possible as it can dam-
age the program in the flash ROM. EPROM will be needed if the program in the
flash ROM is damaged.

8.3.2 When failing a download
There are two areas (2 banks) to download the

mechanical control software (system) in the flash Flash ROM/EPROM Switch
ROM on the mechanical control circuit board, and the SW2
ON: EPROM
mechanical control circuit board is normally activated 2-1
by the system in Bank 1. If the upgrading fails by any OFF: Flash ROM
chance due to suspending the download, etc., the sys- Flash ROM Bank Switch
tem in the flash ROM may be damaged disabling the ON: Bank 2
mechanical control circuit board to be activated. In 2-2
such a case, switch the banks in the flash ROM and OFF: Bank 1
activate the mechanical control circuit board of the
system in Bank 2. The switching of the banks are per-
formed with the dip switch (2-2 of SW2) on the

longer and turn OFF the power of the main
unit.

3 Set Dip-SW 2-2 (SW2) on the mechanical Mechanical control board
control circuit board to ON.
SW2
· The system of the mechanical control circuit board
2-2
will switch to the system in Bank 2.
4 Re-install the right cover.

5 Turn ON the power and reboot the main unit.
· The mechanical control circuit board will activate
from the system in Bank 2.
IC3 IC4
6 After confirming that the mechanical control

circuit board activated normally, reattempt the
upgrading of the mechanical control software.
· If the upgrade is successful, the new system down-
loaded in Bank 2 will also be copied to Bank 1 auto-
matically.
7 Turn OFF the power of the main unit by press-

ing the start switch for five seconds or longer,
then turn ON and reboot the main unit.
· If the upgrade is completed normally, the mechanical
control circuit board will be activated by the new
system downloaded in Bank 2.

8.3.3 When the Flash ROM does not activate
When the systems of the two banks in the Flash ROM

are damaged and the mechanical control circuit board
cannot be activated, use the system written in EPROM
to activate the mechanical control circuit board by
attaching a Boot EPROM to the IC4 socket of the
mechanical control circuit board. The system is down-
loaded in the Flash Rom after activating the EPROM
and downloading the mechanical control software.

longer and turn OFF the power of the main Mechanical control circuit board
unit. SW2
2-1
2 Set Dip-SW 2-1 (SW2) on the mechanical
control circuit board to ON.
· The system of the mechanical control circuit board
will switch to the system written in EPROM.
3 Attach a Boot EPROM to the IC4 EPROM

socket. IC3 IC4
EPROM socket

· The mechanical control circuit board will activate
from the system in EPROM.
5 Reattempt the upgrading of the mechanical

control software.
· If the upgrade is successful, the new system down-
loaded in Bank 2 will also be copied to Bank 1 auto-
matically.
6 Turn OFF the power of the main unit by press-

ing the start switch for five seconds or longer.
7 Set 2-1 of the Dip-SW (SW2) to OFF and dis-

connect the Boot EPROM.
· The mechanical control circuit board will function
normally even if the Boot EPROM is not discon-
nected.

· If the upgrade is completed normally, the mechanical
control circuit board will be activated by the new
system downloaded in Bank 2.

8.4 Upgrading the HPRO CPU
8.4.1 Installing the HPRO software
In order to install the HPRO software, two types of cables should be connected between the DRYPRO 722 and the
maintenance PC (serial port). If you prepare the two maintenance PCs, this saves you from having to change the
cables. This section shows the procedure assuming that one maintenance PC is used.

722. (See p.7-1.)
2 Detach the control panel unit from the

DRYPRO 722. (See p.2-32.)
3 Remove the three set screws, and detach the

HPRO front cover. Inner cover
HPRO front cover
Set screws (3)
4 Remove the two set screws, and tilt the circuit Set screws (2)
board mounting base in order not to put the
load on the wiring. Circuit board installation base


HPRO-CPU circuit board cover.
HPRO-CPU circuit board cover
IMPORTANT: Do not apply too much
force in attaching or Set screws (4)
detaching the HPRO-CPU
circuit board cover; other-
wise, the edge of the cover
may damage the coating of
wires.
6 Set 1, 2, 3, and 6 on the DIPSW (S1) on the

HPRO-CPU circuit board to ON, and 4 and 5
to OFF.
DIPSW(S1)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
7 Put the circuit board mounting base back to

the original position, and secure it with the
two set screws.
8 Release the interlock in either way below.

· Set the interlock release key.
· Close all the outer covers. Set screws (2)

PC, and select [1 UNIT TEST], then [1 OVER-
ALL TRANS TEST].
11 Press the PageUp key once.

· [Status of HPRO - Discharge Section] is displayed.
12 Press the INS key.

· The [Output] of [HPRO Board] is set to ON.

13 Press the ESC key, the E key, then the

ENTER key in order, and exit the mechanical
control maintenance PC.
14 Disconnect the mechanical control connect-

ing cable from the maintenance PC and the
DRYPRO 722.
· If you use two maintenance PCs, do not disconnect
the cable, and repeat Steps 15 to 25 on another main-
tenance PC.
15 Connect the HPRO-downloading cable

between JJ7 on the HPRO-CPU circuit board
and the maintenance PC (serial port).
JJ7
16 Start up the HPRO-downloading software

(Flash.exe).
17 If "3048.inf" does not appear on the right of

"Flash memory block information file", click
"3048.inf" in the box under that.
18 Click [Set].
19 When the dialog box appears, click [OK].
· The dialog box for displaying the transfer of the
writing control program appears.
· If the settings of DIPSW are made incorrectly, a
time-out error appears.

20 At the end of transfer, click [WRITE] on the

menu.
· The [Write command] dialog box appears.
21 Click [Refer].
22 Select the file of the same name as the new
software version, and click [OK].
23 When the [Write command] dialog box

appears, click [OK].
· The dialog box for displaying the transfer of the user
program appears.
24 At the end of transfer, exit the HPRO-down-

loading software.
25 Disconnect the HPRO-downloading cable

from the maintenance PC and the HPRO-
CPU circuit board.

722, and set [HPRO Board] to OFF by follow-
ing Steps 10 to 12.
27 Press the Start switch for 5 seconds or more,

turn the power of the DRYPRO 722 OFF.
28 Return the settings of the DIPSW that have

been made in Step 6 to the initial settings.
· Set 1, 2, 3, and 6 to OFF.
29 Attach the HPRO-CPU circuit board cover,

and secure it with the four set screws.
30 Go to "8.4.2 Initializing and setting the offset

value".

8.4.2 Initializing and setting the offset value
1 Remove the control panel unit and HPRO

front cover.
2 Write down the three offset values (right, cen-

ter, and left) indicated on the HPRO-CPU cir-
cuit board cover. Drum No. Base board No. Software Ver.
P9103C
3 Connect the maintenance PC to the main 1196
C9184C
Right offset value Center offset value
V1.10
Left offset value
unit. (See p.7-1)
7-4 4-6 5-5
4 Start up the main unit and mechanical control
maintenance PC.
5 Select [D DUMMY COMMUNICATION] and

press the Return key.
6 Press the F10 key while pressing the Shift

key.
· The HPRO-CPU circuit board will be initialized.

longer to turn OFF the main unit, then turn it
ON again.
8 Press the F1 key.

9 Press the Return key, move the cursor to the
item to input, then input each offset value
using the numeric keypad.
· Offset constant 1: Right offset value
· Offset constant 2: Center offset value
· Offset constant 4: Left offset value
10 After checking that the settings are correct,

press the F6 key while pressing the Shift key.
· The input offset values will be written on the HPRO-
CPU circuit board.
11 Press the F7 key and confirm that the input

value is displayed in the [Received Data] col-
umn.

8.5 Upgrading the Control Panel Software
8.5.1 Replacing the ROM in the control section
1 Open the top cover.

Top cover
2 While tilting the release lever toward you,

open the filter case.
Filter case
3 Insert the lock at the back of the control

Press the lock at the back.
panel, and remove the ROM cover.
Remove the ROM cover.

8.5 Upgrading the Control Panel Software
4 Remove the two ROMs from the IC sockets

on the control panel board.
5 Insert the ROMs of the latest version into the

IC sockets.
· Insert the ROM with the IC16 on the label into the
most-left IC socket (ROM1), and the ROM with
IC17 on the label into the second IC socket (ROM2)
from the left.
· The two IC sockets on the right (ROM3, ROM4) are
not to be used.
Note: Confirm that all the pins on the ROM
are inserted into the IC socket com-
pletely.
ROM (2)

8.6 Upgrading the Print board using Flash option
Use following procedure only with Drypro Power OFF.
Open the control box in the bottom of the machine. Locate the Print board (Board with coaxial
connectors attached).
- Insert the Eprom with the new firmware version.
- Take off JP3
- Switch ON DIP SW 1-1
- Disconnect IDE cable from the harddisk (For safety reasons)
- Power on the machine
- Observe LED’s flashing. This takes about 3-5 minutes. When LED’s 2-4 and 3-5 are flashing
alternatively then the flashing process is ready.
- Power off the machine and remove the Eprom.
- Set back DIP SW 1-1 to OFF
- Put on JP3
- Connect IDE cable to harddisk
- Switch ON Drypro, go to maintenance panel and check the version.
In case of failure (Flashing not possible)
- Leave the EPROM in the socket.

- Set DIP SW 1-1 OFF (All switches must be OFF now)
- Leave JP3 open. In this case the board will use the EPROM instead of the FLASHROM
Blank Page
Chapter 9
Appendix
9.1 Explanation of Sucker Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.2 Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.3 File Names and the Timing to Create Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.3.1 Automatic creation of log files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.3.2 Operations upon starting log command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.4 Using telnet and ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4.1 Using telnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4.2 Using ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.5 Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.5.1 Supply volume board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.5.2 Supply drive board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.5.3 H-sync circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.4 Heat roller motor driver board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.5.5 HPRO CPU circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.5.6 HPRO power circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.5.7 HPRO I/F board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.5.8 Control panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.5.9 Power I/F board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9.5.10 Print control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.5.11 DENS I/F circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.5.12 Mechanical control circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.5.13 Relay board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.6 Timing Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.6.1 Pick up operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.6.2 Supply operation–Front transport–Feed 1 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.6.3 Exposure operation–Elevator transportation operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.6.4 HPRO section transport–Discharge section transport operation . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9.6.5 Sorter transport operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
9.6.6 Bar code reading & Barrier taking-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9.7 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9.10 Sorter Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Blank Page
9.1 Explanation of Sucker Operation
1 Film returning operation (1) / Home position • Sucker begins to go downward.

• Sucker unit begins to go backward.
• If the film that was not fed in the previous operation
still remains in the ditch of the tray, it will get back
to the tray as the sucker goes down.
Sucker
Sucker unit
2 Film returning operation (2) • The sucker goes down to its lowest position.
• The sucker unit goes to the farthest back side.
3 Pick up operation • The sucker goes up sucking the film.

• The sucker unit remains at the far back side.
Film

9.1 Explanation of Sucker Operation
4 Film separating operation • The leading edge of the film goes up to the height of
the roller.
• If the 2nd film is attached to the 1st film because of
static electricity, shake the leading edge of the film
by the film separator and replace it to the tray.
Film separator bar

Roller
5 Suction stop operation • The sucker unit goes forward and the leading edge of
the film goes to the roller.
• The sucker stops sucking.
• The film separator goes back to the position where it
does not hit to the leading edge of the film.
6 Film feeding operation / Home position • The rollers binding the leading edge of the film
begins to rotate and the film is fed.
• The sucker continues to go up and moves away from
the film transport pass.

9.2 Maintenance Information
Maintenance information is printed on the upper portion of the film printed from DRYPRO 722. The maintenance
information indicates the following contents.
No. Item Contents No. of Characters
1 LUT No. KC_LUT of DICOM Configuration Information 1
2 Contrast DICOM Contrast Value 2
3 Density DICOM Density Value 2
4 Interpolation No. DICOM Smoothing Type Value 1
5 Polarity P (Normal) or N (Reverse) 1
6 Max Density DICOM Max Density Value 3
7 Density Correction Factor Density Correction Factor Value 3
8 Total Film No. Total number of films processed 7
9 Film Code Bar code value of film package (See the next page.) 15
10 Channel ID Channel ID to manage DICOM 2
11 MAIN Ver. Version number of the main software 7
12 Mechanical Ver. Version number of the mechanical control software 7
13 Print Ver. Version number of the print control software 7
14 Control Panel Section Ver. Version number of the control panel section software 7
15 Body No. Serial number of DRYPRO 722 8
16 Film No. Film number issued by the controller 5
• If the number of characters of cach item is fewer than the maximum number of characters, the character will
be output from the left automatically.
• Each item is divided by a space equivalent to one character and the total number of spaces is equivalent to 93
characters (78 spaces for information plus 15 open spaces).

9.2 Maintenance Information
• Bar code figures of the film package

The contents of the bar code figures (15 digits) of the film package are indicated below.
No. Item Contents
1 Film size 1: 17x14
2: 14x14
3: 11x14
2 Base type 1: Blue base (SD-P)
2: Clear base for normal use
3: Blue base (DR-P)
3 Reserved (0 is always indicated.)
4 Type code 1: SD-P
2: SD-PC
3: DR-P
5 Emulsion No.
6 Reserved (0 is always indicated.)
The other figures indicate maintenance information upon film production.
Example of a Bar code Label
Film size and

Total film sheets
Film type
Emulsion No.
(261 162: Opposite order)
Expiration date
(June 2001)
Information for
production, etc.

9.3 File Names and the Timing to Create Log Files
9.3.1 Automatic creation of log files
The internal log file for DRYPRO 722 is created for each process in /home/kil8/log every day at 12:30pm. 14 prior
logs can be saved in /home/kil8/log.
Log files are given a number that indicates the extract record of the log.
Example: QueueMngd.1.tgz
The underlined number indicates the extract record.
As a new file is created every day at 12:30pm, the file created 14 times before is deleted, and the file created 13 times
before is renamed to the one of 14 times before. This process is applied to all the other files as shown below.
12:30 12:30
Current log file QueueMngd.0 QueueMngd.0 (New log) QueueMngd.0 (New log)
Log file of one time before QueueMngd.1.tgz QueueMngd.1.tgz QueueMngd.1.tgz
Log file of two times before QueueMngd.2.tgz QueueMngd.2.tgz QueueMngd.2.tgz
: : QueueMngd.3.tgz QueueMngd.3.tgz
: : : :
Log file of 12 times before : : :
Log file of 13 times before QueueMngd.12.tgz QueueMngd.12.tgz :
Log file of 14 times before QueueMngd.13.tgz QueueMngd.13.tgz QueueMngd.13.tgz
QueueMngd.14.tgz QueueMngd.14.tgz QueueMngd.14.tgz
Delete Delete
• Files with .tgz in their names are compressed files.

• The file name and created date can be confirmed by moving the current directory to /home/ki18/log and input-
ting a "Is -It" command when logging in to the main unit using telnet. When logging in to the main unit using
ftp, they can be confirmed by moving the current directory to /home/ki18/log and inputting a "dir _t" com-
mand. The table below is an example of the error log files displayed by telnet. A similar list will be displayed
for ftp.
# cd /home/ki18/log Date of file

# ls -lt Error*
-rw-rw-rw- 1 root root 0 jun 15 14:50 ErrorLog.0
-rw-rw-rw- 1 root root 408 jun 15 12:30 ErrorLog.1.tgz
:
:
#

9.3 File Names and the Timing to Create Log Files
9.3.2 Operations upon starting log command

The following two files are created in /home/kil8/log when logging in to DRYPRO 722 with telnet and starting the
log command.
(1) kil8file.xxxxxxxxxxxx.tgz (compressed file)
(2) kil8log.xxxxxxxxxxxx.tgz (compressed file)
• (The xxxxxxxxxxxx section indicates the date and time of when the log command was started.)
The kil8log.xxxxxxxxxxxx.tgz file contains the log for each process from 12:30pm to the start of the log command
into one file.
The kil8file.xxxxxxxxxxxx.tgz contains the internal information upon the start of the log command.
If the kil8file.xxxxxxxxxxxx.tgz file can be created after generating an error, more detailed than information those
collected in the log file of each process of the ones before the previous log file can be confirmed, therefore, it would
be useful to analyze the cause of the error.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to delete the two files after they are transmitted to the maintenance PC with ftp
as they will increase the HD capacity of the main DRYPRO 722 unit.

9.4 Using telnet and ftp
Upgrading the main software, correcting the densitometer, checking and correcting various file settings or files, etc.
of DRYPRO 722 are performed from the maintenance PC connected by network using telnet and ftp. The basic us-
ages are described in this section ,taking as example, telnet and ftp that come with Windows of the maintenance PC
as standard.
9.4.1 Using telnet

Telnet enables logging into the main unit from the maintenance PC and activating commands of the operation soft-
ware of the main unit or scripts and commands provided for DRYPRO 722.
• Activating telnet and logging in

1 Select [Run...] in [Start] under the Windows
task bar.
2 Input "telnet" and the IP address of DRYPRO

722 in the dialog box shown on the right, then
click [OK].
· The telnet window will open and "login:" will appear
once communication between the maintenance PC
and the main unit is established.
3 Input "root" from the keyboard and press the login: root
Enter key.
password: ki18main
· "password:" will be displayed.
#
4 Input "ki18main" and press the Enter key.

· Log-in is completed when the "#" prompt is dis-
played. Then, commands and scripts can be acti-
vated.
· The password that was input will not be displayed in
the actual screen.
· The password for DRYPRO 722 is fixed as
"ki18main".
• Logging out and closing telnet # logout

1 Input "logout" (or "lo") and press the Enter key
when the "#" prompt is displayed.
· Communication between the maintenance PC and
main unit will be disconnected.
2 Select [Close TELNET] from the [Connection]

menu.

• Telnet commands
It is recommended to remember the following two com-
mands as they are frequently used with telnet.
· cd: A command to move the current directory from

# cd /home/ki18/log
the logged-in directory to another directory. Input a
space after "cd", then input the directory name
(underlined section on the right) in which the current
directory will be moved to.
· ls: A command to display the list of files in the cur-

rent directory. Detailed information of the files
sorted in the order of the time they were created can
be displayed by adding an optional "-lt" after "ls". To
list only specific files, input a space after the option
then input a portion of the file name and a wildcard
"*".
# ls -lt ErrorLog*
-rw-rw-rw- 1 root root 0 jun 15 14:50 ErrorLog.0
:
:
#

9.4.2 Using ftp

Ftp enables logging into the main unit (DRYPRO) from the maintenance PC and transferring files between the main-
tenance PC and the main unit.
• Activating ftp and logging in

1 Select [Run...] in [Start] under the Windows
task bar.
2 Input "ftp" and the IP address of DRYPRO

722 in the dialog box shown on the right, then
click [OK].
· The ftp window will open and "User (<IP
address>):" will appear once communication
between the maintenance PC and the main unit is
established.
3 Input "ki18main" from the keyboard and press User(192.168.20.20:(none)): ki18main

the Enter key.
331 Password required for ki18main
· "password:" will be displayed.
Password: ki18main
4 Input "ki18main" and press the Enter key. 230 User ki18main logged in.
· Log-in is completed when the "ftp>" prompt is dis- ftp>
played. Then, files can be transferred by inputting
the commands.
· The password that was input will not be displayed in
the actual screen.
· The log-in name and password for the main unit is
fixed as "ki18main".
• Logging out and closing ftp ftp> bye

1 Input "bye" and press the Enter key when the 221 Goodbye.
"ftp>" prompt is displayed.
· Communication between the maintenance PC and
main unit will be disconnected and the ftp window
will close.

• ftp commands
The following commands are used to transfer files
(transferring and receiving) with ftp.
· ascii: A command to switch the ftp file transfer mode

ftp> ascii
to the ascii mode. Input this command and switch the
transfer mode before transferring the data which is 200 Type set to A.
character data (data of files with extensions of .txt, ftp> binary
.ini, .dat).
200 Type set to I.
· binary: A command to switch the ftp file transfer
mode to the binary mode. Input this command and
switch the transfer mode before transferring the data
which is other than character data (data of files with
extension of .tgz, or activating programs of setup,
etc.).
· put: A command to transfer the one designated file

ftp> put d003.ini
from the maintenance PC to the main unit. Input a
space after "put", then input the name of the file to be 200 PORT command successful
transferred. "226 Transfer complete" will be dis- 150 Opening ASCII mode data........
played when the transfer is completed. 226 Transfer complete.
23 bytes sent in 0.00..............
ftp>
· get: A command to transfer the one designated file

from the main unit to the maintenance PC. Input a
ftp> get d003.ini
space after "get", then input the name of the file to be 200 PORT command successful
transferred. "226 Transfer complete" will be dis- 150 Opening ASCII mode data.........
played when the transfer is completed. 226 Transfer complete.
23 bytes received in 0.00...........
ftp>
· cd: A command to move the current directory on the

main unit side. The file sent with "put" from the
ftp> cd /home/ki18/environments
maintenance PC is copied to this current directory. 250 CWD command successful
Files received with "get" must be contained in this ftp>
current directory. Input a space after "cd", then input
the name of the directory (underlined section on the
right) in which the current directory will be moved
to.
· lcd: A command to move the current directory on the

maintenance PC side. The file sent with "put" from
ftp> lcd c:\temp
the maintenance PC is copied to this current direc- 250 CWD command successful
tory. Files received with "get" must be contained in ftp>
this current directory. Input a space after "lcd", then
input the name of the directory (underlined section
on the right) in which the current directory will be
moved to.

It is recommended to remember the following two com-

mands as they are frequently used with ftp.
· dir: A command to display the list of files in the cur-

ftp> dir -t Error*
rent directory. Input a space after "dir" then input the
command option. The files can be sorted in the order 200 PORT command successful
of the time they were created and displayed by input- 150 Opening ASCII mode data..........
ting "dir -t". To list only specific files, input a space total 814
after the option then input a portion of the file name -rw-rw-rw- 1 ki18main ki18main....
and a wildcard "*". The format in displaying the files -rw-rw-rw- 1 ki18main ki18main....
is almost the same as when inputting "ls -it" for the -rw-rw-rw- 1 ki18main ki18main....
telnet command. :
:
ftp>
· mput:
ftp> mget Error*
· mget: "mput" and "mget" are commands to transfer
files, just as "put" and "get", however, this command mget ErrorLog.0? y
enables transferring files in sequence by attaching
the wildcard "*" in the designated file names. For
:
example, when "mgetErrorLog*" is input, the name
of the file that corresponds to the "ErrorLog*" is dis- :
played one by one, and an inquiry of whether or not mget ErrorLog.1.tgz? n
to transfer the files is displayed. A file will be sent by
mget ErrorLog.2.tgz? n
inputting "y", and a file will be skipped by inputting
"n". mget ErrorLog.3.tgz? y
:
:
· delete: A command to delete the one designated file

from the current directory.
ftp> delete Kil8log.000615144530tgz
250 DELE command successful.
ftp>

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.1 Supply volume board
• Board layout
1. Supply volume board / New (0451H1180C21P01)
· The supply volume board / New (0451H1180C21P01) is mounted on the supply drive board / New
(0451H1040C21P01) and (0451H1040D21P01).
TP4 TP6 TP7

TP3 TP5 TP8
VR1 VR3 VR5

VR2 VR4 VR6
TP2(GND) TP9
TP12 TP1(5V)
TP11
VR9 VR8 VR7
TP10
2. Supply volume board / Old (0451H1180A21P01)

· The supply volume board / Old (0451H1180A21P01) is mounted on the supply drive board / Old
(0451H1040A21P01) and (0451H1040B21P01).
TP10
TP9
TP11
JJ1
JJ2
VR6
VR5
VR4
VR3
VR2
VR1
TP1 TP2 TP8 TP7 TP6 TP5 TP4 TP3

(+5V) (GND)

9.5 Board Layout
• Test pin
· TP12 is not attached on 0451H1040A21P01 and 0451H1040B21P01.
No. Pin name Meaning on output value
TP1 +5V +5V power supply
TP2 GND Grounding
TP3 BL_01 Blue film 01 sheet (2.5V) REF voltage
TP4 BL_12 Blue film 12 sheets (1.5V) REF voltage
TP5 CLR_01 Clear film 01 sheet (3.3V) REF voltage
TP6 CLR_12 Clear film 12 sheets (2.3V) REF voltage
TP7 CR_01 CR film 01 sheet (2.5V) REF voltage
TP8 CR_12 CR film 12 sheets (1.5V) REF voltage
TP9 REF Empty detection (3.0V) REF voltage
TP10 EMP Film empty sensor
TP11 BRIA
TP12 2MAI Film 2-sheet sensor
• Volume
· VR7 to VR9 are not attached on 0451H1040A21P01 and 0451H1040B21P01.
No. Function
VR1 Blue film 01 sheet (2.5V) REF voltage adjusting volume
VR2 Blue film 12 sheets (1.5V) REF voltage adjusting volume
VR3 Clear film 01 sheet (3.3V) REF voltage adjusting volume
VR4 Clear film 12 sheets (2.3V) REF voltage adjusting volume
VR5 CR film 01 sheet (2.5V) REF voltage adjusting volume
VR6 CR film 12 sheets (1.5V) REF voltage adjusting volume
VR7
VR8
VR9

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.2 Supply drive board

• Component layout
1. Supply drive board / New (0451H1040C21P01) (0451H1040D21P01)
· The connectors and test pins on the (0451H1040C21P01) are laid out in the same way as on the
(0451H1040D21P01).
TP1 TP5 TP6

JJ1 JJ14 JJ13
CN1
JJ2
JJ4 JJ5 JJ6 JJ7 JJ8 JJ11 JJ3 JJ15 JJ12
2. Supply drive board / Old (0451H1040A21P01) (0451H1040B21P01)

· The connectors and test pins on the (0451H1040A21P01) are laid out in the same way as on the
(0451H1040B21P01).
VR1 VR2 VR3

TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6
JJ1 JJ14 JJ13
CN2 CN1
JJ2

9.5 Board Layout
• Test pin
· TP2 to 4 are not attached on 0451H1040C21P01 and 0451H1040D21P01.
TP1 GND Grounding
TP2 FILM_2 Film 2-sheet sensor
TP3 FILM_EMP Film empty sensor
TP4 BARA
TP5 +5V +5V power supply
TP6 GND Grounding
• Volume
· 0451H1040A21P01 and 0451H1040B21P01 only
No. Function
VR1 Film 2-sheet sensor
VR2 Unused
VR3 Film empty sensor

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.3 H-sync circuit board

• Outline drawing
H-sync sensor
J1
JP1

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.4 Heat roller motor driver board

• Outline drawing
CN3 CN2
CN1

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.5 HPRO CPU circuit board

• Outline drawing
1. HPRO CPU circuit board (0451H1060C)
JJ2
JJ1
JJ7
SW1
2. HPRO CPU circuit board (0451H1060A)
JJ2
JJ1
JJ7 SW1

9.5 Board Layout
• Dip switch (SW1: 8bits)
1 2 3 4 4 6 7 8 Remarks
Setting 1 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF Under normal operations
Setting 2 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF During downloading the soft-

ware

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.6 HPRO power circuit board

• Outline drawing
1. HPRO power circuit board (0451H1050C)
JJ3
JJ4
2. HPRO power circuit board (0451H1050A)
JJ3
JJ4

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.7 HPRO I/F board

• Outline drawing
1. HPRO I/F board (0451H1070C)
JJ6
JJ5
2. HPRO I/F board (0451H1070A)
JJ6
JJ5

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.8 Control panel board

• Outline drawing
ROM1 ROM2
CN217 CN210
IC16 IC17 IC12 IC18

CN10
CN213
ROM1 ROM2 ROM3 ROM4

BZ1
CN212
VR1 BZ1
• Volume
No. Normal position Function
VR1 Adjusting the volume of buzzer (BZ1)
• ROM socket
No. ROM No. Function
IC17 ROM 1 Control panel section program EPROM (IC17)
IC16 ROM 2 Control panel section program EPROM (IC16)
IC12 ROM 3 Unused
IC18 ROM 4 Unused

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.9 Power I/F board

• Outline drawing
1. Power I/F board (0451H1160C)
TP6 TP2 TP1 TP8

TP7 TP5 TP4 TP3
JJ5 JJ3 JJ7 JJ8
JJ4
JJ6 JJ1
JJ9
JJ2
JJ10
2. Power I/F board (0451H1160B)
TP7 TP5 TP2 TP1

TP8 TP6 TP3 TP4
JJ5 JJ3 JJ7 JJ8
JJ4
JJ1
JJ6
JJ9
JJ2
JJ10

9.5 Board Layout
• Test pins
No. Pin name Function
TP1 +3.3 V +3.3 V power
TP2 -5 V -5 V power
TP3 +5 V +5 V power
TP4 -12 V -12 V power
TP5 +12 V +12 V power
TP6 P+12 V +12 V power
TP7 P-12 V -12 V power
TP8 DGND Digital grounding
• LED
· The power I/F board (0451H1160B) does not have the LED.
No. Pin name Function
D1 +3.3 V +3.3 V power monitor
D2 +5 V +5 V power monitor
D3 -12 V -12 V power monitor
D4 -5V -5 V power monitor
D5 +12 V +12 V power monitor
D6 P+12 V P+12 V power monitor
D7 P-12 V P-12 V power monitor

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.10 Print control board

• Outline drawing
1. Print control board (0451H1010C21P01)
TP4 TP13
TP6 TP15 TP14 TP1 Print control memory
JJ7 JJ4 JJ2
TP7
TP8
TP5
VR2
HD
Memory socket
JP3
VR1
VIDEO
JP1
JJ1
IC54
EPROM socket
2. Print control board (0451H1010B21P01)
TP4 TP13
TP6 TP15 TP14 TP1 Print control memory
JJ7 JJ4 JJ2
TP7
TP8
TP5
VR2
HD
Memory socket
JP3
VR1
VIDEO
JP1
JJ1
IC54
EPROM socket

9.5 Board Layout
3. Print control board (0451H1010A21P01)
TP15 TP14 TP13 Print control memory

JJ7 JJ4 JJ2
TP7
TP5
JP1
TP6
TP4
JJ5
HD
VR1 Memory socket
JP3
VIDEO
VR2
IC54
TP8 JJ1
EPROM socket
TP1
• Test pins

TP1 DGND Digital GND
TP4 VD V-sync signal (Vertical synchronizing signal)
TP5 HD H-sync signal (Horizontal synchronizing signal)
TP6 PD monitor LD amount of light value monitor signal
TP7 AGND Analog GND
TP8 LDON LD-ON signal
TP13 3.3 V 3.3 V DC
TP14 5.0 V 5 V DC
TP15 DGND Digital GND
• Volume
No. Function
VR1 Adjusting the reference voltage
VR2 Adjusting the output voltage of VIDEO signal
CAUTION: The volumes above are factory-adjusted. Never adjust them during service.
• Jumper

JP1 1-2 short-circuited Not changeable
JP3 Short-circuited Open when upgrading the firmware (when inserting
EPROM into IC 17).

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.11 DENS I/F circuit board

• Components layout
SW1 CN3 CN1
CN2
• DIP switch (SW1: 8 bits)
No. Default
SW1-1 ON
SW1-2 ON
SW1-3 OFF
SW1-4 ON
SW1-5 OFF
SW1-6 OFF
SW1-7 OFF
SW1-8 OFF
CAUTION: The above is factory-configured. Never change during service.

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.12 Mechanical control circuit board

• Outline drawing
· The connectors, EPROM sockets, DIP switches, test pins, and jumpers on the mechanical control circuit board
(0451H1030A51P01) are laid out in the same way as on the mechanical control circuit board
(0451H1030B51P01).
JJ12 JJ17 JJ4 JJ13 JJ7
JJ9
JJ11
TP45 LED2
LED1
JP4
SW2
JJ14
JJ10
TP36 TP32 TP34

TP37 EPROM
TP31 TP33
socket
TP35 IC4

9.5 Board Layout
• Test pins
TP31 +12V +12V power
TP32 AGND Analog grounding
TP33 -12V 12V power
TP34 +5V +5V power
TP35 +24V +24V power
TP36 PGND Power grounding
TP37 GND Grounding
TP45 GND Grounding
• DIP switch (SW2: 2bits)
S2-1 OFF Switching between EPROM and flash ROM (normal: flash
ROM)
S2-2 OFF Switching banks of the flash ROM (normal: bank 1)
• Jumper
JP4 Short-circuited Controlling LED illumination (normal: short-circuited)

The operation of the mechanical control circuit board can be
monitored by illuminating the two LEDs.
LED 1 (Red, OFF): Under normal operation
LED 1 (Red, ON): An error occurs on the mechan-
ical control circuit board or the
HPRO section.
LED 2 (Green, OFF): Abnormal operation of the me-
chanical control circuit board
(out of control)
LED 2 (Green, Blinking): Under normal operation
LED 2 (Green, ON): Abnormal operation of the me-
chanical control circuit board
(out of control)

9.5 Board Layout
9.5.13 Relay board

• Outline drawing
1. Relay board (0451H1410A)
CN8 CN2
CN1

9.6 Timing Chart
9.6.1 Pick up operation
sup_t[9] sup_t[2] sup_t[3]

Sucker Motor
sup_t[1]
Sucker Home Position
Sensor
Sucker Separation
Sensor
Sucker Release Sensor

sup_t[10]
Suction Pump
Suction Stop
Valve
Film Transport Motor

Empty
Empty Detect Sensor
Empty Sensor Transmitter
sup_t[0] 10.0s The timeout period of sucker operation

sup_t[1] 1.9s The operation time of suction stop valve, suction pump ON position
sup_t[2] 0.5s Film separating operation stop timing
sup_t[3] 0.1s Sucker velease position
sup_t[5] 3.0s Transport time until 2-sheet detection
sup_t[6] 0.1s Transport time after 2-sheet detection
sup_t[9] 0.3s Time for breaking, changing motor load
sup_t[10] 0.3s Sucker home position start time
sup_L 5 Pick-up retry count
• Sucker Motor When it stopped, breaks are applied on hardware.
• Film Transport 200ms When it stopped, breaks are applied on software.
Motor

9.6 Timing Chart
9.6.2 Supply operation–Front transport–Feed 1 operation
Film Tranport Motor
2-Sheet Sensor Receiver
2-Sheet Sensor Transmitter
Front Transport Motor fau_t[4]
fau_t[5]
Lower tramsport section
Entrance Film Sensor 0.5s
Pusher Motor
Feed 2
Pusher Home position Sensor Operation
Subscan Entrance Sensor
Exposure Unit Sensor

Transmitter
Floating Fan fau_t[3]
Tilt tray Motor
Tray Horizontal Position

Sensor
DD Motor
Polygon Motor
Nip Pressure Solenoid
Elevator Transport Motor
fau_t[3] 0.5s Lower transport tray standby time

fau_t[4] 1.5s Operation time of receiving motor and floating fan
fau_t[5] 1.0s Standby time of stopping receiving motor and floating fan
putshpm_V[0] 100mm/s Pusher feed speed 1
ddpm_V[0] 42.059mm/s Speed of optical DD motor low speed transport

9.6 Timing Chart
9.6.3 Exposure operation–Elevator transportation operation
Returning (200mm/s)
Feed 2
Pusher Motor
Slow up 200ms
Pusher Home Position
V-Sync Lower Sensor
V-Sync Upper Sensor
Exposure Sensor Transmitter
Floating Fan
Tilt Tray Motor

fau_t[2]
Tray Horizontal
Position Sensor
ts exp_t
DD Motor
Polygon Motor
Nip Pressure Solenoid nip_t0
nip_t2
uff_t[1]
Elevator Transport Motor
HPRO Section Entrance

Film Sensor
uff_t[3]
uff_t[2]
Elevator Transport Nip Motor
Elevator Transport
Nip Sensor uffm_t[2]
nip_Dmin 12% Nip weak level

nip_Dmax 100% Nip strong level
fau_t[2] 1.5s Lower Transport Tray Tilt time
ts depends on each film size(14*17inch 430mm*1000/42.059)
exp_t 29mm*1000/42.059 V-sync upper roller out time
nip_t3 3.50s Start timing for changing
nip_t0 ts-nip_t3 Timing for nip changing
nip_t2 3.0s Time for slowing down
pushpm_V[1] 40mm/s Pusher feed speed 2

9.6 Timing Chart
pushpm_V[2] 200mm/s Pusher returning speed 1

uffm_V[0] 19mm/s Speed for elevator transport motor low speed transport
uffm_V[1] 200mm/s Speed for elevator transport motor high speed transport
uffm_V[2] 0.5s Elevator nip close position adjustment time
uff_t[0] 0.5s Elevator nip open position adjustment time
uff_t[1] 0.8s HPRO entrance nip time
uff_t[2] 1.5s Time for opening elevator nip
• The speed of slowing up and slowing down of the Elevator transport motor is 200ms.

9.6 Timing Chart
9.6.4 HPRO section transport–Discharge section transport operation
Discharge Motor ext_t
Densitometer Ready Sensor
Heat Roller
cvpm_Tup 0.20s Slow up time

ext_t 2.0s
cvpm_V[0] 19.51mm/s Speed of discharge motor low speed transport
cvpm_V[1] 200.00mm/s Speed of discharge motor high speed transport
rfpm_V[0] 19.32mm/s Heat roller transport speed

9.6 Timing Chart
9.6.5 Sorter transport operation

In exiting into Bin No.2
Jam Detection Sensor
Sorter Drive Motor
Gate Switching Solenoid 1

(In exiting into Bin No.1)

9.6 Timing Chart
9.6.6 Bar code reading & Barrier taking-up
Shutter Motor
Shutter Home Position Sensor
Shutter Open Position Sensor

7.5s
Barrier Taking-up Motor, when 100ms
reading and collect successed. 500ms
3.4s
Bar code Reading LED
Barrier Taking-up Motor,

when reading is failed.
Barrier Taking-up Motor, when 500ms 500ms

reading successed; collect failed. 3.4s

1.5s 1.5s
Retry 4 times 6.0s
Barrier Taking-up Motor, when reading

successed; collect failed,
3.4s 500ms 500ms
then successed.

1.5s
sup_t[4] 7.0s Timeout period of shutter open, shutter close

sup_t[8] 10.0s Barrier Taking-up time

9.7 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/3)



9.10 Sorter Overall Wiring Diagram
Gate switching Gate switching Gate switching Gate switching Sorter drive motor
solenoid 1 solenoid 2 solenoid 3 solenoid 4 W
CT3 GY
Y
SOL1 SOL2 SOL3 SOL4 CT4
BR M1
BK
#20 O
#20 O
#20 O
#20 Y
#20 Y
#20 Y
#20 Y
#20 O
Designation
C1
Wire-Color
Black BK
Brown BR 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
JP10
R
JP7
JP8
JP9
Red
#20 GY
#20 BR
#20 BR
Orange
#20 BL
#20 O
#20 R
#20 Y
#20 P
#20 V
#20 Y
SCN12
Yellow Y
SCN4
SCN5
SCN6
SCN7
Green GR
Blue BL 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 1 2 3
Violet V
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
JJ11
JJ12
N.C
MAG_+
AC120V(N)
DRV_+
REC_+
SPR_+
JJ4
JJ5
JJ6
JJ7
JJ8
MAG_-
AC120V(L)
REC_-
DRV_-
SPR_-
GY
Sorter VR
SUC_MV_+
Gray
Sorter DRV Board
TRY_SOL_+
SUC_MOT_+
SPA1_MOT_+
White W
Pink P Board
SHUT_HON
AC120V(N)
AC120V(L)
SUC_MON
SUC_EXT
SLACH_+
SLACH_-
SOUT_+
SCLK_+
SOUT_-
FILM_2
SCLK_-
LED_A
PGND
SIN_+
SIN_-
GND
GND
GND
SCN14 JJ14
VCC
VCC
JJ13
GND
GND
GND
24V
SCN1 JJ1
SCN2 JJ2
5V
5V
5V
2 1 1 2 1 2 13 3 4 14 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
SCN13
#24 BK
#24 BK
#24 BK
#18 BR
#24 R
#24 R
#24 R
#18 R
#22 GR
#24 BR
CT2
#22 BL
JP17 #24 O
#24 R
#24 Y
#22 O
#22 R
#22 P
#18 BK
#24 GY/R1
#24 GY/B1
CT1
#24 W/R1
#24 W/B1
#24 O/B1
#24 P/R1
#24 Y/R1
#24 Y/B1
#18 GR
#18 GR
#18 BL
#22 BK
#22 BK
JP16
#22 R
#22 R
JP13
JP15
6 2 4 8 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
VCC
VCC
GND
OUT
DRYPRO Model 722 +V -V -V +V +V -V -V
#18 BK
#18 W
TB2 SUP1 SUP2
JP22
JP23
6 X1
L N G L N G LED DET
5 1 0 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 2 3 1 2 3
JP12
JP14
Sorter jam detection sensor 7. Sorter jam detection sensor
4
COM
COM
NO
NO
NC
NC
(light-emitting side) (light-receiving side)
#18 G
#18 G
#18 BK
#18 BK
#18 BK
3
#18 W
#18 W
#18 W
AC120V N
2 JP19 JJ19 JJ1 JP1 CT5
#16 BK #16 BK #14 BK
AC120V L 1 #16 W
1
#16 W
1
#14 W
2 2 MS3 MS1
CT6 Release lever detection Sorter right cover open position detection
3
#16 G/Y #14 GR
#14 GR
MCN7 JP20 JJ20 JP2 JJ2

Front door Sorter main body
#24 BR #24 BR #24 O/B1
5 1 1
#24 R #24 R #24 W/B1
6 2 2
#24 O #24 O #24 GY/B1
7 3 3
MEC #24 Y #24 Y #24 Y/B1
8 4 4
#24 P #24 P #24 P/R1
CTL 9 5 5
#24 BL #24 BL #24 W/R1
10 6 6
Board #24 V #24 V #24 GY/R1
11 7 7
#24 GY #24 GY #24 Y/R1
12 8 8
9

Blank Page
Blank Page
KONICA MEDICAL IMAGWNG INC. KONICA CANADA INC. KONICA EUROPE GMBH
411 Netwark Pompton Tumpike, Wayne, NJ 07470, U.S.A 1329 Meyerside Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C9, Friedrich-Bergius-Str. Gewerbegebiet,
TEL.973-633-1500 CANADA 85662 Hohenbrunn, GERMANY
TEL.905-670-7722 TEL.8102-8040
KONICA FRANCE S.A. KONICA U.K. LTD.

Paris Nord II, 305 rue de la Belle Etoile, B.P. 50077, 95948 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham, Middlesex
ROISSY C.D.G. CEDEX, FRANCE TW13 7HD, U.K.
TEL.1-4938-6550 TEL.1-81-751-6121

Service Manual (V1.22)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual (V1.22)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual (V1.22)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DRY LASER IMAGER

DRYPRO model 722

Chapter 2 Disassembling and Assembling the Main Units

DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6 i

2.5 Replacing Components in Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

ii DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6

2.12 Disassembling Sorter and Replacing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128

Chapter 3 Checking and Adjusting

DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6 iii

3.8 Checking and Adjusting Sorter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Chapter 4 Error Codes and Remedies

iv DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6

5.2.11 Cleaning the separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Chapter 6 Service Screens on Control Panel Section

DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6 v

7.2.22 Counter display; Operation time display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

vi DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6

8.5 Upgrading the Control Panel Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.22 2001.6 vii

Risk of the Damage

Bodily injury Loss of life or serious

Moderate damage or light WARNING

Damage to property only CAUTION

DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.1 2001.3 0-1

0.1.2. Description on labels

/ WARNING / WARNUNG CAUTION ACHTUNG

DANGERROUS VOLTAGE The temperature of the transport unit may

• Heat caution 125 • Heat caution 125-2 -2

125 The Temperature of the developing unit

• Laser caution label 1 • Laser caution label 2

CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

0-2 DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.1 2001.3

• Laser class 1 label • Laser power label

LASER KLASSE 1 Dauerstrichlaser

• Caution for heat roller

Do not touch Heat-Roller

• Handling heat roller jams

CAUTION LIFT UP LIFT UP

• Handling cooling section jams

CAUTION ACHTUNG CAUTION

DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.1 2001.3 0-3

0.1.3. Location of caution labels

0-4 DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.1 2001.3

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.1 2001.3 0-5

CAUTION ACHTUNG CAUTION

125 The Temperature of the developing unit

Do not touch Heat-Roller

CAUTION LIFT UP LIFT UP

0-6 DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.1 2001.3

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.1 2001.3 0-7

• Precautions on the safety of workers

• Precautions to avoid damage to property

0-8 DRYPRO 722 Service Manual Ver.1.1 2001.3

1.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Model Name: DRYPRO model 722

Device Type: Dry Laser Imager

Laser Source: Semiconductor Laser